POLYMORPHIC MARKERS OF PROSTATE CARCINOMA TUMOR ANTIGEN-1 (PCTA-1)

Abstract: The invention concerns the genomic sequence and cDNA sequences of the PCTA-1 gene. The invention also concerns biallelic markers of the PCTA-1 gene and the association established between these markers and prostate cancer. The invention provides means to determine the predisposition of individuals to prostate cancer as well as means for the diagnosis of prostate cancer and for the prognosis/detection of an eventual treatment response to agents acting against prostate cancer.

Description: POLYMORPHIC MARKERS OF PROSTATE CARCINOMA TUMOR ANTIGEN -1 (PCTA-1) FIELD OF THE INVENTION The invention concerns the genomic and cDNA sequences of the PCTA-1 gene, biallelic markers of the PCTA-1 gene and the association established between these markers and prostate cancer. The invention provides means to determine the predisposition of individuals to prostate cancer as well as means for the diagnosis of this cancer and for the prognosis/detection of an eventual treatment response to therapeutic agents acting against prostate cancer. BACKGROUND OF THE INVENTION Prostate Cancer The incidence of prostate cancer has dramatically increased over the last decades. It averages 30-50/100,000 males in Western European countries as well as withm the US White male population. In these countries, it has recently become the most commonly diagnosed malignancy, being one of every four cancers diagnosed in American males. Prostate cancer's incidence is very much population specific, since it vanes from 2/100,000 in China, to over 80/100,000 among African-American males. In France, the incidence of prostate cancer is 35/100,000 males and it is increasing by 10/100,000 per decade. Mortality due to prostate cancer is also growing accordingly. It is the second cause of cancer death among French males, and the first one among French males aged over 70 This makes prostate cancer a serious burden m terms of public health. Prostate cancer is a latent disease. Many men carry prostate cancer cells without overt signs of disease Autopsies of individuals dying of other causes show prostate cancer cells in 30 % of men at age 50 and in 60 % of men at age 80. Furthermore, prostate cancer can take up to 10 years to kill a patient after the initial diagnosis. The progression of the disease usually goes from a well-defined mass within the prostate to a breakdown and invasion of the lateral margins of the prostate, followed by metastasis to regional lymph nodes, and metastasis to the bone marrow. Cancer metastasis to bone is common and often associated with uncontrollable pam. Unfortunately, m 80 % of cases, diagnosis of prostate cancer is established when the disease has already metastasized to the bones Of special interest is the observation that prostate cancers frequently grow more rapidly in sites of metastasis than within the prostate itself. Early-stage diagnosis of prostate cancer mainly relies today on Prostate Specific Antigen (PSA) dosage, and allows the detection of prostate cancer seven years before clinical symptoms become apparent. The effectiveness of PSA dosage diagnosis is however limited, due to its inability to discriminate between malignant and non-malignant affections of the organ and because not all prostate cancers give πse to an elevated serum PSA concentration. Furthermore, PSA dosage and other currently available approaches such as physical examination, tissue biopsy and bone scans are of limited value in predicting disease progression. Therefore, there is a strong need for a reliable diagnostic procedure which would enable a more systematic early-stage prostate cancer prognosis. Although an early-stage prostate cancer prognosis is important, the possibility of measuπng the peπod of time during which treatment can be deferred is also interesting as currently available medicaments are expensive and generate important adverse effects. However, the aggressiveness of prostate tumors vanes widely. Some tumors are relatively aggressive, doubling every six months whereas others are slow-growing, doubling once every five years. In fact, the majonty of prostate cancers grows relatively slowly and never becomes clinically manifest. Very often, affected patients are among the elderly and die from another disease before prostate cancer actually develops. Thus, a significant question in treating prostate carcinoma is how to discnminate between tumors that will progress and those that will not progress dunng the expected lifetime of the patient. Hence, there is also a strong need for detection means which may be used to evaluate the aggressiveness or the development potential of prostate cancer tumors once diagnosed. Furthermore, at the present time, there is no means to predict prostate cancer susceptibility. It would also be very beneficial to detect individual susceptibility to prostate cancer. This could allow preventive treatment and a careful follow up of the development of the tumor. A further consequence of the slow growth rate of prostate cancer is that few cancer cells are actively dividing at any one time, rendering prostate cancer generally resistant to radiation and chemotherapy. Surgery is the mainstay of treatment but it is largely ineffective and removes the ejaculatory ducts, resulting in impotence. Oral oestrogens and lutemizing releasing hormone analogs are also used for treatment of prostate cancer. These hormonal treatments provide marked improvement for many patients, but they only provide temporary relief Indeed, most of these cancers soon relapse with the development of hormone-resistant tumor cells and the oestrogen treatment can lead to senous cardiovascular complications. Consequently, there is a strong need for preventive and curative treatment of prostate cancer. Efficacy/tolerance prognosis could be precious in prostate cancer therapy. Indeed, hormonal therapy, the mam treatment currently available, presents important side effects. The use of chemotherapy is limited because of the small number of patients with chemosensitive tumors. Furthennore the age profile of the prostate cancer patient and intolerance to chemotherapy make the systematic use of this treatment very difficult. Therefore, a valuable assessment of the eventual efficacy of a medicament to be administered to a prostate cancer patent as well as the patent's eventual tolerance to it may permit to enhance the benefit nsk ratio of prostate cancer treatment. Prostate Carcinoma Tumor Antigen -1 (PCTA-1) WO 96/21671 describes a new protein, named PCTA-1. The document descnbes the cloning and sequencing of a cDNA encoding PCTA-1 (GenBank L78132). This cDNA has 3.85 kb in length and presents about 80 % sequence homology with rat galectιn-8. WO 96/21671 mentions that the PCTA-1 protein retains a number of conserved structural motifs that are found in most members of the galectm gene family On the basis of its predicted ammo acid sequence, PCTA-1 is said to appear to be a human homologue of rat galectm-8. The galectins display wide tissue distribution, clear developmental regulation, and differential levels m specific tissues, supporting the hypothesis that they contribute to many physiologically important processes m mammalian cells. Of direct relevance to cancer is the finding that the galectms can mediate both cell-cell and cell-matrix interactions SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION The inventors have characterized the genomic sequence of the PCTA-1 gene, including its regulatory regions, and, through an association study, have shown that alleles of some biallelic markers of PCTA-1 are associated with prostate cancer Therefore, the present invention concerns the identification and characterization of the genomic sequence of the PCTA-1 gene, of new cDNAs sequence and the proteins encoded by these cDNAs. The invention also concerns biallelic markers located m such sequences, as well as the selection of significant polymorphisms associated with prostate cancer. Oligonucleotide probes and pnmers hybridizing specifically with a genomic sequence of PCTA-1 are also part of the invention A further object of the invention consists of recombinant vectors comprising any of the nucleic acid sequences descnbed in the present invention, and m particular of recombinant vectors comprising the regulatory region of PCTA-1 or a sequence encoding a PCTA-1 protein, as well as cell hosts comprising said nucleic acid sequences or recombinant vectors The selected polymorphisms are used in the design of assays for the reliable detection of genetic susceptibility to prostate cancer, of an early onset of prostate cancer, of the aggressiveness of prostate cancer tumors, of a modified or forthcoming expression of the PCTA-1 gene, of a modified or forthcoming production of the PCTA-1 protein, or of the production of a modified PCTA-1 protein. They can be used for diagnosis, staging, prognosis, and momtonng of such a disease, which processes can be further included within treatment approaches. The selected polymorphisms can also be used in the design of drug screening protocols to provide an accurate and efficient evaluation of the therapeutic and side-effect potential of new or already existing medicaments. The invention also encompasses methods of screening of molecules which modulate or inhibit the expression of the PCTA-1 gene and more preferably of agent acting against prostate cancer. BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE DRAWINGS Figure IA is a diagram of the PCTA-1 gene with an indication of the relative position of the biallelic markers of the present invention. The upper line refers to the genomic sequence of PCTA-1. The middle line refers to the alternative cDNA compnsmg the exon 6bιs with the biallelic markers localization. The lower line refers the PCTA-1 protein with the polymoφhic ammo acids due to the biallelic markers. © refers to frequent SNP (detected on pool of hundred DNA). Figure IB is a diagram of the 3 alternative cDNAs oi PCTA-1. Figure 2 is a graph demonstrating the association between some of the biallelic markers of the invention and prostate cancer with the absolute value of the loganthm (base 10) of the p-value of the chi-square values for each marker shown on the y-axis and a rough estimate of the position of each marker with respect to the PCTA-1 gene elements on the x-axis. Figure 3 is a block diagram of an exemplary computer system. Figure 4 is a flow diagram illustrating one embodiment of a process 200 for companng a new nucleotide or protein sequence with a database of sequences in order to determine the homology levels between the new sequence and the sequences m the database. Figure 5 is a flow diagram illustrating one embodiment of a process 250 in a computer for determining whether two sequences are homologous. Figure 6 is a flow diagram illustrating one embodiment of an identifier process 300 for detecting the presence of a feature in a sequence. Figure 7 is an alignment of the mouse and human PCTA-1 proteins. BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE SEQUENCES PROVIDED IN THE SEQUENCE LISTING SEQ ID No 1 contains a genomic sequence of PCTA-1 comprising the 5' regulatory region (upstream untranscnbed region), the exons (0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 6bιs, 7, 8, 9, 9bιs, and 9ter) and introns, and the 3' regulatory region (downstream untranscribed region). SEQ ID No 2 contains a cDNA sequence of PCTA-1 comprising the exons 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, and 9. SEQ ID No 3 contains a cDNA sequence of PCTA-1 comprising the exons 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 6bιs, 7, 8, and 9. SEQ ID No 4 contains a cDNA sequence oi PCTA-1 comprising the exons 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9bιs and 9ter. SEQ ID No 5 contains the ammo acid sequence encoded by the cDNA of SEQ ID No 2. SEQ ID No 6 contains the ammo acid sequence encoded by the cDNA of SEQ ID No 3. SEQ ID No 7 contains the ammo acid sequence encoded by the cDNA of SEQ ID No 4. SEQ ID No 8 contains a murine cDNA sequence oi PCTA-1. SEQ ID No 9 contains the ammo acid sequence encoded by the cDNA of SEQ ID No 8. SEQ ID No 10 contains a primer containing the additional PU 5' sequence described further in Example 2. SEQ ID No 11 contains a primer containing the additional RP 5' sequence described further m Example 2. DETAILED DESCRIPTION OF THE INVENTION Definitions Before descnbmg the invention m greater detail, the following definitions are set forth to illustrate and define the meaning and scope of the terms used to descnbe the invention herein. The term "PCTA-1 gene" is intended to define an entity which can comprise some or all the following elements : exons, introns, promoter, regulatory regions, 5'UTR, 3' UTR and regions never transcribed and located either upstream or downstream of the coding sequence oi PCTA-1. The term "PCTA-1 gene", when used herein, encompasses genomic, mRNA and cDNA sequences encoding a PCTA-1 protein The term "heterologous protein", when used herein, is intended to designate any protein or polypeptide other than the PCTA-1 protein. More particularly, the heterologous protein is a compound which can be used as a marker in further expenments with a PCTA-1 regulatory region or as a toxin to certain cells in which it is intended to be produced, preferably a tox to prostate cancer cells. As used herein, the term "toxm gene" refers to a polynucleotide sequence which encodes a polypeptide that, when expressed in a eukaryotic cell, typically a mammalian cell, kills or disables the cell or causes the cell to exhibit apoptosis, cytostasis or senescence. The term "isolated" requires that the material be removed from its original environment (e.g., the natural environment if it is naturally occurring). For example, a naturally-occurring polynucleotide or polypeptide present in a living animal is not isolated, but the same polynucleotide or DNA or polypeptide, separated from some or all of the coexisting materials in the natural system, is isolated. Such polynucleotide could be part of a vector and/or such polynucleotide or polypeptide could be part of a composition, and still be isolated in that the vector or composition is not part of its natural environment. The term "punfied" does not require absolute purity; rather, it is intended as a relative definition. Punfication of starting material or natural matenal to at least one order of magnitude, preferably two or three orders, and more preferably four or five orders of magnitude is expressly contemplated. As an example, purification from 0.1 % concentration to 10 % concentration is two orders of magnitude. The term "purified" is used herein to describe a polynucleotide or polynucleotide vector of the invention which has been separated from other compounds including, but not limited to other nucleic acids, carbohydrates, lipids and proteins (such as the enzymes used in the synthesis of the polynucleotide), or the separation of covalently closed polynucleotides from linear polynucleotides. A polynucleotide is substantially pure when at least about 50%, preferably 60 to 75% of a sample exhibits a single polynucleotide sequence and conformation (linear versus covalently close). A substantially pure polynucleotide typically comprises about 50%o, preferably 60 to 90% weight/weight of a nucleic acid sample, more usually about 95%, and preferably is over about 99%> pure. Polynucleotide purity or homogeneity is indicated by a number of means well known in the art, such as agarose or polyacrylamide gel electrophoresis of a sample, followed by visualizing a single polynucleotide band upon staining the gel. For certain purposes higher resolution can be provided by using HPLC or other means well known in the art As used interchangeably herein, the terms "nucleic acids", "ohgonucleotides", and "polynucleotides" include RNA, DNA, or RN A/DNA hybrid sequences of more than one nucleotide in either single chain or duplex form The term "nucleotide" as used herein as an adjective to describe molecules comprising RNA, DNA, or RNA/DNA hybrid sequences of any length m single- stranded or duplex form. The term "nucleotide" is also used herein as a noun to refer to individual nucleotides or vaneties of nucleotides, meaning a molecule, or individual unit m a larger nucleic acid molecule, comprising a punne or pyπmidme, a πbose or deoxyπbose sugar moiety, and a phosphate group, or phosphodiester linkage in the case of nucleotides within an oligonucleotide or polynucleotide. Although the term "nucleotide" is also used herein to encompass "modified nucleotides" which comprise at least one modifications (a) an alternative linking group, (b) an analogous form of punne, (c) an analogous form of pyπmidme, or (d) an analogous sugar, for examples of analogous linking groups, punne, pyπmidmes, and sugars see for example PCT publication No. WO 95/04064 This may be especially ohgonucleotides with α or β anomers, ohgonucleotides with mter-nucleotide linkage of the phosphorothioate or methyl phosphonate type, or alternatively ohgothionucleotide. The polynucleotide sequences of the invention may be prepared by any known method, including synthetic, recombinant, ex vivo generation, or a combination thereof, as well as utilizing any purification methods known in the art. Throughout the present specification, the expression "nucleotide sequence" may be employed to designate indifferently a polynucleotide or a nucleic acid. More precisely, the expression "nucleotide sequence" encompasses the nucleic material itself and is thus not restricted to the sequence information (i.e. the succession of letters chosen among the four base letters) that biochemically charactenzes a specific DNA or RNA molecule. A "promoter" refers to a DNA sequence recognized by the synthetic machinery of the cell required to initiate the specific transcription of a gene. A sequence which is "operably linked" to a regulatory sequence such as a promoter means that said regulatory element is in the correct location and orientation in relation to the nucleic acid to control RNA polymerase initiation and expression of the nucleic acid of interest. As used herein, the term "operably linked" refers to a linkage of polynucleotide elements in a functional relationship For instance, a promoter or enhancer is operably linked to a coding sequence if it affects the transcription of the coding sequence. More precisely, two DNA molecules (such as a polynucleotide containing a promoter region and a polynucleotide encoding a desired polypeptide or polynucleotide) are said to be "operably linked" if the nature of the linkage between the two polynucleotides does not (1) result in the introduction of a frame-shift mutation or (2) interfere with the ability of the polynucleotide containing the promoter to direct the transcnption of the coding polynucleotide. The term "primer" denotes a specific oligonucleotide sequence which is complementary to a target nucleotide sequence and used to hybndize to the target nucleotide sequence. A primer serves as an initiation point for nucleotide polymerization catalyzed by either DNA polymerase, RNA polymerase or reverse transcnptase. The term "probe" denotes a defined nucleic acid segment (or nucleotide analog segment, e.g., polynucleotide as defined herein) which can be used to identify a specific polynucleotide sequence present m samples, said nucleic acid segment comprising a nucleotide sequence complementary of the specific polynucleotide sequence to be identified. The terms "base paired" and "Watson & Cnck base paired" are used interchangeably herein to refer to nucleotides which can be hydrogen bonded to one another be virtue of their sequence identities m a manner like that found in double-helical DNA with thymme or uracil residues linked to adenine residues by two hydrogen bonds and cytosine and guanme residues linked by three hydrogen bonds (See Stryer, L., Biochemistry, 4 th edition, 1995). The terms "complementary" or "complement thereof are used herein to refer to the sequences of polynucleotides which is capable of forming Watson & Crick base pamng with another specified polynucleotide throughout the entirety of the complementary region. For the purpose of the present invention, a first polynucleotide is deemed to be complementary to a second polynucleotide when each base in the first polynucleotide is paired with its complementary base. Complementary bases are, generally, A and T (or A and U), or C and G. "Complement" is used herein as a synonym from "complementary polynucleotide", "complementary nucleic acid" and "complementary nucleotide sequence". These terms are applied to pairs of polynucleotides based solely upon their sequences and not any particular set of conditions under which the two polynucleotides would actually bind. The term "polypeptide" refers to a polymer of amino acids without regard to the length of the polymer; thus, peptides, ohgopeptides, and proteins are included within the definition of polypeptide. This term also does not specify or exclude post-expression modifications of polypeptides, for example, polypeptides which include the covalent attachment of glycosyl groups, acetyl groups, phosphate groups, lipid groups and the like are expressly encompassed by the term polypeptide. Also included withm the definition are polypeptides which contain one or more analogs of an amino acid (including, for example, non-naturally occurnng ammo acids, ammo acids which only occur naturally in an unrelated biological system, modified ammo acids from mammalian systems etc.), polypeptides with substituted linkages, as well as other modifications known in the art, both naturally occurnng and non-naturally occurnng. The term "recombinant polypeptide" is used herein to refer to polypeptides that have been artificially designed and which comprise at least two polypeptide sequences that are not found as contiguous polypeptide sequences m their initial natural environment, or to refer to polypeptides which have been expressed from a recombinant polynucleotide The term "purified" is used herein to describe a polypeptide of the invention which has been separated from other compounds including, but not limited to nucleic acids, lipids, carbohydrates and other proteins. A polypeptide is substantially pure when at least about 50%, preferably 60 to 75% of a sample exhibits a single polypeptide sequence. A substantially pure polypeptide typically comprises about 50%, preferably 60 to 90% weight/weight of a protein sample, more usually about 95%o, and preferably is over about 99% pure. Polypeptide punty or homogeneity is indicated by a number of means well known in the art, such as agarose or polyacrylamide gel electrophoresis of a sample, followed by visualizing a single polypeptide band upon staining the gel. For certain puφoses higher resolution can be provided by using HPLC or other means well known in the art. As used herein, the term "non-human animal" refers to any non-human vertebrate, birds and more usually mammals, preferably primates, farm animals such as swine, goats, sheep, donkeys, and horses, rabbits or rodents, more preferably rats or mice. As used herein, the term "animal" is used to refer to any vertebrate, preferable a mammal. Both the terms "animal" and "mammal" expressly embrace human subjects unless preceded with the term "non-human". As used herein, the term "antibody" refers to a polypeptide or group of polypeptides which are comprised of at least one binding domain, where an antibody binding domain is formed from the folding of variable domains of an antibody molecule to form three-dimensional binding spaces with an internal surface shape and charge distribution complementary to the features of an antigenic determinant of an antigen, which allows an immunological reaction with the antigen. Antibodies include recombinant proteins comprising the binding domains, as wells as fragments, including Fab, Fab', F(ab)2, and F(ab')2 fragments. As used herein, an "antigenic determinant" is the portion of an antigen molecule, in this case a PCTA-1 polypeptide, that determines the specificity of the antigen-antibody reaction. An "epitope" refers to an antigenic determinant of a polypeptide. An epitope can comprise as few as 3 ammo acids in a spatial conformation which is unique to the epitope. Generally an epitope consists of at least 6 such ammo acids, and more usually at least 8-10 such ammo acids. Methods for determining the amino acids which make up an epitope include x-ray crystallography, 2-dιmensιonal nuclear magnetic resonance, and epitope mapping e.g. the Pepscan method described by Geysen et al. 1984; PCT Publication No. WO 84/03564; and PCT Publication No. WO 84/03506. The term "allele" is used herein to refer to variants of a nucleotide sequence A biallelic polymoφhism has two forms. Diploid organisms may be homozygous or heterozygous for an allelic form. The term "heterozygosity rate" is used herein to refer to the incidence of individuals in a population which are heterozygous at a particular allele. In a biallelic system, the heterozygosity rate is on average equal to 2P a (l-P a ), where P a is the frequency of the least common allele. In order to be useful m genetic studies, a genetic marker should have an adequate level of heterozygosity to allow a reasonable probability that a randomly selected person will be heterozygous. The term "genotype" as used herein refers the identity of the alleles present in an individual or a sample. In the context of the present invention, a genotype preferably refers to the descnption of the biallelic marker alleles present in an individual or a sample The term "genotyping" a sample or an individual for a biallelic marker consists of determining the specific allele or the specific nucleotide carried by an individual at a biallelic marker. The term "mutation" as used herein refers to a difference in DNA sequence between or among different genomes or individuals which has a frequency below 1%. The term "haplotype" refers to a combination of alleles present in an individual or a sample. In the context of the present invention, a haplotype preferably refers to a combination of biallelic marker alleles found in a given individual and which may be associated with a phenotype. The term "polymoφhism" as used herein refers to the occurrence of two or more alternative genomic sequences or alleles between or among different genomes or individuals. "Polymoφhic" refers to the condition m which two or more variants of a specific genomic sequence can be found in a population. A "polymoφhic site" is the locus at which the variation occurs. A single nucleotide polymoφhism is a single base pair change. Typically a single nucleotide polymoφhism is the replacement of one nucleotide by another nucleotide at the polymoφhic site. Deletion of a single nucleotide or insertion of a single nucleotide, also give rise to single nucleotide polymoφhisms. In the context of the present invention "single nucleotide polymoφhism" preferably refers to a single nucleotide substitution. However, the polymoφhism can also involve an insertion or a deletion of at least one nucleotide, preferably between 1 and 5 nucleotides. The nucleotide modification can also involve the presence of several adjacent single base polymoφhisms. This type of nucleotide modification is usually called a "variable motif. Generally, a "variable motif involves the presence of 2 to 10 adjacent single base polymoφhisms. In some instances, series of two or more single base polymoφhisms can be interrupted by single bases which are not polymoφhic. This is also globally considered to be a "variable motif. Typically, between different genomes or between different individuals, the polymoφhic site may be occupied by two different nucleotides. The term "biallelic polymorphism" and "biallelic marker" are used interchangeably herein to refer to a polymoφhism, usually a single nucleotide, having two alleles at a fairly high frequency in the population. A "biallelic marker allele" refers to the nucleotide variants present at a biallelic marker site Typically, the frequency of the less common allele of the biallelic markers of the present invention has been validated to be greater than 1%, preferably the frequency is greater than 10%, more preferably the frequency is at least 20% (i.e. heterozygosity rate of at least 0.32), even more preferably the frequency is at least 30% (i.e. heterozygosity rate of at least 0.42). A biallelic marker wherein the frequency of the less common allele is 30%> or more is termed a "high quality biallelic marker". As used herein the terminology "defining a biallelic marker" means that a sequence includes a polymoφhic base from a biallelic marker. The sequences defining a biallelic marker may be of any length consistent with their intended use, provided that they contain a polymoφhic base from a biallelic marker. The sequence has between 2 and 100, preferably between 20, 30, or 40 and 60, and more preferably about 47 nucleotides in length Likewise, the term "marker" or "biallelic marker" requires that the sequence is of sufficient length to practically (although not necessanly unambiguously) identify the polymoφhic allele, which usually implies a length of at least 4, 5, 6, 10, 15, 20, 25, or 40 nucleotides. As used herein the term "PCTA-1 -related biallelic marker " or "biallelic marker of the PCTA-1 gene" relates to a set of biallelic markers in linkage disequilibrium with the PCTA-1 gene. The term PCTA-1 -related biallelic marker encompasses all of the biallelic markers Al to A125 disclosed m Table 2. The location of nucleotides in a polynucleotide with respect to the center of the polynucleotide are descnbed herein m the following manner. When a polynucleotide has an odd number of nucleotides, the nucleotide at an equal distance from the 3' and 5' ends of the polynucleotide is considered to be "at the center" of the polynucleotide, and any nucleotide immediately adjacent to the nucleotide at the center, or the nucleotide at the center itself is considered to be "within 1 nucleotide of the center " With an odd number of nucleotides in a polynucleotide any of the five nucleotides positions in the middle of the polynucleotide would be considered to be within 2 nucleotides of the center, and so on. When a polynucleotide has an even number of nucleotides, there would be a bond and not a nucleotide at the center of the polynucleotide. Thus, either of the two central nucleotides would be considered to be "within 1 nucleotide of the center" and any of the four nucleotides in the middle of the polynucleotide would be considered to be "within 2 nucleotides of the center", and so on. For polymoφhisms which involve the substitution, insertion or deletion of 1 or more nucleotides, the polymoφhism, allele or biallelic marker is "at the center" of a polynucleotide if the difference between the distance from the substituted, inserted, or deleted polynucleotides of the polymorphism and the 3' end of the polynucleotide, and the distance from the substituted, inserted, or deleted polynucleotides of the polymoφhism and the 5' end of the polynucleotide is zero or one nucleotide. If this difference is 0 to 3, then the polymorphism is considered to be "within 1 nucleotide of the center." If the difference is 0 to 5, the polymoφhism is considered to be "within 2 nucleotides of the center." If the difference is 0 to 7, the polymoφhism is considered to be "within 3 nucleotides of the center," and so on. The terms "trait" and "phenotype" are used interchangeably herein and refer to any visible, detectable or otherwise measurable property of an organism such as symptoms of, or susceptibility to a disease for example. Preferably, the term "trait" or "phenotype", when used herein, encompasses, but is not limited to, prostate cancer, an early onset of prostate cancer, a beneficial response to or side effects related to treatment or a vaccination against prostate cancer, a susceptibility to prostate cancer, the level of aggressiveness of prostate cancer tumors, a modified or forthcoming expression of the PCTA-1 gene, a modified or forthcoming production of the PCTA-1 protein, or the production of a modified PCTA-1 protein. However, the term "trait" or "phenotype" can refer to other types of cancer. The term "susceptibility to prostate cancer" is used herein to designate a strong likelihood for an individual to develop m his lifetime a form of prostate cancer, particularly a form of prostate cancer in which a PCTA-1 protein is expressed. This likelihood is strongly related to the association established between the biallelic markers of the present invention and prostate cancer or other more specific charactenstics which can lead to the development of the prostate cancer such as the modified expression of the PCTA-1 gene, the modified production of the PCTA-1 protein or the production of a modified PCTA-1 protein. The term "aggressiveness" of prostate cancer tumors refers to the metastatic potential of these tumors. The term "treatment of prostate cancer" when used herein is intended to designate the administration of substances either for prophylactic or curative puφoses. When administered for prophylactic puφoses, the treatment is provided in advance of the appearance of biologically or clinically significant cancer symptoms. When administered for curative puφoses, the treatment is provided to attenuate the pathological symptoms of prostate cancer, to decrease the size or growth of cancer tumors or metastases or to remove them. The terms "an agent acting against prostate cancer" refers to any drug or compound that is capable of reducing the growth rate, rate of metastasis, or viability of tumor cells in a mammal, is capable of reducing the size or eliminating tumors m a mammal, or is capable of increasing the average life span of a mammal or human with cancer. Agents acting against prostate cancer also include compounds which are able to reduce the nsk of cancer developing m a population, particularly a high risk population. Examples of agents acting against prostate cancer include hormonal therapeutic agents (for example, medroxyprogesterone acetate, estramustme phosphate, gonadotrophin releasing hormone (GnRH) agonists, anti-androgens such as flutamide, lutamide, groserelm, and cyprosterone acetate, anti-gonadotropic agents such as stilboestrol and other oestrogenic agents, progestogens such as megestrol acetate) or chemotherapeutic agents (for example, carboplatm, cisplatin, methotrexate, mitomycin, epirubicm, vmblastme, 5-fluorouracyl, mitozantrone, cyclophosphamide, mterferon, N-(4-hydroxyphenyl) retmamide (4HPR)) These agents can be used m combination The term "side effects to an agent acting against prostate cancer" refers to adverse effects of therapy resulting from extensions of the principal pharmacological action of the drug or to idiosyncratic adverse reactions resulting from an interaction of the drug with unique host factors These side effects include, but are not limited to, adverse reactions such as dermatological, hematological or hepatological toxicities and further includes gastric and intestinal ulceration, disturbance in platelet function, renal injury, nephritis, vasomotor rhinitis with profuse watery secretions, angioneurotic edema, generalized urticana, and bronchial asthma to laryngeal edema and bronchoconsrπction, hypotension, sexual dysfunction, and shock More particularly, the side effects can be nausea/vomitmg, cardiovascular side effects such as deep vein thrombosis and fluid retention, and gynaecomastia The term "response to an agent acting against prostate cancer" refers to drug efficacy, including but not limited to ability to metabolize a compound, to the ability to convert a pro-drug to an active drug, and to the pharmacokinetics (absoφtion, distribution, elimination) and the pharmacodynamics (receptor-related) of a drug in an individual In the context of the present invention, a "positive response" to a medicament can be defined as comprising a reduction of the symptoms related to the disease, an increase of survival time or condition to be treated In the context of the present invention, a "negative response" to a medicament can be defined as comprising either a lack of positive response to the medicament which does not lead to a symptom reduction or an increase of survival time, or which leads to a side-effect observed following administration of the medicament Variants and fragments 1- Polynucleotides The invention also relates to vanants and fragments of the polynucleotides described herein, particularly oi a. PCTA-1 gene containing one or more biallelic markers according to the invention Vaπants of polynucleotides, as the term is used herein, are polynucleotides that differ from a reference polynucleotide A vanant of a polynucleotide may be a naturally occurring variant such as a naturally occurring allelic variant, or it may be a variant that is not known to occur naturally Such non-naturally occurnng vanants of the polynucleotide may be made by mutagenesis techniques, including those applied to polynucleotides, cells or organisms Generally, differences are limited so that the nucleotide sequences of the reference and the vanant are closely similar overall and, m many regions, identical Variants of polynucleotides according to the invention include, without being limited to, nucleotide sequences which are at least 95%> identical to a polynucleotide selected from the group consisting of the nucleotide sequences of SEQ ID Nos 1, 2, 3, 4, 8 or to any polynucleotide fragment of at least 8 consecutive nucleotides of a polynucleotide selected from the group consisting of the nucleotide sequences of SEQ ID Nos 1, 2, 3, 4, 8, and preferably at least 99%> identical, more particularly at least 99.5%> identical, and most preferably at least 99.8% identical to a polynucleotide selected from the group consisting of the nucleotide sequences of SEQ ID Nos 1, 2, 3, 4, 8 or to any polynucleotide fragment of at least 8 consecutive nucleotides of a polynucleotide selected from the group consisting of the nucleotide sequences of SEQ ED Nos 1, 2, 3, 4, 8. Nucleotide changes present in a vanant polynucleotide may be silent, which means that they do not alter the ammo acids encoded by the polynucleotide. However, nucleotide changes may also result in amino acid substitutions, additions, deletions, fusions and truncations in the polypeptide encoded by the reference sequence. The substitutions, deletions or additions may involve one or more nucleotides. The variants may be altered in coding or non-codmg regions or both. Alterations m the coding regions may produce conservative or non-conservative ammo acid substitutions, deletions or additions. In the context of the present invention, particularly preferred embodiments are those in which the polynucleotides encode polypeptides which retain substantially the same biological function or activity as the mature PCTA-1 protein, or those in which the polynucleotides encode polypeptides which maintain or increase a particular biological activity, while reducing a second biological activity. A polynucleotide fragment is a polynucleotide having a sequence that entirely is the same as part but not all of a given nucleotide sequence, preferably the nucleotide sequence oi a PCTA-1 gene, and variants thereof. The fragment can be a portion of an exon or of an mtron of a PCTA-1 gene It can also be a portion of the regulatory sequences of the PCTA-1 gene, preferably of the promoter. Preferably, such fragments comprise at least one of the biallelic markers Al to A 125, and the complements thereof, or a biallelic marker m linkage disequihbπum therewith. Such fragments may be "free-standing", i.e. not part of or fused to other polynucleotides, or they may be comprised within a single larger polynucleotide of which they form a part or region. However, several fragments may be comprised within a single larger polynucleotide. As representative examples of polynucleotide fragments of the invention, there may be mentioned those which have from about 4, 6, 8, 15, 20, 25, 40, 10 to 30, 30 to 55, 50 to 100, 75 to 100 or 100 to 200 nucleotides in length. Preferred are those fragments having about 47 nucleotides in length, such as those of PI to PI 25 and the complementary sequences thereto, and containing at least one of the biallelic markers of the PCTA-1 gene which are descnbed herein. It will of course be understood that the polynucleotides PI to PI 25 and the complementary sequences thereto can be shorter or longer, although it is preferred that they at least contain the biallelic marker of the primer which can be located at one end of the fragment. 2- Polypeptides The invention also relates to vanants, fragments, analogs and derivatives of the polypeptides described herein, including mutated PCTA-1 proteins The variant may be 1) one in which one or more of the ammo acid residues are substituted with a conserved or non-conserved amino acid residue and such substituted ammo acid residue may or may not be one encoded by the genetic code, or 2) one in which one or more of the ammo acid residues includes a substituent group, or 3) one in which the PCTA-1 protein is fused with another compound, such as a compound to increase the half-life of the polypeptide (for example, polyethylene glycol), or 4) one in which the additional ammo acids are fused to the PCTA-1 protein, such as a leader or secretory sequence or a sequence which is employed for punfication of the PCTA-1 protein or a preprotem sequence. Such vanants are deemed to be withm the scope of those skilled in the art A polypeptide fragment is a polypeptide having a sequence that entirely is the same as part but not all of a given polypeptide sequence, preferably a polypeptide encoded by a PCTA-1 gene and variants thereof Preferred fragments include those of the active region of the PCTA-1 protein that may play a role in prostate cancer and those regions possessing antigenic properties and which can be used to raise antibodies against the PCTA-1 protein In the case of an ammo acid substitution in the amino acid sequence of a polypeptide according to the invention, one or several ammo acids can be replaced by "equivalent" ammo acids The expression "equivalent" amino acid is used herein to designate any amino acid that may be substituted for one of the ammo acids having similar properties, such that one skilled m the art of peptide chemistry would expect the secondary structure and hydropathic nature of the polypeptide to be substantially unchanged Generally, the following groups of amino acids represent equivalent changes (1) Ala, Pro, Gly, Glu, Asp, Gin, Asn, Ser, Thr, (2) Cys, Ser, Tyr, Thr, (3) Val, He, Leu, Met, Ala, Phe; (4) Lys, Arg, His, (5) Phe, Tyr, Tip, His A specific embodiment of a modified PCTA-1 peptide molecule of interest according to the present invention, includes, but is not limited to, a peptide molecule which is resistant to proteolysis, is a peptide in which the -CONH- peptide bond is modified and replaced by a (CH2NH) reduced bond, a (NHCO) retro mverso bond, a (CH2-0) methylene-oxy bond, a (CH2-S) thiomethylene bond, a (CH2CH2) carba bond, a (CO-CH2) cetomethylene bond, a (CHOH-CH2) hydroxyethylene bond), a (N-N) bound, a E-alcene bond or also a -CH=CH- bond The invention also encompasses a human PCTA-1 polypeptide or a fragment or a variant thereof in which at least one peptide bound has been modified as descnbed above Such fragments may be "free-standing", i.e not part of or fused to other polypeptides, or they may be comprised within a single larger polypeptide of which they form a part or region However, several fragments may be compnsed within a single larger polypeptide. As representative examples of polypeptide fragments of the invention, there may be mentioned those which have from about 5, 6, 7, 8, 9 or 10 to 15, 10 to 20, 15 to 40, or 30 to 55 ammo acids long. Preferred are those fragments containing at least one ammo acid mutation in the PCTA-1 protein. 5 Identity Between Nucleic Acids Or Polypeptides The terms "percentage of sequence identity" and "percentage homology" are used interchangeably herein to refer to comparisons among polynucleotides and polypeptides, and are determined by comparing two optimally aligned sequences over a comparison window, wherein the portion of the polynucleotide or polypeptide sequence m the comparison window may comprise 10 additions or deletions (i.e., gaps) as compared to the reference sequence (which does not comprise additions or deletions) for optimal alignment of the two sequences. The percentage is calculated by determining the number of positions at which the identical nucleic acid base or ammo acid residue occurs m both sequences to yield the number of matched positions, dividing the number of matched positions by the total number of positions in the window of comparison and multiplying the result by 15 100 to yield the percentage of sequence identity. Homology is evaluated using any of the vaπety of sequence comparison algonthms and programs known in the art. Such algorithms and programs include, but are by no means limited to, TBLASTN, BLASTP, FASTA, TFASTA, and CLUSTALW (Pearson and Lipman, 1988; Altschul et al., 1990, Thompson et al., 1994; Higgms et al., 1996, Altschul et al , 1993). In a particularly preferred embodiment, protein and nucleic acid sequence 20 homologies are evaluated using the Basic Local Alignment Search Tool ("BLAST") which is well known in the art (see, e.g., Karlin and Altschul, 1990; Altschul et al., 1990, 1993, 1997). In particular, five specific BLAST programs are used to perform the following task: ( 1 ) BLASTP and BLAST3 compare an ammo acid query sequence against a protein sequence database; 25 (2) BLASTN compares a nucleotide query sequence against a nucleotide sequence database; (3) BLASTX compares the six-frame conceptual translation products of a query nucleotide sequence (both strands) against a protein sequence database; (4) TBLASTN compares a query protein sequence against a nucleotide sequence database 30 translated in all six reading frames (both strands), and (5) TBLASTX compares the six-frame translations of a nucleotide query sequence against the six-frame translations of a nucleotide sequence database. The BLAST programs identify homologous sequences by identifying similar segments, which are referred to herein as "high-scoring segment pairs," between a query amino or nucleic acid sequence 35 and a test sequence which is preferably obtained from a protein or nucleic acid sequence database. High-scoring segment pairs are preferably identified (i.e., aligned) by means of a sconng matrix, many of which are known in the art. Preferably, the sconng matrix used is the BLOSUM62 matnx (Gonnet et al., 1992; Henikoff and Hemkoff, 1993). Less preferably, the PAM or PAM250 matrices may also be used (see, e.g., Schwartz and Dayhoff, eds., 1978). The BLAST programs evaluate the statistical significance of all high-scoring segment pairs identified, and preferably selects those segments which satisfy a user-specified threshold of significance, such as a user- specified percent homology. Preferably, the statistical significance of a high-scoring segment pair is evaluated using the statistical significance formula of Karlm (see, e.g., Karlm and Altschul, 1990). Stringent Hybridization Conditions By way of example and not limitation, procedures using conditions of high stringency are as follows: Prehybridization of filters containing DNA is carried out for 8 h to overnight at 65°C in buffer composed of 6X SSC, 50 mM Tns-HCl (pH 7.5), 1 mM EDTA, 0.02% PVP, 0.02% Ficoll, 0.02%) BSA, and 500 μg/ml denatured salmon sperm DNA. Filters are hybridized for 48 h at 65°C, the preferred hybridization temperature, in prehybridization mixture containing 100 μg/ml denatured salmon sperm DNA and 5-20 X 10 6 cpm of 32 P-labeled probe. Alternatively, the hybndization step can be performed at 65°C in the presence of SSC buffer, 1 x SSC corresponding to 0.15M NaCl and 0.05 M Na citrate. Subsequently, filter washes can be done at 37°C for 1 h in a solution containing 2 x SSC, 0.01% PVP, 0.01% Ficoll, and 0.01% BSA, followed by a wash in 0 1 X SSC at 50°C for 45 mm. Alternatively, filter washes can be performed in a solution containing 2 x SSC and 0.1% SDS, or 0.5 x SSC and 0.1% SDS, or 0.1 x SSC and 0.1% SDS at 68°C for 15 minute intervals. Following the wash steps, the hybridized probes are detectable by autoradiography. Other conditions of high stnngency which may be used are well known m the art and as cited in Sambrook et al., 1989; and Ausubel et al., 1989. These hybridization conditions are suitable for a nucleic acid molecule of about 20 nucleotides m length. There is no need to say that the hybndization conditions described above are to be adapted according to the length of the desired nucleic acid, following techniques well known to the one skilled in the art. The suitable hybridization conditions may for example be adapted according to the teachings disclosed in the book of Hames and Higgms (1985) or in Sambrook et al.(1989). Genomic Sequence Of The PCTA-1 Gene The present invention relates to a purified and/or isolated nucleic acid corresponding to the genomic sequence of the PCTA-1 gene. Preferably, this genomic PCTA-1 sequence comprises the nucleotide sequence of SEQ ED No 1 , a sequence complementary thereto, a fragment or a vanant thereof. The present invention encompasses the genomic sequence oi PCTA-1. The PTCA-1 gene sequence comprises a coding sequence including 13 exons included in SEQ TD No 1, namely exon 0, exon 1, exon 2, exon 3, exon 4, exon 5, exon 6, exon 6bιs, exon 7, exon 8, exon 9, exon 9bιs and exon 9ter, the intronic regions, the promoter, the 5'UTR, the 3'UTR, and regulatory regions located upstream and downstream of the coding region The localization of the exons and mtrons of the PCTA-1 gene is detailed in Table A and is described as feature in SEQ ED No 1 Table A Intron 0 refers to the nucleotide sequence located between Exon 0 and Exon 1 , and so on The intron 6 refers to the nucleotide sequence located between Exon 6 and Exon 6bιs The mtron 6bιs refers to the nucleotide sequence located between Exon 6bιs and Exon 7 The mtron 8 refers to the nucleotide sequence located between Exon 8 and Exon 9 or 9bιs The mtron 9bιs refers to the nucleotide sequence located between Exon 9bιs and Exon 9ter The invention also encompasses a punfied, isolated, or recombinant polynucleotide comprising a nucleotide sequence having at least 70, 75, 80, 85, 90, or 95%> nucleotide identity with a nucleotide sequence of SEQ ED No 1 or a complementary sequence thereto or a fragment thereof The nucleotide differences as regards to the nucleotide sequence of SEQ ED No 1 may be generally randomly distributed throughout the entire nucleic acid Nevertheless, preferred nucleic acids are those wherein the nucleotide differences as regards to the nucleotide sequence of SEQ ED No 1 are predominantly located outside the coding sequences contained in the exons These nucleic acids, as well as their fragments and vaπants, may be used as oligonucleotide pnmers or probes m order to detect the presence of a copy of the PCTA-1 gene in a test sample, or alternatively in order to amplify a target nucleotide sequence within the PCTA-1 sequences Another object of the invention consists of a punfied, isolated, or recombinant nucleic acid that hybridizes with the nucleotide sequence of SEQ ED No 1 or a complementary sequence thereto or a vanant thereof, under the stnngent hybridization conditions as defined above Particularly preferred nucleic acids of the invention include isolated, punfied, or recombinant polynucleotides compπsmg a contiguous span of at least 12, 15, 18, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 50, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100, 150, 200, 500, or 1000 nucleotides of SEQ ED No 1 or the complements thereof, wherein said contiguous span comprises at least 1, 2, 3, 5, or 10 of the following nucleotide positions of SEQ ED No 1: 1-70715, 70795-82207, 82297-83612, 83824-85297, 85418-86388, 86446-87495, 87523-88294, 88384-89483, 89650-92748, 97156-98309, 98476-99329, 99491- 5 100026, 100212-100281, 100396-100538, 100682-100833, 100995-101920, 102087-102970, 103264-103724, and 103753-106746. Additional preferred nucleic acids of the invention include isolated, purified, or recombinant polynucleotides comprising a contiguous span of at least 12, 15, 18, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 50, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100, 150, 200, 500, or 1000 nucleotides of SEQ ED No 1 or the complements thereof, wherein said contiguous span comprises at least one nucleotide selected 10 from the group consisting of a nucleotide G at positions 70728, 87860, 88297, 94432, and 95340 of SEQ ED No 1 ; a nucleotide A at positions 82218, 83644, 83808, 87787, 87806, 94218, and 97144 of SEQ ED No 1 ; a nucleotide C at positions 87902, 88215, 88283, 92760, 93726, and 94422 of SEQ ID No 1; and a nucleotide T at positions 93903, and 94170 of SEQ ID No 1 Other preferred nucleic acids of the invention include isolated, purified, or recombinant polynucleotides comprising 15 a contiguous span of at least 12, 15, 18, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 50, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100, 150, 200, 500, or 1000 nucleotides of SEQ ED No 1 or the complements thereof, wherein said contiguous span comprises at least one nucleotide selected from the group consisting of a nucleotide G at positions 86435, 93592, 93680, 93681, 93682, 93728, 93761, and 95445 of SEQ ID No 1; a nucleotide A at positions 86434, 88355, 93240, 93471, and 93747of SEQ ED No 1; a nucleotide C at positions 20 93683, 95126, and 95444 of SEQ ED No 1 ; and a nucleotide T at positions 94154, and 94430 of SEQ TD No 1. Other preferred nucleic acids of the invention include isolated, punfied, or recombinant polynucleotides comprising a contiguous span of at least 12, 15, 18, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 50, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100, 150, 200, 500, or 1000 nucleotides of SEQ ED No 1 or the complements thereof, wherein said contiguous span comprises nucleotide positions selected from the group 25 consisting ofthe nucleotide positions of SEQ ED No 1 * 92975-92977, 93711-93715, 94151-94153, 94240-94243, 94770-94773, 94804-94808, 95121-95122, 95129-95135, 95148-95153, 95154- 95159, 95173-95178, 95367-95374, 95410-95413, 95418-95420, 95430-95436, 95533-95535, and 95677-95677. It should be noted that nucleic acid fragments of any size and sequence may also be comprised by the polynucleotides described m this section. 30 A preferred aspect of the present invention is a punfied and or isolated and/or recombmed PCTA-1 gene or a fragment thereof comprising at least one ofthe biallelic polymoφhisms described below, a sequence complementary thereto, a fragment or a variant thereof. In some embodiments, the PCTA-1 gene or a fragment thereof may comprise at least one ofthe nucleotide sequences of PI to PI 25, a sequence complementary thereto, a fragment or a vanant thereof. In a preferred 35 embodiment, the PCTA-1 gene or a fragment thereof comprises a biallelic marker selected from the group consisting of Al to A 125 and the complements thereof. While this section is entitled "Genomic Sequences of The PCTA-1 Gene", it should be noted that nucleic acid fragments of any size and sequence may also be comprised by the polynucleotides described m this section, flanking the genomic sequences oi PCTA-1 on either side or between two or more such genomic sequences. PCTA-1 cDNA Sequences The invention also concerns a punfied and/or isolated cDNA encoding a PCTA-1 protein. Preferably, the cDNA comprises a nucleotide sequence selected from the group consisting of SEQ ID Nos 2, 3, 4, sequences complementary thereto and functional fragments and variants thereof. Moreover, preferred polynucleotides ofthe invention include punfied, isolated, or recombinant PCTA-1 cDNAs consisting of, consisting essentially of, or comprising a sequence selected from the group consisting of SEQ ED Nos 2, 3, 4 and the complementary sequence thereto. The invention also pertains to a purified or isolated nucleic acid comprising a polynucleotide having at least 95%) nucleotide identity with a polynucleotide selected from the group consisting of SEQ ED Nos 2, 3, 4, advantageously 99 % nucleotide identity, preferably 99.5% nucleotide identity and most preferably 99.8%) nucleotide identity with a polynucleotide selected from the group consisting of SEQ ED Nos 2, 3, 4, or a sequence complementary thereto or a biologically active fragment thereof. Another object ofthe invention consists of purified, isolated or recombinant nucleic acids comprising a polynucleotide that hybridizes, under the stringent hybridization conditions defined herein, with a polynucleotide selected from the group consisting of the nucleotide sequences of SEQ ID Nos 2, 3, 4, or a sequence complementary thereto or a variant thereof or a biologically active fragment thereof. The 5'UTR and 3 'UTR regions of a gene are of particular importance in that they often comprise regulatory elements which can play a role in providing appropnate expression levels, particularly through the control of mRNA stability. The inventors have cloned a complete PCTA-1 cDNA (SEQ ID No 2) in which the 5'UTR is carried by exon 0 and a portion of exon 1 and the 3 'UTR is carried by a portion of exon 9. Moreover, they have characterized a 5'EST, which is located as a feature in SEQ ED No 1, comprising the exons 0 and 1, and partially exon 2. Since an ATG codon is located at the beginning ofthe partial exon 1 disclosed in WO 96/21671, one could assume that the promoter ofthe PCTA-1 gene would be located immediately upstream of this codon However, the inventors unexpectedly found that the PCTA-1 genomic DNA contains further exomc sequences upstream of the partial exon 1 disclosed in WO 96/21671. Without the knowledge of such sequences, the identification by the skilled person of the PCTA-1 promoter was extremely unlikely. Only the full genomic sequence oi PCTA-1 and access by the inventors to a proprietary 5'EST database rendered possible the identification of a full cDNA sequence and ofthe PCTA-1 promoter The invention concern the nucleotide sequence of 5' EST consisting ofthe position range The main characteristics ofthe PCTA-1 cDNA comprising exons 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, and 9 are detailed in Table B. The invention concerns the purified and/or isolated sequence ofthe 5'UTR and 3'UTR as described in Table B or a complementary sequence thereto or an allelic variant thereof set forth in SEQ ED No 2. Particularly preferred nucleic acids of the invention include isolated, purified, or recombinant polynucleotides comprising a contiguous span of at least 12, 15, 18, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 50, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100, 150, 200, 500, or 1000 nucleotides of SEQ ED No 2 or the complements thereof, wherein said contiguous span comprises at least 1, 2, 3, 5, or 10 of the nucleotide positions 1-162 of SEQ ED No 2. Further preferred nucleic acids of the invention include isolated, purified, or recombinant polynucleotides comprising a contiguous span of at least 12, 15, 18, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 50, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100, 150, 200, 500, or 1000 nucleotides of SEQ ED No 2 or the complements thereof, wherein said contiguous span comprises at least one nucleotide selected m the group consisting of a nucleotide A at positions 253, 363, 527, 2471, and 5397 of SEQ ID No 2; a nucleotide C at positions 1013, 1979, and 2675 of SEQ ED No 2, a nucleotide G at positions 176, 749, 2685, 3593 of SEQ ED No 2, and a nucleotide T at positions 2156, and 2423 of SEQ TD No 2 Additional preferred nucleic acids ofthe invention include isolated, punfied, or recombinant polynucleotides comprising a contiguous span of at least 12, 15, 18, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 50, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100, 150, 200, 500, or 1000 nucleotides of SEQ ID No 2 or the complements thereof, wherein said contiguous span comprises at least one nucleotide selected m the group consisting of a nucleotide A at positions 708, 807, 1493, 1724, and 2000, a nucleotide C at positions 1936, 3379, and 3697; a nucleotide G at positions 709, 1845, 1933, 1934, 1935, 1981, 2014, and 3698; and a nucleotide T at positions 2407, and 2683 of SEQ ED No 2. Other preferred nucleic acids ofthe invention include isolated, purified, or recombinant polynucleotides comprising a contiguous span of at least 12, 15, 18, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 50, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100, 150, 200, 500, or 1000 nucleotides of SEQ ID No 2 or the complements thereof, wherein said contiguous span comprises nucleotide positions selected from the group consisting ofthe nucleotide positions of SEQ TD No 2. 1229-1231, 1964-1968, 2404-2406, 2493-2496, 3023-3026, 3057-3061, 3374-3375, 3382-3388, 3401-3406, 3407-3412, 3426-3431, 3620-3627, 3663-3666, 3671-3673, 3683-3689, 3786-3788 and 3930-3932. It should be noted that nucleic acid fragments of any size and sequence may also be comprised by the polynucleotides descnbed in this section. The majority of interrupted genes are transcribed into an RNA that gives πse to a single type of spliced mRNA. But the RNAs of some genes follow patterns of alternative splicing, wherein a single gene gives nse to more than one mRNA species. In some cases, the ultimate pattern of expression is dictated by the pπmary transcript, because the use of different startpoints or termination sequences alters the splicing pattern. In other cases, a single pnmary transcnpt is spliced in more than one way, and internal exons are substituted, added or deleted. In some cases, the multiple products all are made m the same cell, but in others, the process is regulated so that particular splicing patterns occur only under particular conditions. At least three PCTA-1 cDNAs are produced by alternative splicing. The inventors have identified a minor species oi PCTA-1 cDNA, disclosed in SEQ ED No 3, and comprising an 5 additional exon 6bιs which encodes 42 additional ammo acids. In a further embodiment, the present invention concerns the additional exon of the PCTA-1 gene located between exon 6 and exon 7, namely exon 6bιs, detailed as a feature in SEQ ED No 1 and in Table A, a sequence complementary thereto, and a fragment or variant thereof. The present invention embodies a PCTA-1 cDNA comprising the exon 6bιs disclosed in SEQ ED No 1. 10 The main characteristics of this second PCTA-1 cDNA comprising exons 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 6bιs, 7, 8, and 9 are detailed in Table B. The ammo acid sequence of this new PCTA-1 protein is disclosed in SEQ TD No 6. Particularly preferred nucleic acids of the invention include isolated, purified, or recombinant polynucleotides comprising a contiguous span of at least 12, 15, 18, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 50, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100, 150, 200, 500, or 1000 nucleotides of SEQ ED No 3 or the 15 complements thereof, wherein said contiguous span comprises at least 1, 2, 3, 5, or 10 ofthe following nucleotide positions of SEQ ED No 3: 1-162 and 747-872. Further preferred nucleic acids ofthe invention include isolated, purified, or recombinant polynucleotides comprising a contiguous span of at least 12, 15, 18, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 50, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100, 150, 200, 500, or 1000 nucleotides of SEQ ED No 3 or the complements thereof, wherein said contiguous span comprises at 20 least one nucleotide selected m the group consisting of a nucleotide A at positions 253, 363, 527, 2597, and 5523 of SEQ ED No 3; a nucleotide C at positions 1139, 2105, and 2801 of SEQ ED No 3; a nucleotide G at positions 176, 875, 2811, 3719 of SEQ ED No 3; and a nucleotide T at positions 2282, and 2549 of SEQ ED No 3. Additional preferred nucleic acids of the invention include isolated, punfied, or recombinant polynucleotides compnsmg a contiguous span of at least 12, 15, 25 18, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 50, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100, 150, 200, 500, or 1000 nucleotides of SEQ ED No 3 or the complements thereof, wherein said contiguous span comprises at least one nucleotide selected m the group consisting of a nucleotide A at positions 708, 807, 1619, 1850, and 2126; a nucleotide C at positions 2062, 3505, and 3823; a nucleotide G at positions 709, 1971, 2059, 2060, 2061, 2107, 2140, and 3824; and a nucleotide T at positions 2533, and 2809 of SEQ ED No 3. Other preferred 30 nucleic acids ofthe invention include isolated, purified, or recombinant polynucleotides comprising a contiguous span of at least 12, 15, 18, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 50, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100, 150, 200, 500, or 1000 nucleotides of SEQ ED No 3 or the complements thereof, wherein said contiguous span comprises nucleotide positions selected from the group consisting of the nucleotide positions of SEQ ID No 3: 1355-1357, 1892-1894, 2090-2094, 2530-2532, 2619-2622, 3149-3152, 3183-3187, 3500- 35 3501, 3508-3514, 3527-3532, 3533-3538, 3552-3557, 3746-3749, 3789-3792, 3797-3799, 3809- 3815, 3912-3914 and 4056-4058. It should be noted that nucleic acid fragments of any size and sequence may also be comprised by the polynucleotides descnbed in this section. The inventors have also identified a species oi PCTA-1 cDNA comprising alternative exons to exon 9 which are called exons 9bιs and 9ter. Its sequence is disclosed in SEQ ID No 4. The exon 9bιs and 9ter correspond respectively to the beginning and the ends ofthe exon 9. The polynucleotide of the exon 9 located between exons 9bιs and 9ter is spliced or deleted The 5 combination of exons 9bιs and 9ter extends the ORF of the PCTA-1 gene. The mam characteristics of this second PCTA-1 cDNA comprising exons 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9bιs and 9ter are detailed in Table B. The ammo acid sequence ofthe new PCTA-1 protein encoded by this cDNA is disclosed m SEQ ED No 7. Particularly preferred nucleic acids of the invention include isolated, purified, or recombinant polynucleotides comprising a contiguous span of 10 at least 12, 15, 18, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 50, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100, 150, 200, 500, or 1000 nucleotides of SEQ ED No 4 or the complements thereof, wherein said contiguous span comprises at least 1, 2, 3, 5, or 10 of the nucleotide positions 1-162 of SEQ ED No 4. Further preferred nucleic acids of the invention include isolated, purified, or recombinant polynucleotides comprising a contiguous span of at least 12, 15, 18, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 50, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100, 150, 200, 500, or 1000 nucleotides of 15 SEQ ED No 4 or the complements thereof, wherein said contiguous span comprises at least one nucleotide selected m the group consisting of a nucleotide A at positions 253, 363, 527 and 2460 of SEQ ID No 4; a nucleotide C at position 1013 of SEQ ED No 4 and a nucleotide G at positions 176, and 749 of SEQ ED No 4. Additionally preferred nucleic acids ofthe invention include isolated, punfied, or recombinant polynucleotides comprising a contiguous span of at least 12, 15, 18, 20, 25, 20 30, 35, 40, 50, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100, 150, 200, 500, or 1000 nucleotides of SEQ ED No 4 or the complements thereof, wherein said contiguous span comprises at least one nucleotide selected in the group consisting of a nucleotide A at positions 708 and 807 and a nucleotide G at position 709 of SEQ No 4. Other preferred nucleic acids of the invention include isolated, punfied, or recombinant polynucleotides comprising a contiguous span of at least 12, 15, 18, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 50, 60, 70, 25 80, 90, 100, 150, 200, 500, or 1000 nucleotides of SEQ ED No 4 or the complements thereof, wherein said contiguous span comprises the pairs of nucleotide positions 1136-1137 of SEQ ED No 4. It should be noted that nucleic acid fragments of any size and sequence may also be comprised by the polynucleotides descnbed in this section. The invention further embodies purified, isolated, or recombinant polynucleotides 30 comprising a nucleotide sequence selected from the group consisting ofthe 13 exons of the PCTA-1 gene, or a sequence complementary thereto. The invention also deals with punfied, isolated, or recombinant nucleic acids comprising a combination of at least two exons of the PCTA-1 gene, wherein the polynucleotides are arranged within the nucleic acid, from the 5 '-end to the 3 '-end of said nucleic acid, in the same order as in SEQ TD No 1. In this specific embodiment of a purified or 35 isolated nucleic acid according to the invention, said nucleic acid preferably comprises the exon 0 at its 5' end and the exon 9 or 9ter at its 3' end. The 3 'UTR sequence of PCTA-l appears to include several polyadenylation sites. These polyadenylation sites could have an influence on the stability of the mRNA resulting from the transcription of the PCTA-1 genomic DNA. The invention also concerns a purified and/or isolated cDNA sequence encoding a mouse PCTA-1 protein, particularly a cDNA comprising the nucleotide sequence of SEQ ED No 8, a sequence complementary thereto or a fragment and variant thereof. The mam characteristics ofthe murine cDNA are detailed in Table B. Moreover, preferred polynucleotides of the invention include purified, isolated, or recombinant PCTA-1 cDNAs consisting of, consisting essentially of, or comprising the sequence of SEQ ED No 8 and the complementary sequence thereto. The invention also pertains to a purified or isolated nucleic acid comprising a polynucleotide having at least 95%> nucleotide identity with a polynucleotide of SEQ TD No 8, advantageously 99 % nucleotide identity, preferably 99.5%> nucleotide identity and most preferably 99.8% > nucleotide identity with a polynucleotide of SEQ ED No 8, or a sequence complementary thereto or a biologically active fragment thereof. Another object ofthe invention consists of purified, isolated or recombinant nucleic acids comprising a polynucleotide that hybridizes, under the stringent hybridization conditions defined herein, with a polynucleotide of SEQ ID No 8, or a sequence complementary thereto or a variant thereof or a biologically active fragment thereof. Particularly preferred nucleic acids ofthe invention include isolated, purified, or recombinant polynucleotides comprising a contiguous span of at least 12, 15, 18, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 50, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100, 150, 200, 500, or 1000 nucleotides of SEQ ID No 8 or the complements thereof, wherein said contiguous span comprises at least 1, 2, 3, 5, or 10 of the following nucleotide positions of SEQ TD No 8: 1-500, 501-1000, 1001-1500, and 1501-1738. Table B While this section is entitled "PCTA-1 cDNA Sequences," it should be noted that nucleic acid fragments of any size and sequence may also be comprised by the polynucleotides described in this section, flanking the genomic sequences oi PCTA-1 on either side or between two or more such genomic sequences. Coding Regions The invention also concerns a nucleotide sequence encoding the human PCTA-1 protein selected from the group consisting of SEQ ED No 5, 6, 7, sequences complementary thereto and fragments and vanants thereof. The present invention embodies isolated, punfied, and recombinant polynucleotides which encode a polypeptides comprising a contiguous span of at least 6 ammo acids, preferably at least 8 or 10 ammo acids, more preferably at least 12, 15, 20, 25, 30, 40, 50, or 100 ammo acids of SEQ ED No 5, wherein said contiguous span includes: - a serine residue at ammo acid position 170 and/or a lysine residue at ammo acid position 203 in SEQ ED No 5, and/or - at least one residue selected in the group consisting of a tyrosine residue at ammo acid position 18, a cysteine residue at ammo acid position 35, a methionine residue at ammo acid position 55 and an argmme residue at ammo acid position 183 in SEQ ED No 5. The present invention also embodies isolated, purified, and recombinant polynucleotides which encode a polypeptides comprising a contiguous span of at least 6 ammo acids, preferably at least 8 or 10 ammo acids, more preferably at least 12, 15, 20, 25, 30, 40, 50, or 100 ammo acids of SEQ ED No 6, wherein said contiguous span includes - a serine residue at ammo acid position 170 and/or a lysine residue at amino acid position 245 in SEQ ED No 6; and/or - at least one residue selected in the group consisting of a tyrosine residue at amino acid position 18, a cysteine residue at ammo acid position 35, a methionine residue at ammo acid position 55 and an argmme residue at ammo acid position 225 in SEQ ED No 6; and/or - at least 1, 2, 3, 5 or 10 ofthe ammo acid encoded by the exon 6bιs, more particularly at least 1, 2, 3, 5 or 10 of the ammo acid positions 183-224 of the SEQ TD No 6. The present invention further embodies isolated, purified, and recombinant polynucleotides which encode a polypeptides comprising a contiguous span of at least 6 amino acids, preferably at least 8 or 10 ammo acids, more preferably at least 12, 15, 20, 25, 30, 40, 50, or 100 ammo acids of SEQ ED No 7, wherein said contiguous span includes - a serine residue at ammo acid position 170 and/or a lysine residue at ammo acid position - at least one residue selected in the group consisting of a tyrosine residue at ammo acid position 18, a cysteine residue at ammo acid position 35, a methionine residue at ammo acid position 55 and an arginine residue at ammo acid position 183 in SEQ ED No 7; and/or - at least 1, 2, 3, 5 or 10 of the ammo acid encoded by the exons 9bιs and 9ter, more particularly at least 1, 2, 3, 5 or 10 of the ammo acid positions 313-368 ofthe SEQ ED No 7 The invention also concerns a nucleotide sequence encoding the murine PCTA-1 protein of SEQ ED No 9, sequences complementary thereto and fragments and vaπants thereof. More particularly, the present invention embodies isolated, punfied, and recombinant polynucleotides which encode a polypeptides comprising a contiguous span of at least 6 ammo acids, preferably at least 8 or 10 amino acids, more preferably at least 12, 15, 20, 25, 30, 40, 50, or 100 ammo acids of SEQ TD No 9, wherein said contiguous span comprises at least 1, 2, 3, 5, or 10 ofthe following amino acid positions of SEQ ED No 9: 1-50, 51-100, 101-150, 151-200, 201-250, and 251-316. The above disclosed polynucleotide that contains the coding sequence of the PCTA-1 gene may be expressed in a desired host cell or a desired host organism, when this polynucleotide is placed under the control of suitable expression signals. The expression signals may be either the expression signals contained in the regulatory regions in the PCTA-1 gene of the invention or in contrast the signals may be exogenous regulatory nucleic sequences. Such a polynucleotide, when placed under the suitable expression signals, may also be inserted in a vector for its expression and/or amplification. Regulatory Sequences Of The PCTA-1 Gene The present invention also concerns the punfied and/or isolated sequences ofthe upstream regulatory region (5' regulatory region) ofthe PCTA-1 gene, sequences complementary thereto, and fragments or vanants thereof, particularly the nucleotide sequence located between positions 1 and 68647 of SEQ ED No 1, as well as any sequence of 8 to 3000 consecutive nucleotides, preferably of 8 to 500 consecutive nucleotides, included therein. More particularly, the invention further includes specific elements within this regulatory region. These elements include a promoter region. The promoter region appears to be located in the 10 kb region, preferably in the 5 kb region, more preferably m the 2 kb region, still more preferably in the 1 kb region, and more particularly in the 500 bp, upstream of the first exon ofthe PCTA-1 gene. Preferably, the promoter region has a nucleotide sequence located between positions 66647 and 68647 of SEQ ED No 1 as well as any functional sequence of at least 8 consecutive nucleotide, preferably 8 to 400 consecutive nucleotides, more preferably of 8 to 300 nucleotides included therein, sequences complementary thereto and fragments and vanants thereof. Further comments are provided below on this region which is of a particular importance in the present invention. Also included in the invention are regulatory sequences downstream of the PCTA-1 coding sequence (3 ' regulatory region) such as those included in the nucleotide sequence located between positions 97156 and 106746 of SEQ ID No 1, sequences complementary thereto and fragments and variants thereof. In order to identify the relevant biologically active polynucleotide fragments or vaπants of the 5 ' or 3 ' regulatory region, the one skill in the art will refer to the book of Sambrook et al (Sambrook et al., 1989) which describes the use of a recombinant vector carrying a marker gene (i.e. beta galactosidase, chloramphenicol acetyl transferase, etc.) the expression of which will be detected when placed under the control of a biologically active polynucleotide fragments or variants of the 5' or 3' regulatory region. Genomic sequences located upstream ofthe first exon of the PCTA-1 gene are cloned into a suitable promoter reporter vector, such as the pSEAP -Basic, pSEAP-Enhancer, pβgal-Basic, pβgal -Enhancer, or ρEGFP-1 Promoter Reporter vectors available from Clontech, or pGL2 -basic or pGL3-basιc promoterless luciferase reporter gene vector from Promega Briefly, each of these promoter reporter vectors include multiple cloning sites positioned upstream of a reporter gene encoding a readily assayable protein such as secreted alkaline phosphatase, luciferase, beta galactosidase, or green fluorescent protein The sequences upstream the PCTA-1 coding region are inserted into the cloning sites upstream of the reporter gene in both onentations and introduced into an appropriate host cell The level of reporter protein is assayed and compared to the level obtained from a vector which lacks an insert in the cloning site. The presence of an elevated expression level m the vector containing the insert with respect to the control vector indicates the presence of a promoter in the insert If necessary, the upstream sequences can be cloned into vectors which contain an enhancer for increasing transcπption levels from weak promoter sequences. A significant level of expression above that observed with the vector lacking an insert indicates that a promoter sequence is present m the inserted upstream sequence Promoter sequences withm the upstream genomic DNA may be further defined by constructing nested 5' and/or 3' deletions in the upstream DNA using conventional techniques such as Exonuclease III or appropriate restriction endonuclease digestion The resulting deletion fragments can be inserted into the promoter reporter vector to determine whether the deletion has reduced or obliterated promoter activity. In this way, the boundaries of the promoters may be defined. If desired, potential individual regulatory sites withm the promoter may be identified using site directed mutagenesis or linker scanning to obliterate potential transcπption factor binding sites within the promoter individually or m combination. The effects of these mutations on transcription levels may be determined by inserting the mutations into cloning sites m promoter reporter vectors This type of assay is well-known to those skilled in the art and is descnbed in WO 97/17359, US 5,374,544, EP 582,796, US 5,698,389, US 5,643,746, US 5,502,176, and US 5,266,488 The strength and the specificity ofthe promoter of the PCTA-1 gene can be assessed through the expression levels of a detectable polynucleotide operably linked to the PCTA-1 promoter in different types of cells and tissues. The detectable polynucleotide may be either a polynucleotide that specifically hybridizes with a predefined oligonucleotide probe, or a polynucleotide encoding a detectable protein, including a PCTA-1 polypeptide or a fragment or a vanant thereof. This type of assay is well-known to those skilled m the art and is descnbed in US 5,502,176, and US 5,266,488 In one embodiment, the efficacy ofthe promoter of the PCTA-1 gene is assessed in normal and cancer cells. In a preferred embodiment, the efficacy ofthe promoter ofthe PCTA-1 gene is assessed in normal cells and in cancer cells which can present different degrees of malignancy, more preferably cells from prostate tissue. Some of the methods are discussed m more detail below Polynucleotides carrying the regulatory elements located at the 5' end and at the 3' end of the PCTA-1 coding region may be advantageously used to control the transcriptional and translational activity of an heterologous polynucleotide of interest. Thus, the present invention also concerns a purified or isolated nucleic acid comprising a polynucleotide which is selected from the group consisting ofthe 5' and 3' regulatory regions, or a sequence complementary thereto or a biologically active fragment or variant thereof. "5' regulatory region" refers to the nucleotide sequence located between positions 1 and 68647 of SEQ ID No 1. "3' regulatory region" refers to the nucleotide sequence located between positions 97156 and 106746 of SEQ TD No 1. The invention also pertains to a purified or isolated nucleic acid comprising a polynucleotide having at least 95% nucleotide identity with a polynucleotide selected from the group consisting of the 5' and 3' regulatory regions, advantageously 99 % nucleotide identity, preferably 99.5% nucleotide identity and most preferably 99.8% nucleotide identity with a polynucleotide selected from the group consisting ofthe 5' and 3 " regulatory regions, or a sequence complementary thereto or a biologically active fragment thereof. Another object ofthe invention consists of purified, isolated or recombinant nucleic acids comprising a polynucleotide that hybridizes, under the stringent hybridization conditions defined herein, with a polynucleotide selected from the group consisting of the nucleotide sequences of the 5'- and 3' regulatory regions, or a sequence complementary thereto or a variant thereof or a biologically active fragment thereof. Preferred nucleic acids of the invention include isolated, purified, or recombinant polynucleotides comprising a contiguous span of at least 12, 15, 18, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 50, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100, 150, 200, 500, or 1000 nucleotides of SEQ ID No 1 or the complements thereof, wherein said contiguous span comprises at least 1, 2, 3, 5, or 10 ofthe following nucleotide positions of SEQ ED No 1: 1-4000, 4001-8000, 8001-12000, 12001-16000, 16001-20000, 20001- 24000, 24001-28000, 28001-32000, 32001-36000, 36001-40000, 40001-44000, 44001-48000, 48001-52000, 52001-56000, 56001-60000, 60001-64000, 64001-68647. Particularly preferred nucleic acids ofthe invention include isolated, purified, or recombinant polynucleotides comprising a contiguous span of at least 12, 15, 18, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 50, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100, 150, 200, 500, or 1000 nucleotides of SEQ ED No 1 or the complements thereof, wherein said contiguous span comprises at least 1, 2, 3, 5, or 10 of the following nucleotide positions of SEQ ED No 1 * 66647- 68647. "Biologically active" polynucleotide derivatives of SEQ ID No 1 are polynucleotides comprising or alternatively consisting in a fragment of said polynucleotide which is functional as a regulatory region for expressing a recombinant polypeptide or a recombinant polynucleotide m a recombinant cell host. It could act either as an enhancer or as a repressor. For the purpose ofthe invention, a nucleic acid or polynucleotide is "functional" as a regulatory region for expressing a recombinant polypeptide or a recombinant polynucleotide if said regulatory polynucleotide contains nucleotide sequences which contain transcriptional and translational regulatory information, and such sequences are "operably linked" to nucleotide sequences which encode the desired polypeptide or the desired polynucleotide. The regulatory polynucleotides ofthe invention may be prepared from the nucleotide sequence of SEQ TD No 1 by cleavage using suitable restriction enzymes, as described for example in the book of Sambrook et al.(1989). The regulatory polynucleotides may also be prepared by digestion of SEQ ED No 1 by an exonuclease enzyme, such as Bal31 (Wabiko et al., 1986). These regulatory polynucleotides can also be prepared by nucleic acid chemical synthesis, as descnbed elsewhere in the specification. A preferred 5'-regulatory polynucleotide ofthe invention includes the 5 '-untranslated region (5'-UTR) ofthe PCTA-1 cDNA, or a biologically active fragment or variant thereof. A preferred 3'- regulatory polynucleotide ofthe invention includes the 3 '-untranslated region (3'-UTR) ofthe PCTA-1 cDNA, or a biologically active fragment or variant thereof. A further object ofthe invention consists of a purified or isolated nucleic acid comprising: a) a nucleic acid comprising a regulatory nucleotide sequence selected from the group consisting of: (i) a nucleotide sequence comprising a polynucleotide ofthe 5' regulatory region or a complementary sequence thereto; (n) a nucleotide sequence comprising a polynucleotide having at least 95% of nucleotide identity with the nucleotide sequence ofthe 5' regulatory region or a complementary sequence thereto, (in) a nucleotide sequence comprising a polynucleotide that hybridizes under stringent hybridization conditions with the nucleotide sequence of the 5' regulatory region or a complementary sequence thereto; and (iv) a biologically active fragment or variant of the polynucleotides in (l), (n) and (m); b) a polynucleotide encoding a desired polypeptide or a nucleic acid of interest, operably linked to the nucleic acid defined in (a) above; and c) Optionally, a nucleic acid comprising a 3'- regulatory polynucleotide, preferably a 3'- regulatory polynucleotide ofthe PCTA-1 gene. In a specific embodiment ofthe nucleic acid defined above, said nucleic acid includes the 5 ' -untranslated region (5'-UTR) ofthe PCTA-1 cDNA, or a biologically active fragment or variant thereof. In a second specific embodiment ofthe nucleic acid defined above, said nucleic acid includes the 3 '-untranslated region (3'-UTR) ofthe PCTA-1 cDNA, or a biologically active fragment or variant thereof. The regulatory polynucleotide ofthe 5' regulatory region, or its biologically active fragments or variants, is operably linked at the 5 '-end ofthe polynucleotide encoding the desired polypeptide or polynucleotide. The regulatory polynucleotide of the 3' regulatory region, or its biologically active fragments or variants, is advantageously operably linked at the 3 '-end of the polynucleotide encoding the desired polypeptide or polynucleotide. The desired polypeptide encoded by the above-described nucleic acid may be of various nature or ongm, encompassing proteins of prokaryotic or eukaryotic oπgm. Among the polypeptides expressed under the control oi a PCTA-1 regulatory region include bactenal, fungal or viral antigens. Also encompassed are eukaryotic proteins such as intracellular proteins, like "house keeping" proteins, membrane-bound proteins, like receptors, and secreted proteins like endogenous mediators such as cytokines. The desired polypeptide may be the PCTA-1 protein, especially the protein of a ammo acid sequence selected in the group consisting of SEQ ED Nos 5, 6, 7, 9, or a fragment or a vanant thereof The desired nucleic acids encoded by the above -described polynucleotide, usually an RNA molecule, may be complementary to a desired coding polynucleotide, for example to a PCTA-1 coding sequence, and thus useful as an antisense polynucleotide. Such a polynucleotide may be included m a recombinant expression vector in order to express the desired polypeptide or the desired nucleic acid in host cell or in a host organism Suitable recombinant vectors that contain a polynucleotide such as described herein are disclosed elsewhere in the specification. Polynucleotide Constructs The terms "polynucleotide construct" and "recombinant polynucleotide" are used interchangeably herein to refer to linear or circular, purified or isolated polynucleotides that have been artificially designed and which comprise at least two nucleotide sequences that are not found as contiguous nucleotide sequences their initial natural environment. DNA Construct That Enables Directing Temporal And Spatial PCTA-1 Gene Expression In Recombinant Cell Hosts And In Transgenic Animals. In order to study the physiological and phenotypic consequences of a lack of synthesis ofthe PCTA-1 protein, both at the cell level and at the multi cellular organism level, the invention also encompasses DNA constructs and recombinant vectors enabling a conditional expression of a specific allele ofthe PCTA-1 genomic sequence or cDNA and also of a copy of this genomic sequence or cDNA harbonng substitutions, deletions, or additions of one or more bases as regards to the PCTA-1 nucleotide sequence of SEQ ED Nos 1, 2, 3, 4, 8, or a fragment thereof, these base substitutions, deletions or additions being located either in an exon, an mtron or a regulatory sequence, but preferably in the 5'-regulatory sequence or in an exon ofthe PCTA-1 genomic sequence or within a PCTA-1 cDNA of SEQ ID Nos 2, 3, 4, or 8. In a preferred embodiment, the PCTA-1 sequence compnses a biallelic marker ofthe present invention. In a preferred embodiment, the PCTA-1 sequence comprises a biallelic marker of the present invention, preferably one of the biallelic markers Al to A 125 and the complements thereof. The present invention embodies recombinant vectors comprising any one ofthe polynucleotides descnbed in the present invention. More particularly, the polynucleotide constructs according to the present invention can comprise any ofthe polynucleotides described in the "PCTA- 1 cDNA Sequences" section, the "Coding Regions" section, and the "Oligonucleotide Probes And Primers" section. A first preferred DNA construct is based on the tetracychne resistance operon let from E. coli transposon TnlO for controlling the PCTA-1 gene expression, such as descnbed by Gossen et al.(1992, 1995) and Furth et al.(1994) Such a DNA construct contains seven tet operator sequences from TnlO (/e/op) that are fused to either a minimal promoter or a 5 '-regulatory sequence of the PCTA-1 gene, said minimal promoter or said PCTA-1 regulatory sequence being operably linked to a polynucleotide of interest that codes either for a sense or an antisense oligonucleotide or for a polypeptide, including a PCTA-1 polypeptide or a peptide fragment thereof. This DNA construct is functional as a conditional expression system for the nucleotide sequence of interest when the same cell also comprises a nucleotide sequence coding for either the wild type (tTA) or the mutant (rTA) repressor fused to the activating domain of viral protein VP16 of herpes simplex virus, placed under the control of a promoter, such as the HCMVIE 1 enhancer/promoter or the MMTV-LTR Indeed, a preferred DNA construct ofthe invention comprise both the polynucleotide containing the tet operator sequences and the polynucleotide containing a sequence coding for the tTA or the rTA repressor. In a specific embodiment, the conditional expression DNA construct contains the sequence encoding the mutant tetracychne repressor rTA, the expression ofthe polynucleotide of interest is silent in the absence of tetracychne and induced m its presence. DNA Constructs Allowing Homologous Recombination: Replacement Vectors A second preferred DNA construct will comprise, from 5'-end to 3 '-end: (a) a first nucleotide sequence that is compnsed m the PCTA-1 genomic sequence; (b) a nucleotide sequence comprising a positive selection marker, such as the marker for neomycine resistance (neo); and (c) a second nucleotide sequence that is comprised m the PCTA-1 genomic sequence, and is located on the genome downstream the first PCTA-1 nucleotide sequence (a). In a preferred embodiment, this DNA construct also comprises a negative selection marker located upstream the nucleotide sequence (a) or downstream the nucleotide sequence (c). Preferably, the negative selection marker consists ofthe thymidine kmase (tk) gene (Thomas et al., 1986), the hygromycme beta gene (Te Riele et al., 1990), the hprt gene ( Van der Lugt et al., 1991; Reid et al., 1990) or the Diphteπa toxm A fragment (Dt-A) gene (Nada et al., 1993; Yagi et al.1990). Preferably, the positive selection marker is located within a PCTA-1 exon sequence so as to interrupt the sequence encoding a PCTA-1 protein. These replacement vectors are descnbed, for example, by Thomas et al.(1986; 1987), Mansour et al.(1988) and Roller et al.(1992). The first and second nucleotide sequences (a) and (c) may be indifferently located withm a PCTA-1 regulatory sequence, an mtromc sequence, an exon sequence or a sequence containing both regulatory and/or mtromc and/or exon sequences. The size of the nucleotide sequences (a) and (c) ranges from 1 to 50 kb, preferably from 1 to 10 kb, more preferably from 2 to 6 kb and most preferably from 2 to 4 kb. DNA Constructs Allowing Homologous Recombination: Cre-LoxP System. These new DNA constructs make use of the site specific recombination system of the PI phage. The PI phage possesses a recombmase called Cre which interacts specifically with a 34 base pairs loxV site. The loxP site is composed of two palmdromic sequences of 13 bp separated by a 8 bp conserved sequence (Hoess et al., 1986) The recombination by the Cre enzyme between two loxT J sites having an identical onentation leads to the deletion of the DNA fragment. The Cre-/αxP system used in combination with a homologous recombination technique has been first descnbed by Gu et al.(1993, 1994). Briefly, a nucleotide sequence of interest to be inserted m a targeted location ofthe genome harbors at least two lox? sites in the same orientation and located at the respective ends of a nucleotide sequence to be excised from the recombinant genome. The excision event requires the presence of the recombmase (Cre) enzyme within the nucleus of the recombinant cell host. The recombmase enzyme may be brought at the desired time either by (a) incubating the recombinant cell hosts in a culture medium containing this enzyme, by injecting the Cre enzyme directly into the desired cell, such as descnbed by Araki et al.(1995), or by hpofection of the enzyme into the cells, such as described by Baubonis et al.(1993); (b) transfectmg the cell host with a vector comprising the Cre coding sequence operably linked to a promoter functional in the recombinant cell host, which promoter being optionally inducible, said vector being introduced in the recombinant cell host, such as descnbed by Gu et al.(1993) and Sauer et al.(1988); (c) introducing in the genome of the cell host a polynucleotide comprising the Cre coding sequence operably linked to a promoter functional m the recombinant cell host, which promoter is optionally inducible, and said polynucleotide being inserted in the genome of the cell host either by a random insertion event or an homologous recombination event, such as descnbed by Gu et al.(1994). In a specific embodiment, the vector containing the sequence to be inserted m the PCTA-1 gene by homologous recombination is constructed m such a way that selectable markers are flanked by lox? sites ofthe same orientation, it is possible, by treatment by the Cre enzyme, to eliminate the selectable markers while leaving the PCTA-1 sequences of interest that have been inserted by an homologous recombination event. Again, two selectable markers are needed: a positive selection marker to select for the recombination event and a negative selection marker to select for the homologous recombination event Vectors and methods using the Cre-/o P system are descnbed by Zou et al.(1994). Thus, a third preferred DNA construct ofthe invention comprises, from 5'-end to 3'-end: (a) a first nucleotide sequence that is comprised m the PCTA-1 genomic sequence; (b) a nucleotide sequence comprising a polynucleotide encoding a positive selection marker, said nucleotide sequence comprising additionally two sequences defining a site recognized by a recombmase, such as a lox? site, the two sites being placed in the same orientation; and (c) a second nucleotide sequence that is comprised m the PCTA-1 genomic sequence, and is located on the genome downstream of the first PCTA-1 nucleotide sequence (a). The sequences defining a site recognized by a recombmase, such as a lox? site, are preferably located withm the nucleotide sequence (b) at suitable locations bordenng the nucleotide sequence for which the conditional excision is sought. In one specific embodiment, two lox? sites are located at each side of the positive selection marker sequence, in order to allow its excision at a desired time after the occurrence ofthe homologous recombination event. In a preferred embodiment of a method using the third DNA construct described above, the excision ofthe polynucleotide fragment bordered by the two sites recognized by a recombmase, preferably two loxP sites, is performed at a desired time, due to the presence withm the genome of the recombinant host cell of a sequence encoding the Cre enzyme operably linked to a promoter sequence, preferably an inducible promoter, more preferably a tissue-specific promoter sequence and most preferably a promoter sequence which is both inducible and tissue-specific, such as described by Gu et al.(1994). The presence of the Cre enzyme withm the genome of the recombinant cell host may result of the breeding of two transgenic animals, the first transgenic animal bearing the PCTA-1 -derived sequence of interest containing the lox? sites as described above and the second transgenic animal beaπng the Cre coding sequence operably linked to a suitable promoter sequence, such as described by Gu et al.(1994). Spatio-temporal control of the Cre enzyme expression may also be achieved with an adenovirus based vector that contains the Cre gene thus allowing infection of cells, or in vivo infection of organs, for delivery ofthe Cre enzyme, such as described by Anton and Graham (1995) and Kanegae et al.(1995). The DNA constructs descnbed above may be used to introduce a desired nucleotide sequence ofthe invention, preferably a PCTA-1 genomic sequence or a PCTA-1 cDNA sequence, and most preferably an altered copy oi a PCTA-1 genomic or cDNA sequence, within a predetermined location ofthe targeted genome, leading either to the generation of an altered copy of a targeted gene (knock-out homologous recombination) or to the replacement of a copy ofthe targeted gene by another copy sufficiently homologous to allow an homologous recombination event to occur (knock-m homologous recombination). In a specific embodiment, the DNA constructs descnbed above may be used to introduce a PCTA-1 genomic sequence or a PCTA-1 cDNA sequence comprising at least one biallelic marker ofthe present invention, preferably at least one biallelic marker selected from the group consisting of Al to A125 and the complements thereof. Oligonucleotide Probes And Primers Polynucleotides deπved from the PCTA-1 gene are useful in order to detect the presence of at least a copy of a nucleotide sequence of SEQ ID No 1 , or a fragment, complement, or vanant thereof in a test sample. Particularly preferred probes and primers of the invention include isolated, purified, or recombinant polynucleotides comprising a contiguous span of at least 12, 15, 18, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 50, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100, 150, 200, 500, or 1000 nucleotides of SEQ ED No 1 or the complements thereof, wherein said contiguous span comprises at least 1, 2, 3, 5, or 10 ofthe following nucleotide positions of SEQ ED No 1 : 1-70715, 70795-82207, 82297-83612, 83824-85297, 85418-86388, 86446-87495, 87523-88294, 88384-89483, 89650-92748, 97156-98309, 98476-99329, 99491- 100026, 100212-100281, 100396-100538, 100682-100833, 100995-101920, 102087-102970, 103264-103724, and 103753-106746. Additional preferred probes and pπmers of the invention include isolated, punfied, or recombinant polynucleotides comprising a contiguous span of at least 12, 15, 18, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 50, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100, 150, 200, 500, or 1000 nucleotides of SEQ ID No 1 or the complements thereof, wherein said contiguous span comprises at least one nucleotide selected from the group consisting of a nucleotide G at positions 70728, 87860, 88297, 94432, and 95340 of SEQ ID No 1; a nucleotide A at positions 82218, 83644, 83808, 87787, 87806, 94218, and 97144 of SEQ ID No 1; a nucleotide C at positions 87902, 88215, 88283, 92760, 93726, and 94422 of SEQ ED No 1 ; and a nucleotide T at positions 93903, and 94170 of SEQ ED No 1. Other preferred probes and pnmers ofthe invention include isolated, punfied, or recombinant polynucleotides compnsing a contiguous span of at least 12, 15, 18, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 50, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100, 150, 200, 500, or 1000 nucleotides of SEQ ED No 1 or the complements thereof, wherein said contiguous span compnses at least one nucleotide selected from the group consisting of a nucleotide G at positions 86435, 93592, 93680, 93681, 93682, 93728, 93761, and 95445 of SEQ ID No 1; a nucleotide A at positions 86434, 88355, 93240, 93471, and 93747of SEQ ED No 1; a nucleotide C at positions 93683, 95126, and 95444 of SEQ ED No 1; and a nucleotide T at positions 94154, and 94430 of SEQ ED No 1. Other preferred probes and primers of the invention include isolated, purified, or recombinant polynucleotides comprising a contiguous span of at least 12, 15, 18, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 50, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100, 150, 200, 500, or 1000 nucleotides of SEQ TD No 1 or the complements thereof, wherein said contiguous span comprises nucleotide positions selected from the group consisting ofthe nucleotide positions of SEQ ED No 1 : 92975-92977, 93711-93715, 94151-94153, 94240-94243, 94770-94773, 94804-94808, 95121-95122, 95129-95135, 95148- 95153, 95154-95159, 95173-95178, 95367-95374, 95410-95413, 95418-95420, 95430-95436, 95533-95535, and 95677-95677. Another object ofthe invention is a punfied, isolated, or recombinant polynucleotide comprising the nucleotide sequence of SEQ ED No 2, complementary sequences thereto, as well as 5 allelic vaπants, and fragments thereof. Particularly preferred probes and pnmers of the invention include isolated, punfied, or recombinant polynucleotides comprising a contiguous span of at least 12, 15, 18, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 50, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100, 150, 200, 500, or 1000 nucleotides of SEQ ED No 2 or the complements thereof, wherein said contiguous span comprises at least 1, 2, 3, 5, or 10 of the nucleotide positions 1-162 of SEQ ED No 2. Additional preferred probes and primers ofthe 10 invention include isolated, purified, or recombinant polynucleotides comprising a contiguous span of at least 12, 15, 18, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 50, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100, 150, 200, 500, or 1000 nucleotides of SEQ ID No 2 or the complements thereof, wherein said contiguous span comprises at least one nucleotide selected in the group consisting of a nucleotide A at positions 253, 363, 527, 2471, and 5397 of SEQ ED No 2; a nucleotide C at positions 1013, 1979, and 2675 of SEQ ED No 2; a 15 nucleotide G at positions 176, 749, 2685, 3593 of SEQ ED No 2; and a nucleotide T at positions 2156, and 2423 of SEQ ED No 2. Particularly preferred probes and pnmers ofthe invention include isolated, purified, or recombinant polynucleotides comprising a contiguous span of at least 12, 15, 18, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 50, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100, 150, 200, 500, or 1000 nucleotides of SEQ ED No 2 or the complements thereof, wherein said contiguous span comprises at least one nucleotide selected 20 in the group consisting of a nucleotide A at positions 708, 807, 1493, 1724, and 2000; a nucleotide C at positions 1936, 3379, and 3697; a nucleotide G at positions 709, 1845, 1933, 1934, 1935, 1981, 2014, and 3698; and a nucleotide T at positions 2407, and 2683 of SEQ ID No 2. Other preferred probes and pnmers ofthe invention include isolated, punfied, or recombinant polynucleotides comprising a contiguous span of at least 12, 15, 18, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 50, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100, 150, 25 200, 500, or 1000 nucleotides of SEQ ED No 2 or the complements thereof, wherein said contiguous span comprises nucleotide positions selected from the group consisting of the nucleotide positions of SEQ ED No 2: 1229-1231, 1964-1968, 2404-2406, 2493-2496, 3023-3026, 3057-3061, 3374-3375, 3382-3388, 3401-3406, 3407-3412, 3426-3431, 3620-3627, 3663-3666, 3671-3673, 3683-3689, 3786-3788 and 3930-3932. 30 A further object ofthe invention is a punfied, isolated, or recombinant polynucleotide comprising the nucleotide sequence of SEQ ED No 3, complementary sequences thereto, as well as allelic vanants, and fragments thereof. Particularly preferred probes and pnmers of the invention include isolated, punfied, or recombinant polynucleotides comprising a contiguous span of at least 12, 15, 18, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 50, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100, 150, 200, 500, or 1000 nucleotides of SEQ ED 35 No 3 or the complements thereof, wherein said contiguous span comprises at least 1, 2, 3, 5, or 10 of the following nucleotide positions of SEQ ID No 3: 1-162 and 747-872. Additional preferred probes and pnmers ofthe invention include isolated, punfied, or recombinant polynucleotides comprising a contiguous span of at least 12, 15, 18, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 50, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100, 150, 200, 500, or 1000 nucleotides of SEQ ED No 3 or the complements thereof, wherein said contiguous span comprises at least one nucleotide selected in the group consisting of a nucleotide A at positions 253, 363, 527, 2597, and 5523 of SEQ ED No 3; a nucleotide C at positions 1139, 2105, and 2801 of SEQ ED No 3; a nucleotide G at positions 176, 875, 2811, 3719 of SEQ ED No 3; and a nucleotide T at positions 2282, and 2549 of SEQ ED No 3. Additional preferred probes and primers ofthe invention include isolated, purified, or recombinant polynucleotides compnsmg a contiguous span of at least 12, 15, 18, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 50, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100, 150, 200, 500, or 1000 nucleotides of SEQ ED No 3 or the complements thereof, wherein said contiguous span comprises at least one nucleotide selected m the group consisting of a nucleotide A at positions 708, 807, 1619, 1850, and 2126; a nucleotide C at positions 2062, 3505, and 3823; a nucleotide G at positions 709, 1971, 2059, 2060, 2061, 2107, 2140, and 3824; and a nucleotide T at positions 2533, and 2809 of SEQ ED No 3. Other preferred probes and pnmers ofthe invention include isolated, punfied, or recombinant polynucleotides comprising a contiguous span of at least 12, 15, 18, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 50, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100, 150, 200, 500, or 1000 nucleotides of SEQ ID No 3 or the complements thereof, wherein said contiguous span comprises nucleotide positions selected from the group consisting of the nucleotide positions of SEQ TD No 3: 1355-1357, 1892-1894, 2090-2094, 2530-2532, 2619- 2622, 3149-3152, 3183-3187, 3500-3501, 3508-3514, 3527-3532, 3533-3538, 3552-3557, 3746- 3749, 3789-3792, 3797-3799, 3809-3815, 3912-3914 and 4056-4058. An additional object ofthe invention is a punfied, isolated, or recombinant polynucleotide comprising the nucleotide sequence of SEQ ED No 4, complementary sequences thereto, as well as allelic vanants, and fragments thereof. Particularly preferred probes and primers of the invention include isolated, punfied, or recombinant polynucleotides comprising a contiguous span of at least 12, 15, 18, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 50, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100, 150, 200, 500, or 1000 nucleotides of SEQ ED No 4 or the complements thereof, wherein said contiguous span comprises at least 1, 2, 3, 5, or 10 of the nucleotide positions 1-162 of SEQ ID No 4. Additional preferred probes and primers of the invention include isolated, purified, or recombinant polynucleotides comprising a contiguous span of at least 12, 15, 18, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 50, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100, 150, 200, 500, or 1000 nucleotides of SEQ ED No 4 or the complements thereof, wherein said contiguous span comprises at least one nucleotide selected m the group consisting of a nucleotide A at positions 253, 363, 527 and 2460 of SEQ ED No 4; a nucleotide C at position 1013 of SEQ ED No 4; and a nucleotide G at positions 176 and 749 of SEQ TD No 4. Additionally preferred probes and primers of the invention include isolated, purified, or recombinant polynucleotides comprising a contiguous span of at least 12, 15, 18, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 50, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100, 150, 200, 500, or 1000 nucleotides of SEQ ED No 4 or the complements thereof, wherein said contiguous span comprises at least one nucleotide selected in the group consisting of a nucleotide A at positions 708 and 807 and a nucleotide G at position 709 of SEQ ED No 4. Other preferred probes and pnmers ofthe invention include isolated, punfied, or recombinant polynucleotides compπsmg a contiguous span of at least 12, 15, 18, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 50, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100, 150, 200, 500, or 1000 nucleotides of SEQ ED No 4 or the complements thereof, wherein said contiguous span comprises the pairs of nucleotide positions 1136-1137 of SEQ ID No 4. One more object of the invention is a purified, isolated, or recombinant polynucleotide comprising the nucleotide sequence of SEQ TD No 8, complementary sequences thereto, as well as allelic vanants, and fragments thereof. Particularly preferred nucleic acids of the invention include isolated, purified, or recombinant polynucleotides comprising a contiguous span of at least 12, 15, 18, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 50, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100, 150. 200, 500, or 1000 nucleotides of SEQ ID No 8 or the complements thereof, wherein said contiguous span comprises at least 1, 2, 3, 5, or 10 ofthe following nucleotide positions of SEQ ED No 8: 1-500, 501-1000, 1001-1500, and 1501-1738. Thus, the invention also relates to nucleic acid probes charactenzed in that they hybπdize specifically, under the stnngent hybridization conditions defined above, with a nucleic acid selected from the group consisting of the nucleotide sequences: a) 1-70715, 70795-82207, 82297-83612, 83824-85297, 85418-86388, 86446-87495, 87523- 88294, 88384-89483, 89650-92748, 97156-98309, 98476-99329, 99491-100026, 100212-100281, 100396-100538, 100682-100833, 100995-101920, 102087-102970, 103264-103724, and 103753- 106746 of SEQ ED No 1 or a variant thereof or a sequence complementary thereto; b) 1-162 of SEQ ED No 2 or a variant thereof or a sequence complementary thereto; c) 1-162 and 747-872 of SEQ ID No 3 or a variant thereof or a sequence complementary thereto; d) 1-162 of SEQ ED No 4 or a variant thereof or a sequence complementary thereto; and e) SEQ ED No 8 or a variant thereof or a sequence complementary thereto. In a preferred embodiment, the ohgonucleotides ofthe invention can hybridize with at least a portion of an mtron or of the regulatory sequences of the PCTA-1 gene. Particularly prefeπed ohgonucleotides ofthe invention hybπdize with a sequence comprised in an mtron or in the regulatory sequences of the PCTA-1 gene. In an other preferred embodiment, the ohgonucleotides of the invention can hybridize with at least a portion of an exon selected in the group of exons 0, 1 , 6bιs, 9, and 9ter. The present invention also concerns ohgonucleotides and groups of ohgonucleotides for the detection of alleles of biallelic markers of the PCTA-1 gene, preferably those associated with cancer, preferably with prostate cancer, with an early onset of prostate cancer, with a susceptibility to prostate cancer, with the level of aggressiveness of prostate cancer tumors, with a modified or forthcoming expression ofthe PCTA-1 gene, with a modified or forthcoming production ofthe PCTA-1 protein, or with the production of a modified PCTA-1 protein. These ohgonucleotides are characteπzed m that they can hybπdize with a PCTA-1 gene, preferably with a polymorphic PCTA-1 gene and more preferably with a region oi a PCTA-1 gene compπsmg a polymoφhic site containing a specific allele associated with prostate cancer, with the level of aggressiveness of prostate cancer tumors or with modifications in the regulation of expression of the PCTA-1 gene These ohgonucleotides are useful either as pnmers for use m vaπous processes such as DNA amplification and microsequencmg or as probes for DNA recognition in hybridization analyses Therefore, another preferred embodiment of a probe according to the invention consists of a nucleic acid comprising a biallelic marker selected from the group consisting of Al to A125 or the complements thereof, for which the respective locations in the sequence listing are provided m Table 2 In some embodiments, the ohgonucleotides comprise the polymoφhic base of a sequence selected from PI to PI 25, and the complementary sequences thereto In other embodiments, the ohgonucleotides have a 3' terminus immediately adjacent to a polymorphic base in the PCTA-1 gene, such as a polymoφhic base comprised in one of the sequences PI to P125, and the complementary sequence thereto In other embodiments, the oligonucleotide is capable of discriminating between different alleles of a biallelic marker in the PCTA-1 gene, including the biallelic markers Al to A 125 and the complements thereof In one embodiment the invention encompasses isolated, punfied, and recombinant polynucleotides consisting of, or consisting essentially of a contiguous span of 8 to 50 nucleotides of any one of SEQ TD Nos 1, 2, 3, 4 and the complement thereof, wherein said span includes a PCTA- 7-related biallelic marker m said sequence, optionally, wherein said PCTA- 1 -related biallelic marker is selected from the group consisting of Al to A125, and the complements thereof, or optionally the biallelic markers m linkage disequilibrium therewith, optionally, wherein said PCTA- 1 -related biallelic marker is selected from the group consisting of Al to A44, A46 to A53, A57, A58, A62 to A76, A81, A82, A86 to A91, A107, A118, and A123 to A125, and the complements thereof, or optionally the biallelic markers in linkage disequihbπum theiewith, optionally, wherein said PCTA- 7 -related biallelic marker is selected from the group consisting of A45, A54, A60, A61, A77 to A80, A83 to A85, A93, A102 to A106, A109, Al 10, Al 14, and A122, and the complements thereof, or optionally the biallelic markers in linkage disequihbnum therewith, optionally, wherein said PCTA- 7-related biallelic marker is selected from the group consisting of A55, A56, A59, A92, A94 to A101, A108, Al 11 to Al 13, Al 15 to Al 17, and Al 19 to A121, and the complements thereof, or optionally the biallelic markers m linkage disequihbnum therewith, optionally, wherein said contiguous span is 18 to 47 nucleotides in length and said biallelic marker is withm 4 nucleotides of the center of said polynucleotide, optionally, wherein said polynucleotide consists of said contiguous span and said contiguous span is 25 nucleotides m length and said biallelic marker is at the center of said polynucleotide, optionally, wherein said polynucleotide consists of said contiguous span and said contiguous span is 47 nucleotides in length and said biallelic marker is at the center of said polynucleotide, optionally, wherein the 3' end of said contiguous span is present at the 3' end of said polynucleotide, and optionally, wherein the 3' end of said contiguous span is located at the 3' end of said polynucleotide and said biallelic marker is present at the 3' end of said polynucleotide. In a preferred embodiment, said probes comprises, consists of, or consists essentially of a sequence selected from the following sequences * PI to PI 25 and the complementary sequences thereto. In another embodiment the invention encompasses isolated, purified and recombinant polynucleotides comprising, consisting of, or consisting essentially of a contiguous span of 8 to 50 nucleotides of SEQ ED Nos 1, 2, 3, 4, or the complements thereof, wherein the 3' end of said contiguous span is located at the 3' end of said polynucleotide, and wherein the 3' end of said polynucleotide is located withm 20 nucleotides upstream of a PCTA- 1 -related biallelic marker m said sequence, optionally, wherein said PCTA- 1 -related biallelic marker is selected from the group consisting of Al to A 125, and the complements thereof, or optionally the biallelic markers m linkage disequihbnum therewith; optionally, wherein said PCTA- 1 -related biallelic marker is selected from the group consisting of Al to A44, A46 to A53, A57, A58, A62 to A76, A81, A82, A86 to A91, A107, Al 18, and A123 to A125, and the complements thereof, or optionally the biallelic markers m linkage disequilibrium therewith, optionally, wherein said PCTA- 1 -related biallelic marker is selected from the group consisting of A45, A54, A60, A61, A77 to A80, A83 to A85, A93, A102 to A106, A109, Al 10, Al 14, and A122, and the complements thereof, or optionally the biallelic markers in linkage disequihbnum therewith, optionally, wherein said PCTA- 7-related biallelic marker is selected from the group consisting of A55, A56, A59, A92, A94 to A101, A108, Al 11 to Al 13, Al 15 to Al 17, and Al 19 to A121, and the complements thereof, or optionally the biallelic markers in linkage disequihbnum therewith; optionally, wherein the 3' end of said polynucleotide is located 1 nucleotide upstream of said PCTA- 1 -related biallelic marker in said sequence, and optionally, wherein said polynucleotide consists essentially of a sequence selected from the following sequences: DI to D125 and El to E125 In a further embodiment, the invention encompasses isolated, purified, or recombinant polynucleotides comprising, consisting of, or consisting essentially of a sequence selected from the following sequences. Bl to B47 and CI to C47. In an additional embodiment, the invention encompasses polynucleotides for use in hybridization assays, sequencing assays, and enzyme-based mismatch detection assays for determining the identity ofthe nucleotide at a C 4-7-related biallelic marker in SEQ TD Nos 1, 2, 3, 4, or the complements thereof, as well as polynucleotides for use m amplifying segments of nucleotides comprising a PCTA- 1 -related biallelic marker in SEQ ED Nos 1, 2, 3, 4, or the complements thereof; optionally, wherein said PC7^4-7-related biallelic marker is selected from the group consisting of Al to A125, and the complements thereof, or optionally the biallelic markers m linkage disequihbnum therewith; optionally, wherein said PCL -7-related biallelic marker is selected from the group consisting of Al to A44, A46 to A53, A57, A58, A62 to A76, A81, A82, A86 to A91, A107, Al 18, and A123 to A125, and the complements thereof, or optionally the biallelic markers in linkage disequihbnum therewith; optionally, wherein said PCTA-1 -related biallelic marker is selected from the group consisting of A45, A54, A60, A61, A77 to A80, A83 to A85, A93, A102 to A106, A109, A110, A114, and A122, and the complements thereof, or optionally the biallelic markers in linkage disequihbnum therewith, optionally, wherein said PCTA- 7-related biallelic marker is selected from the group consisting of A55, A56, A59, A92, A94 to A101, A108, Al 11 to Al 13, Al 15 to Al 17, and Al 19 to A121, and the complements thereof, or optionally the biallelic markers m linkage disequihbnum therewith. The formation of stable hybnds depends on the melting temperature (Tm) ofthe DNA. The Tm depends on the length ofthe pnmer or probe, the ionic strength of the solution and the G+C content. The higher the G+C content ofthe primer or probe, the higher is the melting temperature because G:C pairs are held by three H bonds whereas A:T pairs have only two The GC content in the probes of the invention usually ranges between 10 and 75 %, preferably between 35 and 60 %>, and more preferably between 40 and 55 % A probe or a pnmer according to the invention has between 8 and 1000 nucleotides in length, or is specified to be at least 12, 15, 18, 20, 25, 35, 40, 50, 60, 70, 80, 100, 250, 500 or 1000 nucleotides in length. More particularly, the length of these probes and pnmers can range from 8, 10, 15, 20, or 30 to 100 nucleotides, preferably from 10 to 50, more preferably from 15 to 30 nucleotides. Shorter probes and pnmers tend to lack specificity for a target nucleic acid sequence and generally require cooler temperatures to form sufficiently stable hybrid complexes with the template. Longer probes and pnmers are expensive to produce and can sometimes self-hybridize to form haiφin structures. The appropriate length for pnmers and probes under a particular set of assay conditions may be empirically determined by one of skill in the art. A preferred probe or primer consists of a nucleic acid comprising a polynucleotide selected from the group ofthe nucleotide sequences of PI to PI 25 and the complementary sequence thereto, Bl to B47, CI to C47, DI to D125, El to E125, for which the respective locations in the sequence listing are provided in Tables 1, 2, 3 and 4. The pnmers and probes can be prepared by any suitable method, including, for example, cloning and restriction of appropriate sequences and direct chemical synthesis by a method such as the phosphodiester method of Narang et al.(1979), the phosphodiester method of Brown et al.(1979), the diethylphosphoramidite method of Beaucage et al.(1981) and the solid support method described m EP O 707 592. Detection probes are generally nucleic acid sequences or uncharged nucleic acid analogs such as, for example peptide nucleic acids which are disclosed in International Patent Application WO 92/20702, moφholmo analogs which are descnbed in U.S. Patents Numbered 5,185,444; 5,034,506 and 5,142,047. The probe may have to be rendered "non-extendable" in that additional dNTPs cannot be added to the probe. In and of themselves analogs usually are non-extendable and nucleic acid probes can be rendered non-extendable by modifying the 3' end of the probe such that the hydroxyl group is no longer capable of participating in elongation. For example, the 3' end of the probe can be functionalized with the capture or detection label to thereby consume or otherwise block the hydroxyl group. Alternatively, the 3' hydroxyl group simply can be cleaved, replaced or modified, U.S. Patent Application Senal No. 07/049,061 filed Apπl 19, 1993 describes modifications, which can be used to render a probe non-extendable. Any of the polynucleotides of the present invention can be labeled, if desired, by incoφorating any label known the art to be detectable by spectroscopic, photochemical, biochemical, immunochemical, or chemical means. For example, useful labels include radioactive substances (including, 32 P, 35 S, 3 H, 125 I), fluorescent dyes (including, 5-bromodesoxyuπdm, fluorescein, acetylammofiuorene, digoxigenm) or biotm. Preferably, polynucleotides are labeled at their 3' and 5' ends. Examples of non-radioactive labeling of nucleic acid fragments are described m the French patent No. FR-7810975 or by Urdea et al (1988) or Sanchez-Pescador et al (1988). In addition, the probes according to the present invention may have structural characten sties such that they allow the signal amplification, such structural charactenstics being, for example, branched DNA probes as those descnbed by Urdea et al. m 1991 or m the European patent No. EP 0 225 807 (Chiron). A label can also be used to capture the primer, so as to facilitate the immobilization of either the pnmer or a primer extension product, such as amplified DNA, on a solid support. A capture label is attached to the pnmers or probes and can be a specific binding member which forms a binding pair with the solid's phase reagent's specific binding member (e.g. biotin and streptavidin). Therefore depending upon the type of label earned by a polynucleotide or a probe, it may be employed to capture or to detect the target DNA. Further, it will be understood that the polynucleotides, pnmers or probes provided herein, may, themselves, serve as the capture label. For example, in the case where a solid phase reagent's binding member is a nucleic acid sequence, it may be selected such that it binds a complementary portion of a pnmer or probe to thereby immobilize the pnmer or probe to the solid phase. In cases where a polynucleotide probe itself serves as the binding member, those skilled in the art will recognize that the probe will contain a sequence or "tail" that is not complementary to the target. In the case where a polynucleotide primer itself serves as the capture label, at least a portion ofthe pnmer will be free to hybπdize with a nucleic acid on a solid phase. DNA Labeling techniques are well known to the skilled technician. The probes of the present invention are useful for a number of puφoses They can be notably used m Southern hybridization to genomic DNA. The probes can also be used to detect PCR amplification products. They may also be used to detect mismatches m the PCTA-1 gene or mRNA using other techniques. Any of the polynucleotides, pnmers and probes of the present invention can be conveniently immobilized on a solid support. Solid supports are known to those skilled in the art and include the walls of wells of a reaction tray, test tubes, polystyrene beads, magnetic beads, nitrocellulose strips, membranes, microparticles such as latex particles, sheep (or other animal) red blood cells, duracytes and others. The solid support is not cntical and can be selected by one skilled in the art. Thus, latex particles, microparticles, magnetic or non-magnetic beads, membranes, plastic tubes, walls of microtiter wells, glass or silicon chips, sheep (or other suitable animal's) red blood cells and duracytes are all suitable examples. Suitable methods for immobilizing nucleic acids on solid phases include ionic, hydrophobic, covalent interactions and the like. A solid support, as used herein, refers to any material which is insoluble, or can be made insoluble by a subsequent reaction The solid support can be chosen for its intrinsic ability to attract and immobilize the capture reagent. Alternatively, the solid phase can retain an additional receptor which has the ability to attract and immobilize the capture reagent. The additional receptor can include a charged substance that is oppositely charged with respect to the capture reagent itself or to a charged substance conjugated to the capture reagent. As yet another alternative, the receptor molecule can be any specific binding member which is immobilized upon (attached to) the solid support and which has the ability to immobilize the capture reagent through a specific binding reaction. The receptor molecule enables the indirect binding of the capture reagent to a solid support material before the performance ofthe assay or dunng the performance of the assay. The solid phase thus can be a plastic, derivatized plastic, magnetic or non-magnetic metal, glass or silicon surface of a test tube, microtiter well, sheet, bead, microparticle, chip, sheep (or other suitable animal's) red blood cells, duracytes® and other configurations known to those of ordinary skill m the art The polynucleotides ofthe invention can be attached to or immobilized on a solid support individually or in groups of at least 2, 5, 8, 10, 12, 15, 20, or 25 distinct polynucleotides of the invention to a single solid support. In addition, polynucleotides other than those of the invention may be attached to the same solid support as one or more polynucleotides of the invention. Consequently, the invention also deals with a method for detecting the presence of a nucleic acid comprising a nucleotide sequence selected from a group consisting of SEQ ED Nos 1, 2, 3, 4, 8, a fragment or a variant thereof and a complementary sequence thereto m a sample, said method comprising the following steps of: a) bnngmg into contact a nucleic acid probe or a plurality of nucleic acid probes which can hybridize with a nucleotide sequence included m a nucleic acid selected form the group consisting of the nucleotide sequences of SEQ ED Nos 1, 2, 3, 4, 8, a fragment or a vanant thereof and a complementary sequence thereto and the sample to be assayed; and b) detecting the hybrid complex formed between the probe and a nucleic acid in the sample. The invention further concerns a kit for detecting the presence of a nucleic acid comprising a nucleotide sequence selected from a group consisting of SEQ ED Nos 1, 2, 3, 4, 8, a fragment or a variant thereof and a complementary sequence thereto in a sample, said kit comprising: a) a nucleic acid probe or a plurality of nucleic acid probes which can hybπdize with a nucleotide sequence included in a nucleic acid selected form the group consisting of the nucleotide sequences of SEQ TD Nos 1, 2, 3, 4, 8, a fragment or a vanant thereof and a complementary sequence thereto; and b) optionally, the reagents necessary for performing the hybridization reaction. In a first preferred embodiment of this detection method and kit, said nucleic acid probe or the plurality of nucleic acid probes are labeled with a detectable molecule. In a second preferred embodiment of said method and kit, said nucleic acid probe or the plurality of nucleic acid probes has been immobilized on a substrate. In a third preferred embodiment, the nucleic acid probe or the plurality of nucleic acid probes comprise either a sequence which is selected from the group consisting ofthe nucleotide sequences of PI to PI 25 and the complementary sequence thereto, Bl to B47, CI to C47, DI to D 125, El to El 25 or a biallelic marker selected from the group consisting of Al to A 125 and the complements thereto. Oligonucleotide Arrays A substrate comprising a plurality of oligonucleotide primers or probes ofthe invention may be used either for detecting or amplifying targeted sequences in the PCTA-1 gene and may also be used for detecting mutations in the coding or m the non-codmg sequences ofthe PCTA-1 gene Any polynucleotide provided herein may be attached in overlapping areas or at random locations on the solid support. Alternatively the polynucleotides of the invention may be attached m an ordered array wherein each polynucleotide is attached to a distinct region ofthe solid support which does not overlap with the attachment site of any other polynucleotide. Preferably, such an ordered array of polynucleotides is designed to be "addressable" where the distinct locations are recorded and can be accessed as part of an assay procedure. Addressable polynucleotide arrays typically comprise a plurality of different oligonucleotide probes that are coupled to a surface of a substrate in different known locations. The knowledge of the precise location of each polynucleotides location makes these "addressable" arrays particularly useful in hybridization assays Any addressable array technology known in the art can be employed with the polynucleotides of he invention. One particular embodiment of these polynucleotide arrays is known as the Genechips™, and has been generally descnbed m US Patent 5,143,854; PCT publications WO 90/15070 and 92/10092. These arrays may generally be produced using mechanical synthesis methods or light directed synthesis methods which incoφorate a combination of photolithographic methods and solid phase oligonucleotide synthesis (Fodor et al., 1991). The immobilization of arrays of ohgonucleotides on solid supports has been rendered possible by the development of a technology generally identified as "Very Large Scale Immobilized Polymer Synthesis" (VLSIPS™) in which, typically, probes are immobilized in a high density array on a solid surface of a chip. Examples of VLSIPS™ technologies are provided in US Patents 5,143,854; and 5,412,087 and in PCT Publications WO 90/15070, WO 92/10092 and WO 95/11995, which describe methods for forming oligonucleotide arrays through techniques such as light-directed synthesis techniques. In designing strategies aimed at providing arrays of nucleotides immobilized on solid supports, further presentation strategies were developed to order and display the oligonucleotide arrays on the chips in an attempt to maximize hybridization patterns and sequence information. Examples of such presentation strategies are disclosed in PCT Publications WO 94/12305, WO 94/11530, WO 97/29212 and WO 97/31256. In another embodiment of the oligonucleotide arrays ofthe invention, an oligonucleotide probe matnx may advantageously be used to detect mutations occurnng in the PCTA-1 gene and preferably its regulatory region. For this particular puφose, probes are specifically designed to have a nucleotide sequence allowing their hybndization to the genes that carry known mutations (either by deletion, insertion or substitution of one or several nucleotides). By known mutations, it is meant, mutations on the PCTA-1 gene that have been identified according, for example to the technique used by Huang et al.(1996) or Samson et al.(1996). Another technique that is used to detect mutations in the PCTA-1 gene is the use of a high- density DNA array. Each oligonucleotide probe constituting a unit element of the high density DNA array is designed to match a specific subsequence of the PCTA-1 genomic DNA or cDNA. Thus, an array consisting of ohgonucleotides complementary to subsequences ofthe target gene sequence is used to determine the identity ofthe target sequence with the wild gene sequence, measure its amount, and detect differences between the target sequence and the reference wild gene sequence of the PCTA-1 gene. In one such design, termed 4L tiled array, is implemented a set of four probes (A, C, G, T), preferably 15-nucleotide oligomers. In each set of four probes, the perfect complement will hybπdize more strongly than mismatched probes. Consequently, a nucleic acid target of length L is scanned for mutations with a tiled array containing 4L probes, the whole probe set containing all the possible mutations in the known wild reference sequence. The hybridization signals ofthe 15- mer probe set tiled array are perturbed by a single base change in the target sequence. As a consequence, there is a characteristic loss of signal or a "footprint" for the probes flanking a mutation position. This technique was described by Chee et al. in 1996. Consequently, the invention concerns an array of nucleic acid molecules comprising at least one polynucleotide described above as probes and primers. Preferably, the invention concerns an aπay of nucleic acid comprising at least two polynucleotides described above as probes and pnmers. A further object ofthe invention consists of an array of nucleic acid sequences comprising either at least one of the sequences selected from the group consisting of PI to P125, Bl to B47, CI to C47, DI to D125, El to E125, the sequences complementary thereto, a fragment thereof of at least 8, 10, 12, 15, 18, 20, 25, 30, or 40 consecutive nucleotides thereof, and at least one sequence comprising a biallelic marker selected from the group consisting of Al to A 125 and the complements thereto. The invention also pertains to an array of nucleic acid sequences comprising either at least two ofthe sequences selected from the group consisting of PI to P125, Bl to B47, CI to C47, DI to D 125, El to El 25, the sequences complementary thereto, a fragment thereof of at least 8 consecutive nucleotides thereof, and at least two sequences comprising a biallelic marker selected from the group consisting of Al to A 125 and the complements thereof. PCTA-1 Proteins And Polypeptide Fragments Thereof The term "PCTA-1 polypeptides" is used herein to embrace all ofthe proteins and polypeptides ofthe present invention. Also forming part ofthe invention are polypeptides encoded by the polynucleotides ofthe invention, as well as fusion polypeptides comprising such polypeptides. The invention embodies PCTA-1 proteins from humans, including isolated or punfied PCTA-1 proteins consisting, consisting essentially, or comprising the sequence of SEQ ED No 5. It should be noted the PCTA-1 proteins of the invention are based on the naturally-occurring variant of the ammo acid sequence of human PCTA-1, wherein the vahne residue of ammo acid position 170 has been replaced with a senne residue and the glutamme residue of ammo acid position 203 has been replaced with a lysine residue. This variant protein and the fragments thereof which contain a senne at the ammo acid position 170 and a lysine at the ammo acid position 203 of SEQ ED No 5 are collectively referred to herein as "170-Ser 203-Lys variants." In another embodiment, the present invention concerns a punfied and/or isolated nucleic acid encoding the PCTA-1 protein of SEQ ED No 5 or variant or fragment thereof. The invention also concerns a punfied and/or isolated PCTA-1 protein comprising a sequence selected in the group consisting of SEQ ED Nos 6, 7 and vaπants and functional fragments thereof. In another embodiment, the present invention concerns a punfied and/or isolated nucleic acid encoding the PCTA-1 protein comprising a sequence selected m the group consisting of SEQ ID Nos 6, 7 or a vanant or a fragment thereof. The invention also encompasses the ammo acid sequence of a murine PCTA-1 protein, such as that of SEQ TD No 9, fragments and variants thereof. The invention also concerns a nucleotide sequence encoding the murine PCTA-1 protein of SEQ ID No 9, sequences complementary thereto and fragments and vaπants thereof. The invention also relates to modified human and mouse PCTA-1 proteins and to fragments and variants thereof. The term "modified PCTA-1 protein" is intended to designate a PCTA-1 protein which, when compared to a native PCTA-1 protein of SEQ ED No 5, 6, or 7, bears at least one ammo acid substitution, deletion or addition. More particularly, preferred modified PCTA-1 proteins include the proteins beaπng at least one of the following ammo acid substitutions: - a substitution from F to Y at position 18, a substitution from R to C at position 35, a substitution from V to M at position 55 and a substitution from S to R at position 183 in SEQ ED No 5; - a substitution from F to Y at position 18, a substitution from R to C at position 35, a substitution from V to M at position 55, a substitution from D to Y at position 204 and a substitution from S to R at position 225 in SEQ ED No 6; and - a substitution from F to Y at position 18, a substitution from R to C at position 35, a 5 substitution from V to M at position 55 and a substitution from S to R at position 183 in SEQ ED No 7. Modified proteins bearing two or more of such substitutions also fall withm the scope of the present invention. Other preferred embodiments include regions ofthe modified PCTA-1 proteins of the invention, and particularly those regions beanng at least one ofthe substitutions described 10 above. Particularly preferred regions are those possessing antigenic properties and which can be used in vaccine agents or to raise antibodies against the PCTA-1 protein, and which most preferably comprise at least one ofthe particular substitutions referred to above. The term "modified PCTA-1 protein" also designates a truncated PCTA-1 protein consisting of the ammo acid sequence 1-211 of SEQ TD No 7. 15 The present invention embodies isolated, purified, and recombinant polypeptides comprising a contiguous span of at least 6 ammo acids, preferably at least 8 to 10 amino acids, more preferably at least 12, 15, 20, 25, 30, 40, 50, or 100 amino acids of SEQ ED No 5, wherein said contiguous span includes: - a serine residue at ammo acid position 170 and/or a lysine residue at ammo acid position 20 203 m SEQ ID No 5; and/or - at least one residue selected in the group consisting of a tyrosme residue at ammo acid position 18, a cysteine residue at ammo acid position 35, a methionine residue at ammo acid position 55 and an argmme residue at ammo acid position 183 in SEQ ID No 5. The present invention embodies isolated, punfied, and recombinant polypeptides comprising 25 a contiguous span of at least 6 ammo acids, preferably at least 8 to 10 amino acids, more preferably at least 12, 15, 20, 25, 30, 40, 50, or 100 ammo acids of SEQ TD No 6, wherein said contiguous span includes: - a serine residue at ammo acid position 170 and or a lysine residue at ammo acid position 245 m SEQ ID No 6; and/or 30 - at least one residue selected in the group consisting of a tyrosine residue at ammo acid position 18, a cysteine residue at ammo acid position 35, a methionine residue at ammo acid position 55 and an argmme residue at ammo acid position 225 in SEQ ED No 6; and/or - at least 1, 2, 3, 5 or 10 of the ammo acid encoded by the exon 6bιs, more particularly at least 1, 2, 3, 5 or 10 of the ammo acid positions 183-224 of the SEQ ED No 6. 35 The present invention embodies isolated, punfied, and recombinant polypeptides compnsmg a contiguous span of at least 6 ammo acids, preferably at least 8 to 10 ammo acids, more preferably at least 12, 15, 20, 25, 30, 40, 50, or 100 ammo acids of SEQ ED No 7, wherein said contiguous span includes: - a serine residue at ammo acid position 170 and/or a lysine residue at ammo acid position - at least one residue selected m the group consisting of a tyrosine residue at ammo acid position 18, a cysteine residue at ammo acid position 35, a methionine residue at ammo acid position 55 and an argmme residue at ammo acid position 183 in SEQ ED No 7; and/or - at least 1, 2, 3, 5 or 10 of the ammo acid encoded by the exons 9bιs and 9ter, more particularly at least 1, 2, 3, 5 or 10 of the ammo acid positions 313-368 of the SEQ ED No 7. The invention also concerns the truncated PCTA-1 protein consisting essentially of or consisting ofthe ammo acid positions 1-211 of SEQ ID No 7. In other prefeπed embodiments the contiguous stretch of ammo acids from SEQ ID Nos 5, 6, 7 comprises the site of a mutation or functional mutation, including a deletion, addition, swap or truncation ofthe ammo acids m the PCTA-1 protein sequence The present invention embodies isolated, punfied, and recombinant polypeptides comprising a contiguous span of at least 6 ammo acids, preferably at least 8 to 10 amino acids, more preferably at least 12, 15, 20, 25, 30, 40, 50, or 100 ammo acids of SEQ TD No 9. PCTA-1 proteins are preferably isolated from human or mammalian tissue samples or expressed from human or mammalian genes. The PCTA-1 polypeptides of the invention can be made using routine expression methods known in the art. The polynucleotide encoding the desired polypeptide, is hgated into an expression vector suitable for any convenient host. Both eukaryotic and prokaryotic host systems is used in forming recombinant polypeptides, and a summary of some of the more common systems. The polypeptide is then isolated from lysed cells or from the culture medium and purified to the extent needed for its intended use. Punfication is by any technique known m the art, for example, differential extraction, salt fractionation, chromatography, centπfugation, and the like. See, for example, Methods in Enzymology for a vaπety of methods for purifying proteins. In addition, shorter protein fragments is produced by chemical synthesis. Alternatively the proteins ofthe invention is extracted from cells or tissues of humans or non-human animals. Methods for punfymg proteins are known m the art, and include the use of detergents or chaofropic agents to disrupt particles followed by differential extraction and separation ofthe polypeptides by ion exchange chromatography, affinity chromatography, sedimentation according to density, and gel electrophoresis. Any PCTA-1 cDNA, including SEQ ED Nos 2, 3, 4, 8, is used to express PCTA-1 proteins and polypeptides. The nucleic acid encoding a PCTA-1 protein or polypeptide to be expressed is operably linked to a promoter in an expression vector using conventional cloning technology. The PCTA-1 insert in the expression vector may compnse the full coding sequence for a PCTA-1 protein or a fragment thereof. For example, the PCTA-1 denved insert may encode a polypeptide as descnbed above. The expression vector is any ofthe mammalian, yeast, insect or bactenal expression systems known in the art. Commercially available vectors and expression systems are available from a vaπety of suppliers including Genetics Institute (Cambndge, MA), Stratagene (La Jolla, California), Promega (Madison, Wisconsin), and Invitrogen (San Diego, California). If desired, to enhance expression and facilitate proper protein folding, the codon context and codon parnng ofthe sequence is optimized for the particular expression organism in which the expression vector is introduced, as explained by Hatfield, et al., U.S. Patent No. 5,082,767. In one embodiment, the entire coding sequence of a PCTA-1 cDNA through the poly A signal ofthe cDNA are operably linked to a promoter in the expression vector. Alternatively, if the nucleic acid encoding a fragment ofthe PCTA-1 protein lacks a methionine to serve as the initiation site, an initiating methionine can be introduced next to the first codon ofthe nucleic acid using conventional techniques. Similarly, if the insert from a PCTA-1 cDNA lacks a poly A signal, this sequence can be added to the construct by, for example, splicing out the Poly A signal from pSG5 (Stratagene) using Bgll and Sail restnction endonuclease enzymes and incoφorating it into the mammalian expression vector pXTl (Stratagene). pXTl contains the LTRs and a portion ofthe gag gene from Moloney Muπne Leukemia Virus. The position ofthe LTRs m the construct allow efficient stable transfection. The vector includes the Heφes Simplex Thymidine Kmase promoter and the selectable neomycm gene. The nucleic acid encoding a PCTA-1 protein or a fragment thereof is obtained by PCR from a bactenal vector containing a PCTA-1 cDNA selected from the group consisting of SEQ ED Nos 2, 3,4, and 8 using oligonucleotide pnmers complementary to the PCTA-1 cDNA or fragment thereof and containing restnction endonuclease sequences for Pst I incoφorated into the 5'pnmer and BglEl at the 5' end ofthe corresponding cDNA 3' pnmer, taking care to ensure that the sequence encoding the PCTA-1 protein or a fragment thereof is positioned properly with respect to the poly A signal The punfied fragment obtained from the resulting PCR reaction is digested with Pstl, blunt ended with an exonuclease, digested with Bgl II, punfied and hgated to pXTl, now containing a poly A signal and digested with Bglll. The hgated product is transfected into mouse NEH 3T3 cells using Lipofectm (Life Technologies, Inc., Grand Island, New York) under conditions outlined in the product specification Positive transfectants are selected after growing the transfected cells in 600ug/ml G418 (Sigma, St. Louis, Missoun). Alternatively, the nucleic acids encoding the PCTA-1 protein or a fragment thereof is cloned into pED6dpc2 (Genetics Institute, Cambndge, MA). The resulting pED6dpc2 constructs is transfected into a suitable host cell, such as COS 1 cells. Methofrexate resistant cells are selected and expanded. The above procedures may also be used to express a mutant PCTA-1 protein responsible for a detectable phenotype or a fragment thereof. The expressed proteins is punfied using conventional punfication techniques such as ammonium sulfate precipitation or chromatographic separation based on size or charge The protein encoded by the nucleic acid insert may also be punfied using standard lmmunochromatography techniques In such procedures, a solution containing the expressed PCTA-1 protein or fragment thereof, such as a cell extract, is applied to a column having antibodies against the PCTA-1 protein or fragment thereof is attached to the chromatography matπx The expressed protein is allowed to bind the lmmunochromatography column Thereafter, the column is washed to remove non-specifically bound proteins The specifically bound expressed protein is then released from the column and recovered using standard techniques To confirm expression of a PCTA-1 protein or a fragment thereof, the proteins expressed from host cells containing an expression vector containing an insert encoding a PCTA-1 protein or a fragment thereof can be compared to the proteins expressed m host cells containing the expression vector without an insert The presence of a band in samples from cells containing the expression vector with an insert which is absent in samples from cells containing the expression vector without an insert indicates that the PCTA- 1 protein or a fragment thereof is being expressed Generally, the band will have the mobility expected for the PCTA-1 protein or fragment thereof However, the band may have a mobility different than that expected as a result of modifications such as glycosylation, ubiq tmation, or enzymatic cleavage Antibodies capable of specifically recognizing the expressed PCTA-1 protein or a fragment thereof are descnbed below If antibody production is not possible, the nucleic acids encoding the PCTA-1 protein or a fragment thereof is incoφorated into expression vectors designed for use m punfication schemes employing chimeπc polypeptides In such strategies the nucleic acid encoding the PCTA-1 protein or a fragment thereof is inserted frame with the gene encoding the other half of the chimera The other half ofthe chimera is β-globm or a nickel binding polypeptide encoding sequence A chromatography matrix having antibody to β-globm or nickel attached thereto is then used to punfy the chimenc protein Protease cleavage sites is engineered between the β-globin gene or the nickel binding polypeptide and the PCTA-1 protein or fragment thereof Thus, the two polypeptides ofthe chimera is separated from one another by protease digestion One useful expression vector for generating β-globm chimenc proteins is pSG5 (Stratagene), which encodes rabbit β-globm Intron II ofthe rabbit β-globm gene facilitates splicing ofthe expressed transcnpt, and the polyadenylation signal mcoφorated into the construct increases the level of expression These techniques are well known to those skilled m the art of molecular biology Standard methods are published in methods texts such as Davis et al , (1986) and many ofthe methods are available from Stratagene, Life Technologies, Inc , or Promega Polypeptide may additionally be produced from the construct using m vitro translation systems such as the In vitro Express Translation Kit (Stratagene) Antibodies That Bind PCTA-1 Polypeptides of the Invention Any PCTA-1 polypeptide or whole protein may be used to generate antibodies capable of specifically binding to an expressed PCTA-1 protein or fragments thereof as descnbed. One antibody composition of the invention is capable of specifically binding or specifically bind to the 170-Ser 203-Lys variant of the PCTA- 1 protein of SEQ ED No 5. An other antibody composition ofthe invention is capable of specifically binding or specifically bind to the PCTA-1 protein selected m the group consisting of ammo acid sequences of SEQ TD Nos 6, 7, 9. For an antibody composition to specifically bind to a first vanant of PCTA-1, it must demonstrate at least a 5%, 10%, 15%, 20%, 25%, 50%, or 100% greater binding affinity for a full length first vanant ofthe PCTA-1 protein than for a full length second variant of the PCTA-1 protein m an ELISA, RIA, or other antibody-based binding assay In a preferred embodiment, the invention concerns antibody compositions, either polyclonal or monoclonal, capable of selectively binding, or selectively bind to an epitope-contaimng any one ofthe following polypeptides a) a polypeptide comprising a contiguous span of at least 6 amino acids, preferably at least 8 to 10 ammo acids, more preferably at least 12, 15, 20, 25, 30, 40, 50, or 100 amino acids of SEQ ED No 5 , wherein said epitope comprises l) a senne residue at amino acid position 170 and or a lysine residue at ammo acid position 203 SEQ ED No 5; and/or n) at least one residue selected m the group consisting of a tyrosine residue at ammo acid position 18, a cysteine residue at ammo acid position 35, a methionine residue at amino acid position 55 and an argmme residue at ammo acid position 183 m SEQ ED No 5, b) a polypeptide comprising a contiguous span of at least 6 amino acids, preferably at least 8 to 10 ammo acids, more preferably at least 12, 15, 20, 25, 30, 40, 50, or 100 amino acids of SEQ ED No 6 , wherein said epitope comprises. l) a serine residue at amino acid position 170 and/or a lysine residue at ammo acid position 245 in SEQ ED No 6; and/or n) at least one residue selected in the group consisting of a tyrosme residue at ammo acid position 18, a cysteine residue at ammo acid position 35, a methionine residue at amino acid position 55 and an argmme residue at ammo acid position 225 in SEQ ED No 6; and/or m) at least 1, 2, 3, 5 or 10 ofthe ammo acid encoded by the exon 6bιs, more particularly at least 1, 2, 3, 5 or 10 of the ammo acid positions 183-224 of the SEQ TD No 6, c) a polypeptide comprising a contiguous span of at least 6 ammo acids, preferably at least 8 to 10 amino acids, more preferably at least 12, 15, 20, 25, 30, 40, 50, or 100 ammo acids of SEQ ED No 7 , wherein said epitope comprises * l) a senne residue at ammo acid position 170 and or a lysine residue at ammo acid position 203 m SEQ ED No 7; and/or π) at least one residue selected m the group consisting of a tyrosine residue at ammo acid position 18, a cysteine residue at ammo acid position 35, a methionine residue at amino acid position 55 and an argmme residue at ammo acid position 183 m SEQ ED No 7; and/or m) at least 1, 2, 3, 5 or 10 of the ammo acid encoded by the exons 9bιs and 9ter, more particularly at least 1, 2, 3, 5 or 10 ofthe ammo acid positions 313-368 of the SEQ ID No 7; and d) a polypeptide comprising a contiguous span of at least 6 ammo acids, preferably at least 8 to 10 ammo acids, more preferably at least 12, 15, 20, 25, 30, 40, 50, or 100 amino acids of SEQ ED No 9. The invention also concerns a punfied or isolated antibody capable of specifically binding to a mutated PCTA-1 protein or to a fragment or variant thereof comprising an epitope of the mutated PCTA-1 protein. In another preferred embodiment, the present invention concerns an antibody capable of binding to a polypeptide comprising at least 10 consecutive ammo acids of a PCTA-1 protein and including at least one of the ammo acids which can be encoded by the trait causing mutations. In a preferred embodiment, the invention concerns the use of any one ofthe following polypeptides in the manufacture of antibodies: a) a polypeptide comprising a contiguous span of at least 6 amino acids, preferably at least 8 to 10 ammo acids, more preferably at least 12, 15, 20, 25, 30, 40, 50, or 100 ammo acids of SEQ ED No 5 , wherein said contigous span comprises I) a senne residue at ammo acid position 170 and or a lysine residue at amino acid position 203 in SEQ ED No 5, and/or n) at least one residue selected in the group consisting of a tyrosine residue at amino acid position 18, a cysteine residue at ammo acid position 35, a methionine residue at ammo acid position 55 and an argmme residue at ammo acid position 183 in SEQ ED No 5; b) a polypeptide comprising a contiguous span of at least 6 ammo acids, preferably at least 8 to 10 ammo acids, more preferably at least 12, 15, 20, 25, 30, 40, 50, or 100 ammo acids of SEQ ED No 6 , wherein said contigous span comprises: l) a senne residue at amino acid position 170 and or a lysme residue at ammo acid position 245 in SEQ ED No 6; and/or n) at least one residue selected m the group consisting of a tyrosine residue at ammo acid position 18, a cysteine residue at ammo acid position 35, a methionine residue at ammo acid position 55 and an argmme residue at ammo acid position 225 m SEQ TD No 6; and/or in) at least 1, 2, 3, 5 or 10 of the ammo acid encoded by the exon 6bιs, more particularly at least 1, 2, 3, 5 or 10 of the ammo acid positions 183-224 ofthe SEQ TD No 6; c) a polypeptide comprising a contiguous span of at least 6 ammo acids, preferably at least 8 to 10 amino acids, more preferably at least 12, 15, 20, 25, 30, 40, 50, or 100 amino acids of SEQ ED No 7 , wherein said contigous span comprises l) a senne residue at ammo acid position 170 and/or a lysine residue at ammo acid position 203 in SEQ ED No 7, and/or n) at least one residue selected in the group consisting of a tyrosine residue at ammo acid position 18, a cysteine residue at ammo acid position 35, a methionine residue at amino acid position 55 and an argmme residue at ammo acid position 183 in SEQ ED No 7, and/or in) at least 1, 2, 3, 5 or 10 of the ammo acid encoded by the exons 9bιs and 9ter, more particularly at least 1, 2, 3, 5 or 10 ofthe amino acid positions 313-368 ofthe SEQ ED No 7, and d) a polypeptide comprising a contiguous span of at least 6 ammo acids, preferably at least 8 to 10 ammo acids, more preferably at least 12, 15, 20, 25, 30, 40, 50, or 100 ammo acids of SEQ ED No 9 Non-human animals or mammals, whether wild-type or transgenic, which express a different species of PCTA-1 than the one to which antibody binding is desired, and animals which do not express PCTA-1 (l e a PCTA-1 knock out animal as descnbed in herein) are particularly useful for preparing antibodies PCTA-1 knock out animals will recognize all or most of the exposed regions of a PCTA-1 protein as foreign antigens, and therefore produce antibodies with a wider array of PCTA-1 epitopes Moreover, smaller polypeptides with only 10 to 30 ammo acids may be useful m obtaining specific binding to any one of the PCTA-1 proteins In addition, the humoral immune system of animals which produce a species of PCTA-1 that resembles the antigenic sequence will preferentially recognize the differences between the animal's native PCTA-1 species and the antigen sequence, and produce antibodies to these unique sites in the antigen sequence Such a technique will be particularly useful m obtaining antibodies that specifically bind to any one of the PCTA-1 proteins Antibody preparations prepared according to either protocol are useful m quantitative immunoassays which determine concentrations of antigen-bearing substances in biological samples, they are also used semi -quantitatively or qualitatively to identify the presence of antigen m a biological sample The antibodies may also be used in therapeutic compositions for killing cells expressing the protein or reducing the levels ofthe protein in the body The antibodies ofthe invention may be labeled by any one ofthe radioactive, fluorescent or enzymatic labels known m the art Consequently, the invention is also directed to a method for detecting specifically the presence of a PCTA-1 polypeptide according to the invention m a biological sample, said method compnsing the following steps a) bnngmg into contact the biological sample with a polyclonal or monoclonal antibody that specifically binds a PCTA-1 polypeptide compnsing an amino acid sequence selected from the group consisting of SEQ ED Nos 5, 6, 7, 9, or to a peptide fragment or vanant thereof, and b) detecting the antigen-antibody complex formed. The invention also concerns a diagnostic kit for detecting in vitro the presence of a PCTA-1 polypeptide according to the present invention in a biological sample, wherein said kit comprises * a) a polyclonal or monoclonal antibody that specifically binds a PCTA-1 polypeptide comprising an ammo acid sequence selected from the group consisting of SEQ TD Nos 5, 6, 7, 9, or to a peptide fragment or variant thereof, optionally labeled, b) a reagent allowing the detection ofthe antigen-antibody complexes formed, said reagent carrying optionally a label, or being able to be recognized itself by a labeled reagent, more particularly in the case when the above-mentioned monoclonal or polyclonal antibody is not labeled by itself. PCTA-1 -Related Biallelic markers Advantages Of The Biallelic Markers Of The Present Invention The PCTA- 1 -related biallelic markers of the present invention offer a number of important advantages over other genetic markers such as RFLP (Restriction fragment length polymoφhism) and VNTR (Vanable Number of Tandem Repeats) markers The first generation of markers, were RFLPs, which are vaπations that modify the length of a restriction fragment. But methods used to identify and to type RFLPs are relatively wasteful of materials, effort, and time. The second generation of genetic markers were VNTRs, which can be categonzed as either mmisatellites or microsatelhtes Mmisatellites are tandemly repeated DNA sequences present in units of 5-50 repeats which are distributed along regions ofthe human chromosomes ranging from 0.1 to 20 kilobases in length Since they present many possible alleles, their informative content is very high. Mmisatellites are scored by performing Southern blots to identify the number of tandem repeats present a nucleic acid sample from the individual being 4 tested. However, there are only 10 potential VNTRs that can be typed by Southern blotting Moreover, both RFLP and VNTR markers are costly and time-consuming to develop and assay m large numbers. Single nucleotide polymoφhism or biallelic markers can be used in the same manner as RFLPs and VNTRs but offer several advantages. SNP are densely spaced m the human genome and represent the most frequent type of variation. An estimated number of more than 10 7 sites are scattered along the 3xl0 9 base pairs of the human genome. Therefore, SNP occur at a greater frequency and with greater uniformity than RFLP or VNTR markers which means that there is a greater probability that such a marker will be found in close proximity to a genetic locus of interest SNP are less variable than VNTR markers but are mutationally more stable. Also, the different forms of a characteπzed single nucleotide polymoφhism, such as the biallelic markers ofthe present invention, are often easier to distinguish and can therefore be typed easily on a routine basis. Biallelic markers have single nucleotide based alleles and they have only two common alleles, which allows highly parallel detection and automated sconng. The biallelic markers of the present invention offer the possibility of rapid, high throughput genotypmg of a large number of individuals. Biallelic markers are densely spaced in the genome, sufficiently informative and can be assayed in large numbers. The combined effects of these advantages make biallelic markers extremely valuable m genetic studies. Biallelic markers can be used in linkage studies in families, in allele sharing methods, in linkage disequihbnum studies in populations, in association studies of case-control populations or of trait positive and trait negative populations An important aspect of the present invention is that biallelic markers allow association studies to be performed to identify genes involved in complex traits Association studies examine the frequency of marker alleles in unrelated case- and control-populations and are generally employed in the detection of polygemc or sporadic traits Association studies may be conducted withm the general population and are not limited to studies performed on related individuals in affected families (linkage studies) Biallelic markers in different genes can be screened in parallel for direct association with disease or response to a treatment. This multiple gene approach is a powerful tool for a vaπety of human genetic studies as it provides the necessary statistical power to examine the synergistic effect of multiple genetic factors on a particular phenotype, drug response, sporadic trait, or disease state with a complex genetic etiology. PCT^-i-Related Biallelic Markers And Polynucleotides Related Thereto The invention also concerns a punfied and/or isolated PCTA-1 -related biallelic marker located in the sequence ofthe PCTA-1 gene, preferably a biallelic marker comprising an allele associated with prostate cancer, with an early onset of prostate cancer, with a response to a prophylactic or therapeutic agent administered for cancer treatment, particularly prostate cancer, with the level of aggressiveness of prostate cancer tumors, with a modified or forthcoming expression of the PCTA-1 gene, with a modified or forthcoming production of the PCTA-1 protein, or with the production of a modified PCTA-1 protein. The term PCTA-1 -related biallelic marker includes the biallelic markers designated Al to A125 The invention also concerns sets of these biallelic markers. 125 biallelic markers were identified They include 3 deletions, 6 insertions and 2 vaπable motifs 40 biallelic markers, namely A45, A54 to A56, A59 to A61, A75, A76, A85, A93 to A122, were located in exomc region. 39 biallelic markers, namely A44, A46 to A53, A57 to A58, A62 to A74, A77 to A84, A86 to A92, were localized m mtromc region ofthe PCTA-1 gene 3 biallelic markers A123, A124 and A125 were in the 3' regulatory region 43 biallelic markers, namely Al to A43, were located in the 5' regulatory region. More particularly, 16 of them, namely A28 to A43, were in the promoter of the PCTA-1 gene Among the exonic biallelic markers, 6 of them change the amino acid sequence of a PCTA-1 protein First, the biallelic marker A54 encodes either a residue tyrosine or phenylalanine. The biallelic marker A56 encodes either a residue cysteine or argmme The marker A60 encodes either a residue valme or methionine. The marker A75 encodes either a residue aspartic acid or tyrosine. The marker A76 encodes either a leucine residue or a STOP Finally, the biallelic marker A85 encodes either a residue serine or argmme The invention also relates to a purified and/or isolated nucleotide sequence comprising a polymoφhic base of a PC ^-7-related biallelic marker, preferably of a biallelic marker selected from the group consisting of Al to A 125, and the complements thereof The sequence has between 8 and 1000 nucleotides m length, and preferably compπses at least 8, 10, 12, 15, 18, 20, 25, 35, 40, 50, 60, 70, 80, 100, 250, 500 or 1000 contiguous nucleotides, to the extent that such lengths are consistent with the specific sequence, of a nucleotide sequence selected from the group consisting of SEQ TD Nos 1, 2, 3, 4, or a variant thereof or a complementary sequence thereto These nucleotide sequences comprise the polymoφhic base of either allele 1 or allele 2 of the considered biallelic marker. Optionally, said biallelic marker may be withm 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, or 1 nucleotides ofthe center of said polynucleotide or at the center of said polynucleotide Optionally, the 3' end of said contiguous span may be present at the 3' end of said polynucleotide. Optionally, biallelic marker may be present at the 3' end of said polynucleotide. Optionally, the 3' end of said polynucleotide may be located withm or at least 2, 4, 6, 8, 10, 12, 15, 18, 20, 25, 50, 100, 250, 500, or 1000 nucleotides upstream of a PCTA-1 -related biallelic marker in said sequence. Optionally, the 3' end of said polynucleotide may be located 1 nucleotide upstream of a PCTA-1 -related biallelic marker in said sequence. Optionally, said polynucleotide may further comprise a label Optionally, said polynucleotide can be attached to solid support. In a further embodiment, the polynucleotides defined above can be used alone or in any combination. In a preferred embodiment, the sequences comprising a polymoφhic base of one ofthe biallelic markers listed in Table 2 are selected from the group consisting ofthe nucleotide sequences that have a contiguous span of, that consist of, that are comprised in, or that comprises a polynucleotide having one of the sequences set forth as the amplicons listed in Table 1 or a vanant thereof or a complementary sequence thereto. The invention further concerns a nucleic acid encoding a PCTA-1 protein, wherein said nucleic acid compπses a polymoφhic base of a biallelic marker selected from the group consisting of Al to A125 and the complements thereof The invention also relates to a purified and/or isolated nucleotide sequence comprising a sequence defining a biallelic marker located m the sequence ofthe PCTA-1 gene. Preferably, the sequences defining a biallelic marker include the polymoφhic base of one ofthe sequences PI to P125 or the complementary sequence thereto. In some embodiments, the sequences defining a biallelic marker comprise one ofthe sequences selected from the group consisting of PI to P125, or a fragment or variant thereof or a complementary sequence thereto, said fragment comprising the polymoφhic base. The invention also concerns a set of the punfied and/or isolated nucleotide sequences defined above More particularly, the set of purified and or isolated nucleotide sequences comprises a group of sequences defining a combination of biallelic markers located in the sequence ofthe PCTA-1 gene, preferably wherein alleles of said biallelic markers or the combinations thereof are associated with prostate cancer, with the level of aggressiveness of prostate cancer tumors, or with a level of expression of the PCTA-1 gene. In a preferred embodiment, the invention relates to a set of purified and/or isolated nucleotide sequences, each sequence comprising a sequence defining a biallelic marker located in the sequence of the PCTA-1 gene, wherein the set is characteπzed in that between about 30 and 100 %>, preferably between about 40 and 60 %>, more preferably between 50 and 60 %, ofthe sequences defining a biallelic marker are selected from the group consisting of PI to PI 25, or a fragment or variant thereof or a complementary sequence thereto, said fragment comprising the polymoφhic base More particularly, the invention concerns a set of punfied and/or isolated nucleotide sequences, each sequence comprising a sequence defining a different biallelic marker located m the sequence of the PCTA-1 gene, said biallelic marker being either included in one of the nucleotide sequences of PI to PI 25 or a complementary sequence thereto, or a biallelic marker preferably located m the sequence ofthe PCTA-1 gene, more preferably biallelic markers Al to A125 and the complements thereof, and/or in linkage disequilibrium with one of the markers Al to A125 The invention also relates to a set of at least two, preferably four, five, six, seven, eight or more nucleotide sequences selected from the group consisting of PI to PI 25, or a fragment or variant thereof or a complementary sequence thereto, said fragment comprising the polymoφhic base. The invention further concerns a nucleotide sequence selected from the group consisting of PI to PI 25 or a fragment or a vanant thereof or a complementary sequence thereto, said fragment comprising the polymoφhic base. The invention also encompasses the use of any polynucleotide for, or any polynucleotide for use m, determining the identity of one or more nucleotides at a PCTA-1 -related biallelic marker. In addition, the polynucleotides ofthe invention for use in determining the identity of one or more nucleotides at a PCTA- 1 -related biallelic marker encompass polynucleotides with any further limitation descnbed in this disclosure, or those following, specified alone or in any combination Optionally, wherein said PCTA-1 -related biallelic marker is selected from the group consisting of Al to A 125, and the complements thereof, or optionally the biallelic markers in linkage disequilibrium therewith, optionally, wherein said PCTA- 1 -related biallelic marker is selected from the group consisting of Al to A44, A46 to A53, A57, A58, A62 to A76, A81, A82, A86 to A91, A107, Al 18, and A123 to A125, and the complements thereof, or optionally the biallelic markers m linkage disequihbnum therewith, optionally, wherein said PCTA- 1 -related biallelic marker is selected from the group consisting of A45, A54, A60, A61, A77 to A80, A83 to A85, A93, A102 to A106, A109, Al 10, Al 14, and A122, and the complements thereof, or optionally the biallelic markers in linkage disequilibrium therewith, optionally, wherein said PCTA- 1 -related biallelic marker is selected from the group consisting of A55, A56, A59, A92, A94 to A101, A108, Al 11 to Al 13, Al 15 to Al 17, and Al 19 to A121, and the complements thereof, or optionally the biallelic markers m linkage disequilibrium therewith, Optionally, said polynucleotide may comprise a sequence disclosed m the present specification, Optionally, said polynucleotide may consist of, or consist essentially of any polynucleotide described in the present specification, Optionally, said determining may be performed m a hybridization assay, a sequencing assay, a microsequencmg assay, or an enzyme-based mismatch detection assay, A preferred polynucleotide may be used in a hybridization assay for determining the identity ofthe nucleotide at a PC7 -f-7-related biallelic marker Another preferred polynucleotide may be used in a sequencing or microsequencmg assay for determining the identity ofthe nucleotide at a PCTA- 1 -related biallelic marker A third preferred polynucleotide may be used in an enzyme-based mismatch detection assay for determining the identity of the nucleotide at a PCTA- 1 -related biallelic marker A fourth preferred polynucleotide may be used in amplifying a segment of polynucleotides comprising a PCTA- 1 -related biallelic marker Optionally, any of the polynucleotides descnbed above may be attached to a solid support, array, or addressable array, Optionally, said polynucleotide may be labeled Additionally, the invention encompasses the use of any polynucleotide for, or any polynucleotide for use in, amplifying a segment of nucleotides comprising a PCTA-1 -related biallelic marker In addition, the polynucleotides of the invention for use in amplifying a segment of nucleotides comprising a PCTA-1 -related biallelic marker encompass polynucleotides with any further limitation described m this disclosure, or those following, specified alone or m any combination Optionally, wherein said PCTA- 1 -related biallelic marker is selected from the group consisting of Al to A 125, and the complements thereof, or optionally the biallelic markers in linkage disequihbnum therewith, optionally, wherein said PCTA- 1 -related biallelic marker is selected from the group consisting of Al to A44, A46 to A53, A57, A58, A62 to A76, A81, A82, A86 to A91 , A107, Al 18, and A123 to A125, and the complements thereof, or optionally the biallelic markers in linkage disequihbnum therewith, optionally, wherein said PCTA-1 -related biallelic marker is selected from the group consisting of A45, A54, A60, A61, A77 to A80, A83 to A85, A93, A102 to A106, A109, Al 10, Al 14, and A122, and the complements thereof, or optionally the biallelic markers in linkage disequihbnum therewith; optionally, wherein said PCTA- 7-related biallelic marker is selected from the group consisting of A55, A56, A59, A92, A94 to A101, A108, Al 11 to Al 13, Al 15 to Al 17, and Al 19 to A121, and the complements thereof, or optionally the biallelic markers in linkage disequihbnum therewith; Optionally, said polynucleotide may comprise a sequence disclosed in the present specification; Optionally, said polynucleotide may consist of, or consist essentially of any polynucleotide described in the present specification; Optionally, said amplifying may be performed by a PCR or LCR. Optionally, said polynucleotide may be attached to a solid support, array, or addressable array. Optionally, said polynucleotide may be labeled. The pnmers for amplification or sequencing reaction of a polynucleotide comprising a biallelic marker of the invention may be designed from the disclosed sequences for any method known in the art. A preferred set of primers are fashioned such that the 3' end of the contiguous span of identity with a sequence selected from the group consisting of SEQ TD Nos 1, 2, 3, 4 or a sequence complementary thereto or a variant thereof is present at the 3' end ofthe pnmer Such a configuration allows the 3' end ofthe primer to hybridize to a selected nucleic acid sequence and dramatically increases the efficiency of the pnmer for amplification or sequencing reactions. Allele specific primers may be designed such that a polymoφhic base of a biallelic marker is at the 3' end of the contiguous span and the contiguous span is present at the 3' end of the pnmer. Such allele specific primers tend to selectively prime an amplification or sequencing reaction so long as they are used with a nucleic acid sample that contains one of the two alleles present at a biallelic marker The 3' end of the primer ofthe invention may be located withm or at least 2, 4, 6, 8, 10, 12, 15, 18, 20, 25, 50, 100, 250, 500, or 1000 nucleotides upstream of a P 7^- -related biallelic marker in said sequence or at any other location which is appropriate for their intended use in sequencing. amplification or the location of novel sequences or markers. Thus, another set of preferred amplification primers comprise an isolated polynucleotide consisting essentially of a contiguous span of 8 to 50 nucleotides in a sequence selected from the group consisting of SEQ ED Nos 1, 2, 3, 4 or a sequence complementary thereto or a variant thereof, wherein the 3 ' end of said contiguous span is located at the 3 'end of said polynucleotide, and wherein the 3 'end of said polynucleotide is located upstream of a C7^-7-related biallelic marker in said sequence. Preferably, those amplification primers comprise a sequence selected from the group consisting ofthe sequences Bl to B47 and CI to C47. Primers with their 3' ends located 1 nucleotide upstream of a biallelic marker oi PCTA-1 have a special utility as microsequencmg assays. Prefeπed microsequencmg primers are described in Table 4. Optionally, wherein said PCTA- 1 -related biallelic marker is selected from the group consisting of Al to A125, and the complements thereof, or optionally the biallelic markers in linkage disequihbnum therewith; optionally, wherein said PCTA- 1 -related biallelic marker is selected from the group consisting of Al to A44, A46 to A53, A57, A58, A62 to A76, A81, A82, A86 to A91, A107, Al 18, and A123 to A125, and the complements thereof, or optionally the biallelic markers m linkage disequilibrium therewith, optionally, wherein said PCTA- 1 -related biallelic marker is selected from the group consisting of A45, A54, A60, A61, A77 to A80, A83 to A85, A93, A102 to A106, A109, Al 10, Al 14, and A122, and the complements thereof, or optionally the biallelic markers in linkage disequilibrium therewith, optionally, wherein said PCTA- 7-related biallelic marker is selected from the group consisting of A55, A56, A59, A92, A94 to A101, A108, Al 11 to Al 13, Al 15 to Al 17, and Al 19 to A121, and the complements thereof, or optionally the biallelic markers m linkage disequihbnum therewith, Optionally, microsequencmg primers are selected from the group consisting of the nucleotide sequences DI to D125 and El to El 25 More preferred microsequencmg primers are selected from the group consisting of the nucleotides sequences D15, D24, D30, D34, D36, D38, D41, D44, D50, D53, D54, D56, D57, D59, D76, D85, D93, D108, DI 11, DI 15, D124, El 1, E14, E22, E25, E26, E35, E42, E52, E53, E55, E56, E60, E61, E64, E73, E75, E93, E96 The probes of the present invention may be designed from the disclosed sequences for any method known m the art, particularly methods which allow for testing if a marker disclosed herein is present A preferred set of probes may be designed for use in the hybridization assays of the invention in any manner known in the art such that they selectively bind to one allele of a biallelic marker, but not the other under any particular set of assay conditions Preferred hybndization probes comprise the polymoφhic base of either allele 1 or allele 2 of the considered biallelic marker Optionally, said biallelic marker may be withm 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, or 1 nucleotides ofthe center ofthe hybridization probe or at the center of said probe In a preferred embodiment, the probes are selected m the group consisting of the sequences PI to P125 and the complementary sequence thereto It should be noted that the polynucleotides of the present invention are not limited to having the exact flanking sequences surrounding the polymoφhic bases which are enumerated in Sequence Listing Rather, it will be appreciated that the flanking sequences surrounding the biallelic markers may be lengthened or shortened to any extent compatible with their intended use and the present invention specifically contemplates such sequences The flanking regions outside of the contiguous span need not be homologous to native flanking sequences which actually occur m human subjects The addition of any nucleotide sequence which is compatible with the nucleotides intended use is specifically contemplated Primers and probes may be labeled or immobilized on a solid support as described in " Oligonucleotide probes and primers" The polynucleotides of the invention which are attached to a solid support encompass polynucleotides with any further limitation descnbed in this disclosure, or those following, specified alone or m any combination Optionally, said polynucleotides may be specified as attached individually or m groups of at least 2, 5, 8, 10, 12, 15, 20, or 25 distinct polynucleotides ofthe invention to a single solid support. Optionally, polynucleotides other than those ofthe invention may attached to the same solid support as polynucleotides of the invention. Optionally, when multiple polynucleotides are attached to a solid support they may be attached at random locations, or in an ordered array. Optionally, said ordered array may be addressable The present invention also encompasses diagnostic kits comprising one or more polynucleotides ofthe invention with a portion or all of the necessary reagents and instructions for genotypmg a test subject by determining the identity of a nucleotide at a PCTA-1 -related biallelic marker. The polynucleotides of a kit may optionally be attached to a solid support, or be part of an array or addressable array of polynucleotides. The kit may provide for the determination of the identity ofthe nucleotide at a marker position by any method known in the art including, but not limited to, a sequencing assay method, a microsequencmg assay method, a hybndization assay method, or an enzyme-based mismatch detection assay method. Methods For DeNovo Identification Of Biallelic Markers Any of a variety of methods can be used to screen a genomic fragment for single nucleotide polymoφhisms such as differential hybndization with oligonucleotide probes, detection of changes in the mobility measured by gel electrophoresis or direct sequencing ofthe amplified nucleic acid A preferred method for identifying biallelic markers involves comparative sequencing of genomic DNA fragments from an appropnate number of unrelated individuals In a first embodiment, DNA samples from unrelated individuals are pooled together, following which the genomic DNA of interest is amplified and sequenced. The nucleotide sequences thus obtained are then analyzed to identify significant polymoφhisms. One ofthe major advantages of this method resides in the fact that the pooling of the DNA samples substantially reduces the number of DNA amplification reactions and sequencing reactions, which must be carried out. Moreover, this method is sufficiently sensitive so that a biallelic marker obtained thereby usually demonstrates a sufficient frequency of its less common allele to be useful in conducting association studies. In a second embodiment, the DNA samples are not pooled and are therefore amplified and sequenced individually. This method is usually preferred when biallelic markers need to be identified in order to perform association studies within candidate genes. Preferably, highly relevant gene regions such as promoter regions or exon regions may be screened for biallelic markers A biallelic marker obtained using this method may show a lower degree of mformativeness for conducting association studies, e.g. if the frequency of its less frequent allele may be less than about 10%. Such a biallelic marker will, however, be sufficiently informative to conduct association studies and it will further be appreciated that including less informative biallelic markers in the genetic analysis studies ofthe present invention, may allow in some cases the direct identification of causal mutations, which may, depending on their penetrance, be rare mutations. The following is a descnption ofthe various parameters of a preferred method used by the inventors for the identification ofthe biallelic markers of the present invention. Genomic DNA Samples The genomic DNA samples from which the biallelic markers of the present invention are generated are preferably obtained from unrelated individuals corresponding to a heterogeneous population of known ethnic background. The number of individuals from whom DNA samples are obtained can vary substantially, preferably from about 10 to about 1000, preferably from about 50 to about 200 individuals. It is usually preferred to collect DNA samples from at least about 100 individuals m order to have sufficient polymoφhic diversity in a given population to identify as many markers as possible and to generate statistically significant results. As for the source of the genomic DNA to be subjected to analysis, any test sample can be foreseen without any particular limitation. These test samples include biological samples, which can be tested by the methods ofthe present invention descnbed herein, and include human and animal body fluids such as whole blood, serum, plasma, cerebrospinal fluid, unne, lymph fluids, and various external secretions ofthe respiratory, intestinal and genitourinary tracts, tears, saliva, milk, white blood cells, myelomas and the like; biological fluids such as cell culture supernatants; fixed tissue specimens including tumor and non-tumor tissue and lymph node tissues; bone marrow aspirates and fixed cell specimens. The preferred source of genomic DNA used in the present invention is from peripheral venous blood of each donor. Techniques to prepare genomic DNA from biological samples are well known to the skilled technician. Details of a prefeπed embodiment are provided in Example 1. The person skilled m the art can choose to amplify pooled or unpooled DNA samples. DNA Amplification The identification of biallelic markers in a sample of genomic DNA may be facilitated through the use of DNA amplification methods. DNA samples can be pooled or unpooled for the amplification step. DNA amplification techniques are well known to those skilled in the art. Amplification techniques that can be used in the context of the present invention include, but are not limited to, the hgase chain reaction (LCR) described in EP-A- 320 308, WO 9320227 and EP-A-439 182, the polymerase chain reaction (PCR, RT-PCR) and techniques such as the nucleic acid sequence based amplification (NASBA) descnbed in Guatelh J.C, et al.(1990) and m Compton J.(1991), Q-beta amplification as descnbed in European Patent Application No 4544610, strand displacement amplification as descnbed in Walker et al.(1996) and EP A 684 315 and, target mediated amplification as described m PCT Publication WO 9322461. LCR and Gap LCR are exponential amplification techniques, both depend on DNA hgase to join adjacent primers annealed to a DNA molecule. En Ligase Chain Reaction (LCR), probe pairs are used which include two primary (first and second) and two secondary (third and fourth) probes, all of which are employed in molar excess to target. The first probe hybridizes to a first segment of the target strand and the second probe hybπdizes to a second segment of the target strand, the first and second segments being contiguous so that the primary probes abut one another in 5' phosphate- 3 'hydroxyl relationship, and so that a ligase can covalently fuse or ligate the two probes into a fused product. In addition, a third (secondary) probe can hybndize to a portion of the first probe and a fourth (secondary) probe can hybπdize to a portion ofthe second probe m a similar abutting fashion. Of course, if the target is initially double stranded, the secondary probes also will hybπdize to the target complement m the first instance. Once the hgated strand of pnmary probes is separated from the target strand, it will hybndize with the third and fourth probes, which can be hgated to form a complementary, secondary hgated product. It is important to realize that the hgated products are functionally equivalent to either the target or its complement. By repeated cycles of hybridization and hgation, amplification of the target sequence is achieved. A method for multiplex LCR has also been described (WO 9320227). Gap LCR (GLCR) is a version of LCR where the probes are not adjacent but are separated by 2 to 3 bases. For amplification of mRNAs. it is withm the scope of the present invention to reverse transcribe mRNA into cDNA followed by polymerase chain reaction (RT-PCR); or, to use a single enzyme for both steps as descnbed in U.S. Patent No. 5,322,770 or, to use Asymmetric Gap LCR (RT-AGLCR) as described by Marshall et al.(1994). AGLCR is a modification of GLCR that allows the amplification of RNA. The PCR technology is the preferred amplification technique used in the present invention. A variety of PCR techniques are familiar to those skilled in the art. For a review of PCR technology, see White (1997) and the publication entitled "PCR Methods and Applications" (1991, Cold Spnng Harbor Laboratory Press). In each of these PCR procedures, PCR pnmers on either side ofthe nucleic acid sequences to be amplified are added to a suitably prepared nucleic acid sample along with dNTPs and a thermostable polymerase such as Taq polymerase, Pfu polymerase, or Vent polymerase. The nucleic acid in the sample is denatured and the PCR primers are specifically hybridized to complementary nucleic acid sequences m the sample. The hybridized primers are extended. Thereafter, another cycle of denaturation, hybridization, and extension is initiated. The cycles are repeated multiple times to produce an amplified fragment containing the nucleic acid sequence between the pnmer sites. PCR has further been described in several patents including US Patents 4,683,195; 4,683,202; and 4,965,188. The PCR technology is the preferred amplification technique used to identify new biallelic markers. A typical example of a PCR reaction suitable for the puφoses of the present invention is provided m Example 2. One ofthe aspects ofthe present invention is a method for the amplification ofthe human PCTA-1 gene, particularly of a fragment ofthe genomic sequence of SEQ ED No 1 or of the cDNA sequences of SEQ ED Nos 2, 3, 4, 8, or a fragment or a variant thereof in a test sample, preferably using the PCR technology This method comprises the steps of a) contacting a test sample with amplification reaction reagents comprising a pair of amplification primers as described above and located on either side of the polynucleotide region to be amplified, and b) optionally, detecting the amplification products The invention also concerns a kit for the amplification oi a PCTA-1 gene sequence, particularly of a portion ofthe genomic sequence of SEQ TD No 1 or ofthe cDNA sequences of SEQ ED Nos 2, 3 4, 9, or a variant thereof in a test sample, wherein said kit comprises a) a pair of oligonucleotide pnmers located on either side of the PCTA-1 region to be amplified, b) optionally, the reagents necessary for performing the amplification reaction In one embodiment of the above amplification method and kit, the amplification product is detected by hybridization with a labeled probe having a sequence which is complementary to the amplified region In another embodiment ofthe above amplification method and kit, primers comprise a sequence which is selected from the group consisting ofthe nucleotide sequences of Bl to B47, CI to C47, DI to D125, and El to E125 In a first embodiment ofthe present invention, biallelic markers are identified using genomic sequence information generated by the inventors Sequenced genomic DNA fragments are used to design pnmers for the amplification of 500 bp fragments These 500 bp fragments are amplified from genomic DNA and are scanned for biallelic markers Pnmers may be designed using the OSP software (Hilher L and Green P , 1991) All primers may contain, upstream ofthe specific target bases, a common oligonucleotide tail that serves as a sequencing pnmer Those skilled m the art are familiar with primer extensions, which can be used for these puφoses Preferred primers, useful for the amplification of genomic sequences encoding the candidate genes, focus on promoters, exons and splice sites of the genes A biallelic marker presents a higher probability to be an eventual causal mutation if it is located in these functional regions of the gene Preferred amplification pnmers of the invention include the nucleotide sequences Bl to B47 and CI to C47, detailed further m Example 2, Table 1 Sequencing Of Amplified Genomic DNA And Identification Of Single Nucleotide Polymorphisms The amplification products generated as descnbed above, are then sequenced using any method known and available to the skilled technician Methods for sequencing DNA using either the dideoxy-mediated method (Sanger method) or the Maxam-Gilbert method are widely known to those of ordinary skill m the art Such methods are for example disclosed m Sambrook et al (1989) Alternative approaches include hybridization to high-density DNA probe arrays as described in Chee et al.(1996). Preferably, the amplified DNA is subjected to automated dideoxy terminator sequencing reactions using a dye-primer cycle sequencing protocol. The products of the sequencing reactions are run on sequencing gels and the sequences are determined using gel image analysis The polymoφhism search is based on the presence of superimposed peaks in the electrophoresis pattern resulting from different bases occurnng at the same position. Because each dideoxy terminator is labeled with a different fluorescent molecule, the two peaks corresponding to a biallelic site present distinct colors corresponding to two different nucleotides at the same position on the sequence However, the presence of two peaks can be an artifact due to background noise. To exclude such an artifact, the two DNA strands are sequenced and a companson between the peaks is carried out. In order to be registered as a polymoφhic sequence, the polymoφhism has to be detected on both strands The above procedure permits those amplification products, which contain biallelic markers to be identified. The detection limit for the frequency of biallelic polymoφhisms detected by sequencing pools of 100 individuals is approximately 0.1 for the minor allele, as verified by sequencing pools of known allelic frequencies However, more than 90%> ofthe biallelic polymoφhisms detected by the pooling method have a frequency for the minor allele higher than 0.25. Therefore, the biallelic markers selected by this method have a frequency of at least 0.1 for the minor allele and less than 0.9 for the major allele. Preferably at least 0.2 for the minor allele and less than 0 8 for the major allele, more preferably at least 0.3 for the minor allele and less than 0.7 for the major allele, thus a heterozygosity rate higher than 0.18, preferably higher than 0 32, more preferably higher than 0.42. In another embodiment, biallelic markers are detected by sequencing individual DNA samples, the frequency of the minor allele of such a biallelic marker may be less than 0.1. Validation Of The Biallelic Markers Of The Present Invention The polymoφhisms are evaluated for their usefulness as genetic markers by validating that both alleles are present in a population Validation ofthe biallelic markers is accomplished by genotypmg a group of individuals by a method ofthe invention and demonstrating that both alleles are present. Microsequencmg is a preferred method of genotypmg alleles. The validation by genotypmg step may be performed on individual samples derived from each individual in the group or by genotypmg a pooled sample deπved from more than one individual. The group can be as small as one individual if that individual is heterozygous for the allele in question Preferably the group contains at least three individuals, more preferably the group contains five or six individuals, so that a single validation test will be more likely to result in the validation of more ofthe biallelic markers that are being tested. It should be noted, however, that when the validation test is performed on a small group it may result in a false negative result if as a result of sampling error none ofthe individuals tested carnes one ofthe two alleles Thus, the validation process is less useful in demonstrating that a particular initial result is an artifact, than it is at demonstrating that there is a bonafide biallelic marker at a particular position m a sequence All of the genotypmg, haplotyping, association, and interaction study methods ofthe invention may optionally be performed solely with validated biallelic markers. Evaluation Of The Frequency Of The Biallelic Markers Of The Present Invention The validated biallelic markers are further evaluated for their usefulness as genetic markers by determining the frequency ofthe least common allele at the biallelic marker site. The higher the frequency ofthe less common allele the greater the usefulness ofthe biallelic marker is association and interaction studies. The determination of the least common allele is accomplished by genotypmg a group of individuals by a method ofthe invention and demonstrating that both alleles are present. This determination of frequency by genotypmg step may be performed on individual samples derived from each individual in the group or by genotypmg a pooled sample denved from more than one individual. The group must be large enough to be representative ofthe population as a whole. Preferably the group contains at least 20 individuals, more preferably the group contains at least 50 individuals, most preferably the group contains at least 100 individuals. Of course the larger the group the greater the accuracy ofthe frequency determination because of reduced sampling error. For an indication ofthe frequency for the less common allele of a particular biallelic marker of the invention see Table 2. A biallelic marker wherein the frequency ofthe less common allele is 30%> or more is termed a "high quality biallelic marker." All of the genotypmg, haplotyping, association, and interaction study methods ofthe invention may optionally be performed solely with high quality biallelic markers. Methods For Genotvping An Individual For Biallelic Markers Methods are provided to genotype a biological sample for one or more biallelic markers of the present invention, all of which may be performed in vitro Such methods of genotypmg compnse determining the identity of a nucleotide at a PCTA-1 biallelic marker site by any method known in the art. These methods find use m genotypmg case-control populations in association studies as well as individuals m the context of detection of alleles of biallelic markers which are known to be associated with a given trait, in which case both copies of the biallelic marker present in individual's genome are determined so that an individual may be classified as homozygous or heterozygous for a particular allele These genotypmg methods can be performed on nucleic acid samples denved from a single individual or pooled DNA samples Genotypmg can be performed using similar methods as those descnbed above for the identification ofthe biallelic markers, or using other genotypmg methods such as those further described below In preferred embodiments, the comparison of sequences of amplified genomic fragments from different individuals is used to identify new biallelic markers whereas microsequencmg is used for genotypmg known biallelic markers in diagnostic and association study applications In one embodiment the invention encompasses methods of genotypmg compπsmg determining the identity of a nucleotide at a PCTA- 1 -related biallelic marker or the complement thereof in a biological sample, optionally, wherein said CΣ4-7-related biallelic marker is selected from the group consisting of Al to A 125, and the complements thereof, or optionally the biallelic markers m linkage disequihbnum therewith, optionally, wherein said PCZ^-7-related biallelic marker is selected from the group consisting of Al to A44, A46 to A53, A57, A58, A62 to A76, A81, A82, A86 to A91 , A107, Al 18, and A123 to A125, and the complements thereof, or optionally the biallelic markers in linkage disequilibrium therewith, optionally, wherein said PCTA-1 -related biallelic marker is selected from the group consisting of A45, A54, A60, A61, A77 to A80, A83 to A85, A93, A102 to A106, A109, Al 10, Al 14, and A122, and the complements thereof, or optionally the biallelic markers in linkage disequilibrium therewith, optionally, wherein said PCTA- 7-related biallelic marker is selected from the group consisting of A55, A56, A59, A92, A94 to A101, A108, Al l l to A113, A115 to Al l 7, and A119 to A121, and the complements thereof, or optionally the biallelic markers in linkage disequihbnum therewith, optionally, wherein said biological sample is denved from a single subject, optionally, wherein the identity of he nucleotides at said biallelic marker is determined for both copies of said biallelic marker present in said individual's genome, optionally, wherein said biological sample is derived from multiple subjects, Optionally, the genotypmg methods ofthe invention encompass methods with any further limitation described in this disclosure, or those following, specified alone or in any combination, Optionally, said method is performed in vitro, optionally, further comprising amplifying a portion of said sequence comprising the biallelic marker prior to said determining step, Optionally, wherein said amplifying is performed by PCR, LCR, or replication of a recombinant vector comprising an origin of replication and said fragment in a host cell, optionally, wherein said determining is performed by a hybridization assay, a sequencing assay, a microsequencmg assay, or an enzyme-based mismatch detection assay Source of Nucleic Acids for genotyping Any source of nucleic acids, in purified or non-punfied form, can be utilized as the starting nucleic acid, provided it contains or is suspected of containing the specific nucleic acid sequence desired DNA or RNA may be extracted from cells, tissues, body fluids and the like as described above While nucleic acids for use in the genotyping methods ofthe invention can be denved from any mammalian source, the test subjects and individuals from which nucleic acid samples are taken are generally understood to be human Amplification Of DNA Fragments Comprising Biallelic Markers Methods and polynucleotides are provided to amplify a segment of nucleotides comprising one or more biallelic marker ofthe present invention. It will be appreciated that amplification of DNA fragments comprising biallelic markers may be used in various methods and for vaπous puφoses and is not restricted to genotyping Nevertheless, many genotyping methods, although not all, require the previous amplification of the DNA region carrying the biallelic marker of interest. Such methods specifically increase the concentration or total number of sequences that span the biallelic marker or include that site and sequences located either distal or proximal to it. Diagnostic assays may also rely on amplification of DNA segments carrying a biallelic marker ofthe present invention. Amplification of DNA may be achieved by any method known in the art. Amplification techniques are described above in the section entitled, "DNA amplification " The invention also concerns a method for the amplification oi a PCTA-1 gene region, preferably containing at least one ofthe polymoφhic bases identified m the context of the present invention, or a fragment or variant thereof, m a test sample. The method comprises the step of contacting a test sample suspected of containing the targeted PCTA-1 gene sequence or a fragment thereof with amplification reaction reagents comprising a pair of amplification primers, preferably located on either side ofthe polymoφhic base. Preferred amplification pnmers consist of Bl to B47 and CI to C47. The method may further comprise the step of detecting the amplification product. For example, the amplification product may be detected using a detection probe that can hybπdize with an internal region of the amplicon sequences. In some embodiments, the polymoφhic base is included in one of the sequences of PI to PI 25, and the complementary sequences thereof. Some of these amplification methods are particularly suited for the detection of single nucleotide polymoφhisms and allow the simultaneous amplification of a target sequence and the identification ofthe polymoφhic nucleotide as it is further descnbed below The identification of biallelic markers as descnbed above allows the design of appropnate ohgonucleotides, which can be used as pnmers to amplify DNA fragments comprising the biallelic markers of the present invention. Amplification can be performed using the primers initially used to discover new biallelic markers which are descnbed herein or any set of primers allowing the amplification of a DNA fragment comprising a biallelic marker ofthe present invention. In some embodiments the present invention provides primers for amplifying a DNA fragment containing one or more biallelic markers of the present invention. Preferred amplification primers are listed in Example 2. It will be appreciated that the pnmers listed are merely exemplary and that any other set of pnmers which produce amplification products containing one or more biallelic markers ofthe present invention are also of use. The spacing ofthe pnmers determines the length of the segment to be amplified. In the context of the present invention, amplified segments carrying biallelic markers can range in size from at least about 25 bp to 35 kbp Amplification fragments from 25-3000 bp are typical, fragments from 50-1000 bp are preferred and fragments from 100-600 bp are highly preferred It will be appreciated that amplification pnmers for the biallelic markers may be any sequence which allow the specific amplification of any DNA fragment carrying the markers. Amplification primers may be labeled or immobilized on a solid support as described in "Oligonucleotide probes and primers". Methods of Genotyping DNA samples for Biallelic Markers Any method known in the art can be used to identify the nucleotide present at a biallelic marker site. Since the biallelic marker allele to be detected has been identified and specified m the present invention, detection will prove simple for one of ordinary skill m the art by employing any of a number of techniques Many genotypmg methods require the previous amplification ofthe DNA region carrying the biallelic marker of interest While the amplification of target or signal is often prefeπed at present, ultrasensitive detection methods which do not require amplification are also encompassed by the present genotyping methods Methods well-known to those skilled in the art that can be used to detect biallelic polymoφhisms include methods such as, conventional dot blot analyzes, single strand conformational polymoφhism analysis (SSCP) descnbed by Oπta et al.(1989), denaturing gradient gel electrophoresis (DGGE), heteroduplex analysis, mismatch cleavage detection, and other conventional techniques as descnbed in Sheffield et al.(1991), White et al.(1992), Grompe et al.(1989 and 1993) Another method for determining the identity ofthe nucleotide present at a particular polymoφhic site employs a specialized exonuclease-resistant nucleotide deπvative as descnbed in US patent 4,656,127 Preferred methods involve directly determining the identity of the nucleotide present at a biallelic marker site by sequencing assay, enzyme-based mismatch detection assay, or hybridization assay. The following is a description of some preferred methods A highly prefeπed method is the microsequencing technique. The term "sequencing" is generally used herein to refer to polymerase extension of duplex primer/template complexes and includes both traditional sequencing and microsequencmg. 1) Sequencing Assays The nucleotide present at a polymoφhic site can be determined by sequencing methods. In a preferred embodiment, DNA samples are subjected to PCR amplification before sequencing as described above. DNA sequencing methods are described in "Sequencing Of Amplified Genomic DNA And Identification Of Single Nucleotide Polymoφhisms". Preferably, the amplified DNA is subjected to automated dideoxy terminator sequencing reactions using a dye-primer cycle sequencing protocol Sequence analysis allows the identification ofthe base present at the biallelic marker site. 2) Microsequencing Assays In microsequencmg methods, the nucleotide at a polymoφhic site in a target DNA is detected by a single nucleotide primer extension reaction. This method involves appropriate microsequencmg primers which, hybndize just upstream ofthe polymoφhic base of interest m the target nucleic acid. A polymerase is used to specifically extend the 3' end ofthe primer with one single ddNTP (chain terminator) complementary to the nucleotide at the polymoφhic site. Next the identity of the mcoφorated nucleotide is determined m any suitable way. Typically, microsequencmg reactions are carried out using fluorescent ddNTPs and the extended microsequencmg primers are analyzed by electrophoresis on ABI 377 sequencing machines to determine the identity of the incoφorated nucleotide as described in EP 412 883, the disclosure of which is incoφorated herein by reference in its entirety. Alternatively capillary electrophoresis can be used in order to process a higher number of assays simultaneously. An example of a typical microsequencmg procedure that can be used in the context of the present invention is provided in Example 4. Different approaches can be used for the labeling and detection of ddNTPs A homogeneous phase detection method based on fluorescence resonance energy transfer has been descnbed by Chen and Kwok (1997) and Chen et al.(1997). In this method, amplified genomic DNA fragments containing polymoφhic sites are incubated with a 5'-fluoresceιn-labeled primer in the presence of allelic dye-labeled dideoxyπbonucleoside tπphosphates and a modified Taq polymerase The dye- labeled pnmer is extended one base by the dye -terminator specific for the allele present on the template. At the end ofthe genotyping reaction, the fluorescence intensities ofthe two dyes in the reaction mixture are analyzed directly without separation or punfication. All these steps can be performed m the same tube and the fluorescence changes can be monitored in real time. Alternatively, the extended pnmer may be analyzed by MALDI-TOF Mass Spectrometry. The base at the polymoφhic site is identified by the mass added onto the microsequencmg primer (see Haff and Smirnov, 1997). Microsequencmg may be achieved by the established microsequencing method or by developments or derivatives thereof. Alternative methods include several solid-phase microsequencing techniques. The basic microsequencing protocol is the same as described previously, except that the method is conducted as a heterogeneous phase assay, m which the pnmer or the target molecule is immobilized or captured onto a solid support. To simplify the pnmer separation and the terminal nucleotide addition analysis, ohgonucleotides are attached to solid supports or are modified in such ways that permit affinity separation as well as polymerase extension. The 5' ends and internal nucleotides of synthetic ohgonucleotides can be modified in a number of different ways to permit different affinity separation approaches, e.g., biotmylation. If a single affinity group is used on the ohgonucleotides, the ohgonucleotides can be separated from the mcoφorated terminator regent. This eliminates the need of physical or size separation More than one oligonucleotide can be separated from the terminator reagent and analyzed simultaneously if more than one affinity group is used. This permits the analysis of several nucleic acid species or more nucleic acid sequence information per extension reaction. The affinity group need not be on the priming oligonucleotide but could alternatively be present on the template. For example, 5 immobilization can be carried out via an interaction between biotinylated DNA and streptavidin- coated microtitration wells or avidm-coated polystyrene particles In the same manner, ohgonucleotides or templates may be attached to a solid support m a high-density format. In such solid phase microsequencing reactions, incoφorated ddNTPs can be radiolabeled (Syvanen, 1994) or linked to fluorescein (Livak and Hamer, 1994). The detection of radiolabeled ddNTPs can be 10 achieved through scmtillation-based techniques. The detection of fluorescem-lmked ddNTPs can be based on the binding of antifluorescem antibody conjugated with alkaline phosphatase, followed by incubation with a chromogenic substrate (such as / •• -nitrophenyl phosphate) Other possible reporter- detection pairs include: ddNTP linked to dimtrophenyl (DNP) and anti-DNP alkaline phosphatase conjugate (Harju et al., 1993) or biotinylated ddNTP and horseradish peroxidase-conjugated 15 streptavidm with o-phenylenediamine as a substrate (WO 92/15712). As yet another alternative solid-phase microsequencmg procedure, Nyren et al.(1993) descnbed a method relying on the detection of DNA polymerase activity by an enzymatic lummometπc inorganic pyrophosphate detection assay (ELE A) Pastmen et al.(1997) describe a method for multiplex detection of single nucleotide 20 polymoφhism in which the solid phase mmisequencmg pnnciple is applied to an oligonucleotide array format. High-density aπays of DNA probes attached to a solid support (DNA chips) are further descnbed below. In one aspect the present invention provides polynucleotides and methods to genotype one or more biallelic markers of the present invention by performing a microsequencmg assay. Preferred 25 microsequencmg primers include the nucleotide sequences DI to D125 and El to E125. More preferred microsequencing primers are selected from the group consisting ofthe nucleotide sequences D15, D24, D30, D34, D36, D38, D41, D44, D50, D53, D54, D56, D57, D59, D76, D85, D93, D108, DI 11, DI 15, D124, El l, E14, E22, E25, E26, E35, E42, E52, E53, E55, E56, E60, E61, E64, E73, E75, E93, E96. It will be appreciated that the microsequencmg primers listed in Example 30 4 are merely exemplary and that, any primer having a 3' end immediately adjacent to the polymoφhic nucleotide may be used. Similarly, it will be appreciated that microsequencing analysis may be performed for any biallelic marker or any combination of biallelic markers of the present invention. One aspect ofthe present invention is a solid support which includes one or more microsequencmg pnmers listed in Example 4, or fragments comprising at least 8, 12, 15, 20, 25, 30, 35 40, or 50 consecutive nucleotides thereof, to the extent that such lengths are consistent with the primer described, and having a 3 ' terminus immediately upstream of the corresponding biallelic marker, for determining the identity of a nucleotide at a biallelic marker site. 3) Mismatch detection assays based on polymerases and ligases In one aspect the present invention provides polynucleotides and methods to determine the allele of one or more biallelic markers ofthe present invention in a biological sample, by mismatch detection assays based on polymerases and/or ligases. These assays are based on the specificity of polymerases and ligases. Polymerization reactions places particularly stnngent requirements on correct base pairing ofthe 3' end ofthe amplification primer and the joining of two ohgonucleotides hybridized to a target DNA sequence is quite sensitive to mismatches close to the hgation site, especially at the 3' end. Methods, primers and various parameters to amplify DNA fragments comprising biallelic markers ofthe present invention are further described above in "Amplification Of DNA Fragments Comprising Biallelic Markers". Allele Specific Amplification Primers Discnmmation between the two alleles of a biallelic marker can also be achieved by allele specific amplification, a selective strategy, whereby one ofthe alleles is amplified without amplification of the other allele. For allele specific amplification, at least one member of the pair of pnmers is sufficiently complementary with a region oi a PCTA-1 gene compnsing the polymoφhic base of a biallelic marker ofthe present invention to hybridize therewith and to initiate the amplification. Such primers are able to discπminate between the two alleles of a biallelic marker. This is accomplished by placing the polymoφhic base at the 3' end of one ofthe amplification primers. Because the extension forms from the 3'end ofthe primer, a mismatch at or near this position has an inhibitory effect on amplification. Therefore, under appropπate amplification conditions, these pnmers only direct amplification on their complementary allele. Determining the precise location ofthe mismatch and the corresponding assay conditions are well withm the ordinary skill m the art. Ligation/ Amplification Based Methods The "Oligonucleotide Ligation Assay" (OLA) uses two ohgonucleotides which are designed to be capable of hybndizmg to abutting sequences of a single strand of a target molecules. One of the ohgonucleotides is biotinylated, and the other is detectably labeled. If the precise complementary sequence is found m a target molecule, the ohgonucleotides will hybridize such that their termini abut, and create a ligation substrate that can be captured and detected. OLA is capable of detecting single nucleotide polymoφhisms and may be advantageously combined with PCR as described by Nickerson et al.(1990). In this method, PCR is used to achieve the exponential amplification of target DNA, which is then detected using OLA. Other amplification methods which are particularly suited for the detection of single nucleotide polymoφhism include LCR (ligase chain reaction), Gap LCR (GLCR) which are described above in "DNA Amplification". LCR uses two pairs of probes to exponentially amplify a specific target. The sequences of each pair of ohgonucleotides, is selected to permit the pair to hybridize to abutting sequences ofthe same strand ofthe target Such hybridization forms a substrate for a template-dependant ligase In accordance with the present invention, LCR can be performed with ohgonucleotides having the proximal and distal sequences of the same strand of a biallelic marker site In one embodiment, either oligonucleotide will be designed to include the biallelic marker site In such an embodiment, the reaction conditions are selected such that the ohgonucleotides can be hgated together only if the target molecule either contains or lacks the specific nucleotide that is complementary to the biallelic marker on the oligonucleotide In an alternative embodiment, the ohgonucleotides will not include the biallelic marker, such that when they hybridize to the target molecule, a "gap" is created as described in WO 90/01069 This gap is then "filled" with complementary dNTPs (as mediated by DNA polymerase), or by an additional pair of ohgonucleotides Thus at the end of each cycle, each single strand has a complement capable of serving as a target duπng the next cycle and exponential allele-specific amplification ofthe desired sequence is obtained Ligase/Polymerase-mediated Genetic Bit Analysis™ is another method for determining the identity of a nucleotide at a preselected site in a nucleic acid molecule (WO 95/21271) This method involves the mcoφoration of a nucleoside tπphosphate that is complementary to the nucleotide present at the preselected site onto the terminus of a pnmer molecule, and their subsequent hgation to a second oligonucleotide The reaction is monitored by detecting a specific label attached to the reaction's solid phase or by detection in solution 4) Hybridization Assay Methods A prefeπed method of determining the identity ofthe nucleotide present at a biallelic marker site involves nucleic acid hybridization The hybridization probes, which can be conveniently used in such reactions, preferably include the probes defined herein Any hybridization assay may be used including Southern hybridization, Northern hybridization, dot blot hybndization and sohd- phase hybridization (see Sambrook et al , 1989) Hybndization refers to the formation of a duplex structure by two single stranded nucleic acids due to complementary base pairing Hybridization can occur between exactly complementary nucleic acid strands or between nucleic acid strands that contain minor regions of mismatch Specific probes can be designed that hybπdize to one form of a biallelic marker and not to the other and therefore are able to discπminate between different allelic forms Allele-specific probes are often used m pairs, one member of a pair showing perfect match to a target sequence containing the original allele and the other showing a perfect match to the target sequence containing the alternative allele Hybridization conditions should be sufficiently stringent that there is a significant difference m hybndization intensity between alleles, and preferably an essentially binary response, whereby a probe hybridizes to only one of the alleles Stnngent, sequence specific hybndization conditions, under which a probe will hybndize only to the exactly complementary target sequence are well known in the art (Sambrook et al., 1989). Stringent conditions are sequence dependent and will be different in different circumstances. Generally, stringent conditions are selected to be about 5°C lower than the thermal melting point (Tm) for the specific sequence at a defined ionic strength and pH. Although such hybridization can be performed in solution, it is prefeπed to employ a sohd- phase hybridization assay. The target DNA comprising a biallelic marker of the present invention may be amplified pπor to the hybndization reaction. The presence of a specific allele in the sample is determined by detecting the presence or the absence of stable hybrid duplexes formed between the probe and the target DNA. The detection of hybrid duplexes can be earned out by a number of methods. Vaπous detection assay formats are well known which utilize detectable labels bound to either the target or the probe to enable detection of the hybrid duplexes. Typically, hybridization duplexes are separated from unhybπdized nucleic acids and the labels bound to the duplexes are then detected. Those skilled in the art will recognize that wash steps may be employed to wash away excess target DNA or probe as well as unbound conjugate. Further, standard heterogeneous assay formats are suitable for detecting the hybrids using the labels present on the primers and probes Two recently developed assays allow hybridization-based allele discrimination with no need for separations or washes (see Landegren U. et al., 1998). The TaqMan assay takes advantage of the 5' nuclease activity of Taq DNA polymerase to digest a DNA probe annealed specifically to the accumulating amplification product TaqMan probes are labeled with a donor-acceptor dye pair that interacts via fluorescence energy transfer Cleavage of the TaqMan probe by the advancing polymerase dunng amplification dissociates the donor dye from the quenching acceptor dye, greatly increasing the donor fluorescence. All reagents necessary to detect two allelic variants can be assembled at the beginning ofthe reaction and the results are monitored in real time (see Livak et al., 1995). In an alternative homogeneous hybridization based procedure, molecular beacons are used for allele discriminations. Molecular beacons are haiφin-shaped oligonucleotide probes that report the presence of specific nucleic acids in homogeneous solutions. When they bind to their targets they undergo a conformational reorganization that restores the fluorescence of an internally quenched fluorophore (Tyagi et al., 1998). The polynucleotides provided herein can be used to produce probes which can be used in hybridization assays for the detection of biallelic marker alleles m biological samples. These probes are charactenzed in that they preferably comprise between 8 and 50 nucleotides, and in that they are sufficiently complementary to a sequence comprising a biallelic marker of the present invention to hybridize thereto and preferably sufficiently specific to be able to discriminate the targeted sequence for only one nucleotide vanation. A particularly prefeπed probe is 25 nucleotides in length. Another particularly preferred probe is 47 nucleotides m length. Preferably the biallelic marker is withm 4 nucleotides ofthe center ofthe polynucleotide probe. In particularly prefeπed probes, the biallelic marker is at the center of said polynucleotide. Prefeπed probes comprise a nucleotide sequence selected from the group consisting of amphcons listed in Table 1 and the sequences complementary thereto, or a fragment thereof, said fragment compnsing at least about 8 consecutive nucleotides, preferably 10, 15, 20, more preferably 25, 30, 40, 47, or 50 consecutive nucleotides and containing a polymoφhic base. Prefeπed probes comprise a nucleotide sequence selected from the group consisting of PI to PI 25 and the sequences complementary thereto. In prefeπed embodiments the polymoφhic base(s) are within 5, 4, 3, 2, 1, nucleotides ofthe center of the said polynucleotide, more preferably at the center of said polynucleotide. Preferably the probes of the present invention are labeled or immobilized on a solid support. Labels and solid supports are further described in "Oligonucleotide Probes and Primers" The probes can be non-extendable as described in "Oligonucleotide Probes and Primers". By assaying the hybridization to an allele specific probe, one can detect the presence or absence of a biallelic marker allele m a given sample High-Throughput parallel hybridization in array format is specifically encompassed within "hybridization assays" and are described below. 5) Hybridization To Addressable Arrays Of Ohgonucleotides Hybridization assays based on oligonucleotide aπays rely on the differences in hybndization stability of short ohgonucleotides to perfectly matched and mismatched target sequence vanants Efficient access to polymoφhism information is obtained through a basic structure comprising high- density aπays of oligonucleotide probes attached to a solid support (e.g., the chip) at selected positions. Each DNA chip can contain thousands to millions of individual synthetic DNA probes aπanged in a gπd-hke pattern and miniaturized to the size of a dime. The chip technology has already been applied with success in numerous cases. For example, the screening of mutations has been undertaken in the BRCA1 gene, in S cerevisiae mutant strains, and m the protease gene of HEV-1 virus (Hacia et al , 1996, Shoemaker et al., 1996; Kozal et al., 1996) Chips of vanous formats for use m detecting biallelic polymoφhisms can be produced on a customized basis by Affymetπx (GeneChip™), Hyseq (HyChip and HyGnostics), and Protogene Laboratories. In general, these methods employ aπays of oligonucleotide probes that are complementary to target nucleic acid sequence segments from an individual which, target sequences include a polymoφhic marker. EP 785280 descπbes a tiling strategy for the detection of single nucleotide polymoφhisms. Briefly, aπays may generally be "tiled" for a large number of specific polymoφhisms By "tiling" is generally meant the synthesis of a defined set of oligonucleotide probes which is made up of a sequence complementary to the target sequence of interest, as well as preselected variations of that sequence, e.g., substitution of one or more given positions with one or more members ofthe basis set of nucleotides. Tiling strategies are further descnbed in PCT application No. WO 95/11995. In a particular aspect, aπays are tiled for a number of specific, identified biallelic marker sequences. In particular, the aπay is tiled to include a number of detection blocks, each detection block being specific for a specific biallelic marker or a set of biallelic markers. For example, a detection block may be tiled to include a number of probes, which span the sequence segment that includes a specific polymoφhism To ensure probes that are complementary to each allele, the probes are synthesized in pairs differing at the biallelic marker. In addition to the probes differing at the polymoφhic base, monosubstituted probes are also generally 5 tiled withm the detection block These monosubstituted probes have bases at and up to a certain number of bases in either direction from the polymoφhism, substituted with the remaining nucleotides (selected from A, T, G, C and U). Typically the probes in a tiled detection block will include substitutions of the sequence positions up to and including those that are 5 bases away from the biallelic marker. The monosubstituted probes provide internal controls for the tiled aπay, to 10 distinguish actual hybridization from arte factual cross-hybridization. Upon completion of hybridization with the target sequence and washing of the aπay, the aπay is scanned to determine the position on the aπay to which the target sequence hybridizes The hybridization data from the scanned aπay is then analyzed to identify which allele or alleles of the biallelic marker are present in the sample Hybridization and scanning may be caπied out as described m PCT application No. WO 15 92/10092 and WO 95/11995 and US patent No. 5,424,186 Thus, in some embodiments, the chips may comprise an aπay of nucleic acid sequences of fragments of about 15 nucleotides in length. In further embodiments, the chip may comprise an aπay including at least one ofthe sequences selected from the group consisting of amphcons listed in table 1 and the sequences complementary thereto, or a fragment thereof, said fragment comprising 0 at least about 8 consecutive nucleotides, preferably 10, 15, 20, more preferably 25, 30, 40, 47, or 50 consecutive nucleotides and containing a polymoφhic base. In prefeπed embodiments the polymoφhic base is withm 5, 4, 3, 2, 1, nucleotides ofthe center ofthe said polynucleotide, more preferably at the center of said polynucleotide In some embodiments, the chip may comprise an aπay of at least 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8 or more of these polynucleotides of the invention Solid supports 25 and polynucleotides ofthe present invention attached to solid supports are further descnbed in "Oligonucleotide Probes And Primers". 6) Integrated Systems Another technique, which may be used to analyze polymoφhisms, includes multicomponent integrated systems, which miniaturize and compartmentalize processes such as PCR and capillary 30 electrophoresis reactions m a single functional device An example of such technique is disclosed in US patent 5,589,136, which descπbes the integration of PCR amplification and capillary electrophoresis in chips. Integrated systems can be envisaged mainly when microfluidic systems are used. These systems comprise a pattern of microchannels designed onto a glass, silicon, quartz, or plastic wafer 35 included on a microchip. The movements ofthe samples are controlled by electric, elecfroosmotic or hydrostatic forces applied across different areas of the microchip to create functional microscopic valves and pumps with no moving parts. For genotyping biallelic markers, the microfluidic system may integrate nucleic acid amplification, microsequencmg, capillary electrophoresis and a detection method such as laser- induced fluorescence detection Methods Of Genetic Analysis Using The Biallelic Markers Of The Present Invention Different methods are available for the genetic analysis of complex traits (see Lander and Schork, 1994). The search for disease-susceptibility genes is conducted using two mam methods the linkage approach in which evidence is sought for cosegregation between a locus and a putative trait locus using family studies, and the association approach in which evidence is sought for a statistically significant association between an allele or a trait causing allele and a trait (Khoury et al , 1993). In general, the biallelic markers of the present invention find use in any method known in the art to demonstrate a statistically significant coπelation between a genotype and a phenotype The biallelic markers may be used in parametπc and non-parametπc linkage analysis methods Preferably, the biallelic markers ofthe present invention are used to identify genes associated with detectable traits using association studies, an approach which does not require the use of affected families and which permits the identification of genes associated with complex and sporadic traits. The genetic analysis using the biallelic markers ofthe present invention may be conducted on any scale. The whole set of biallelic markers ofthe present invention or any subset of biallelic markers of the present invention coπespondmg to the candidate gene may be used. Further, any set of genetic markers including a biallelic marker ofthe present invention may be used. A set of biallelic polymoφhisms that could be used as genetic markers in combination with the biallelic markers of the present invention has been descnbed in WO 98/20165 As mentioned above, it should be noted that the biallelic markers ofthe present invention may be included in any complete or partial genetic map ofthe human genome. These different uses are specifically contemplated m the present invention and claims Linkage Analysis Linkage analysis is based upon establishing a coπelation between the transmission of genetic markers and that of a specific trait throughout generations within a family. Thus, the aim of linkage analysis is to detect marker loci that show cosegregation with a trait of interest in pedigrees Parametric Methods When data are available from successive generations there is the opportunity to study the degree of linkage between pairs of loci. Estimates ofthe recombination fraction enable loci to be ordered and placed onto a genetic map. With loci that are genetic markers, a genetic map can be established, and then the sfrength of linkage between markers and traits can be calculated and used to indicate the relative positions of markers and genes affecting those traits (Weir, 1996). The classical method for linkage analysis is the logarithm of odds (lod) score method (see Morton, 1955, Ott, 1991). Calculation of lod scores requires specification ofthe mode of inheritance for the disease (parametnc method). Generally, the length of the candidate region identified using linkage analysis is between 2 and 20Mb Once a candidate region is identified as descnbed above, analysis of recombinant individuals using additional markers allows further delineation of the candidate region. Linkage analysis studies have generally relied on the use of a maximum of 5,000 microsatelhte markers, thus limiting the maximum theoretical attainable resolution of linkage analysis to about 600 kb on average Linkage analysis has been successfully applied to map simple genetic traits that show clear Mendelian inheritance patterns and which have a high penefrance (i.e., the ratio between the number of trait positive earners of allele a and the total number of a earners in the population) However, parametnc linkage analysis suffers from a vaπety of drawbacks. First, it is limited by its reliance on the choice of a genetic model suitable for each studied trait. Furthermore, as already mentioned, the resolution attainable using linkage analysis is limited, and complementary studies are required to refine the analysis of the typical 2Mb to 20Mb regions initially identified through linkage analysis In addition, parametric linkage analysis approaches have proven difficult when applied to complex genetic traits, such as those due to the combined action of multiple genes and/or environmental factors. It is very difficult to model these factors adequately in a lod score analysis In such cases, too large an effort and cost are needed to recruit the adequate number of affected families required for applying linkage analysis to these situations, as recently discussed by Risch, N. and Meπkangas, K. (1996) Non-Parametric Methods The advantage of the so-called non-parametric methods for linkage analysis is that they do not require specification of the mode of inheritance for the disease, they tend to be more useful for the analysis of complex traits In non-parametric methods, one fries to prove that the inheritance pattern of a chromosomal region is not consistent with random Mendelian segregation by showing that affected relatives inherit identical copies of the region more often than expected by chance. Affected relatives should show excess "allele sharing" even in the presence of incomplete penefrance and polygemc inheπtance. In non-parametric linkage analysis the degree of agreement at a marker locus in two individuals can be measured either by the number of alleles identical by state (EBS) or by the number of alleles identical by descent (EBD). Affected sib pair analysis is a well- known special case and is the simplest form of these methods The biallelic markers of the present invention may be used in both parametnc and non- parametπc linkage analysis. Preferably biallelic markers may be used in non-parametπc methods which allow the mapping of genes involved in complex traits. The biallelic markers ofthe present invention may be used in both EBD- and EBS- methods to map genes affecting a complex trait. In such studies, taking advantage ofthe high density of biallelic markers, several adjacent biallelic marker loci may be pooled to achieve the efficiency attained by multi-allehc markers (Zhao et al., 1998). Population Association Studies The present invention comprises methods for identifying if the PCTA-1 gene is associated with a detectable trait using the biallelic markers ofthe present invention In one embodiment the present invention comprises methods to detect an association between a biallelic marker allele or a biallelic marker haplotype and a trait Further, the invention comprises methods to identify a trait causing allele in linkage disequilibrium with any biallelic marker allele ofthe present invention. Alternative approaches can be employed to perform association studies: genome-wide association studies, candidate region association studies and candidate gene association studies. In a prefeπed embodiment, the biallelic markers ofthe present invention are used to perform candidate gene association studies The candidate gene analysis clearly provides a short-cut approach to the identification of genes and gene polymoφhisms related to a particular trait when some information concerning the biology ofthe trait is available. Further, the biallelic markers ofthe present invention may be mcoφorated m any map of genetic markers ofthe human genome in order to perform genome -wide association studies Methods to generate a high-density map of biallelic markers has been descnbed in US Provisional Patent application serial number 60/082,614. The biallelic markers ofthe present invention may further be incoφorated in any map of a specific candidate region ofthe genome (a specific chromosome or a specific chromosomal segment for example). As mentioned above, association studies may be conducted withm the general population and are not limited to studies performed on related individuals m affected families Association studies are extremely valuable as they permit the analysis of sporadic or multifactor traits. Moreover, association studies represent a powerful method for fine-scale mapping enabling much finer mapping of trait causing alleles than linkage studies. Studies based on pedigrees often only naπow the location of the trait causing allele. Association studies using the biallelic markers of the present invention can therefore be used to refine the location of a trait causing allele in a candidate region identified by Linkage Analysis methods. Moreover, once a chromosome segment of interest has been identified, the presence of a candidate gene such as a candidate gene ofthe present invention, in the region of interest can provide a shortcut to the identification ofthe trait causing allele. Biallelic markers ofthe present invention can be used to demonstrate that a candidate gene is associated with a trait. Such uses are specifically contemplated in the present invention Determining The Frequency Of A Biallelic Marker Allele Or Of A Biallelic Marker Haplotype In A Population Association studies explore the relationships among frequencies for sets of alleles between Determining The Frequency Of An Allele In A Population Allelic frequencies ofthe biallelic markers in a populations can be determined using one of the methods described above under the heading "Methods For Genotyping An Individual For Biallelic Markers", or any genotyping procedure suitable for this intended puφose. Genotyping pooled samples or individual samples can determine the frequency of a biallelic marker allele in a population. One way to reduce the number of genotypmgs required is to use pooled samples A major obstacle in using pooled samples is in terms of accuracy and reproducibihty for determining accurate DNA concentrations m setting up the pools Genotyping individual samples provides higher sensitivity, reproducibihty and accuracy and; is the prefeπed method used in the present invention. Preferably, each individual is genotyped separately and simple gene counting is applied to determine the frequency of an allele of a biallelic marker or of a genotype in a given population. The invention also relates to methods of estimating the frequency of a PCTA- 1 -related biallelic marker allele in a population comprising * a) genotypmg individuals from said population for said biallelic marker according to the method of the present invention; and b) determining the proportional representation of said biallelic marker said population. In addition, the methods of estimating the frequency of an allele in a population of the invention encompass methods with any further limitation described in this disclosure, or those following, specified alone or in any combination, optionally, wherein said PCT -7-related biallelic marker is selected from the group consisting of Al to A125, and the complements thereof, or optionally the biallelic markers in linkage disequihbnum therewith; optionally, wherein said PCTA- 1 -related biallelic marker is selected from the group consisting of Al to A44, A46 to A53, A57, A58, A62 to A76, A81, A82, A86 to A91, A107, Al 18, and A123 to A125, and the complements thereof, or optionally the biallelic markers in linkage disequilibrium therewith, optionally, wherein said PCTA-1 -related biallelic marker is selected from the group consisting of A45, A54, A60, A61, A77 to A80, A83 to A85, A93, A102 to A106, A109, Al 10, Al 14, and A122, and the complements thereof, or optionally the biallelic markers in linkage disequihbnum therewith, optionally, wherein said PCTA- 7-related biallelic marker is selected from the group consisting of A55, A56, A59, A92, A94 to A101, A108, Al 11 to Al 13, Al 15 to Al 17, and Al 19 to A121, and the complements thereof, or optionally the biallelic markers in linkage disequihbnum therewith; Optionally, determining the frequency of a biallelic marker allele in a population may be accomplished by determining the identity of the nucleotides for both copies of said biallelic marker present m the genome of each individual in said population and calculating the proportional representation of said nucleotide at said PCTA- 1 -related biallelic marker for the population; Optionally, determining the proportional representation may be accomplished by performing a genotyping method of the invention on a pooled biological sample denved from a representative number of individuals, or each individual, m said population, and calculating the proportional amount of said nucleotide compared with the total Determining The Frequency Of A Haplotype In A Population The gametic phase of haplotypes is unknown when diploid individuals are heterozygous at more than one locus. Using genealogical information in families gametic phase can sometimes be mfeπed (Perlm et al., 1994). When no genealogical information is available different strategies may be used. One possibility is that the multiple-site heterozygous diploids can be eliminated from the analysis, keeping only the homozygotes and the single-site heterozygote individuals, but this approach might lead to a possible bias in the sample composition and the underestimation of low- frequency haplotypes. Another possibility is that single chromosomes can be studied independently, for example, by asymmetric PCR amplification (see Newton et al, 1989; Wu et al., 1989) or by isolation of single chromosome by limit dilution followed by PCR amplification (see Ruano et al., 1990). Further, a sample may be haplotyped for sufficiently close biallelic markers by double PCR amplification of specific alleles (Sarkar, G. and Sommer S. S., 1991). These approaches are not entirely satisfying either because of their technical complexity, the additional cost they entail, their lack of generalization at a large scale, or the possible biases they introduce. To overcome these difficulties, an algoπthm to infer the phase of PCR-amplified DNA genotypes introduced by Clark, A.G.(1990) may be used. Briefly, the principle is to start filling a preliminary list of haplotypes present in the sample by examining unambiguous individuals, that is, the complete homozygotes and the smgle-site heterozygotes. Then other individuals in the same sample are screened for the possible occuπence of previously recognized haplotypes. For each positive identification, the complementary haplotype is added to the list of recognized haplotypes, until the phase information for all individuals is either resolved or identified as unresolved. This method assigns a single haplotype to each multiheterozygous individual, whereas several haplotypes are possible when there are more than one heterozygous site. Alternatively, one can use methods estimating haplotype frequencies in a population without assigning haplotypes to each individual. Preferably, a method based on an expectation-maximization (EM) algoπthm (Dempster et al., 1977) leading to maximum- likehhood estimates of haplotype frequencies under the assumption of Hardy-Wemberg proportions (random mating) is used (see Excoffier L. and Slatkm M., 1995). The EM algonthm is a generalized iterative maximum-likelihood approach to estimation that is useful when data are ambiguous and/or incomplete. The EM algorithm is used to resolve heterozygotes into haplotypes. Haplotype estimations are further described below under the heading "Statistical Methods." Any other method known m the art to determine or to estimate the frequency of a haplotype in a population may be used. The invention also encompasses methods of estimating the frequency of a haplotype for a set of biallelic markers in a population, comprising the steps of: a) genotyping at least one PCTA-1 - related biallelic marker according to a method of the invention for each individual in said population; b) genotypmg a second biallelic marker by determining the identity ofthe nucleotides at said second biallelic marker for both copies of said second biallelic marker present in the genome of each individual in said population, and c) applying a haplotype determination method to the identities ofthe nucleotides determined in steps a) and b) to obtain an estimate of said frequency In addition, the methods of estimating the frequency of a haplotype ofthe invention encompass methods with any further limitation descnbed in this disclosure, or those following, specified alone or in any combination optionally, wherein said PCTA- 1 -related biallelic marker is selected from the group consisting of A 1 to A 125, and the complements thereof, or optionally the biallelic markers in linkage disequihbnum therewith, optionally, wherein said PCΣ4-7-related biallelic marker is selected from the group consisting of Al to A44, A46 to A53, A57, A58, A62 to A76, A81, A82, A86 to A91, A107, Al 18, and A123 to A125, and the complements thereof, or optionally the biallelic markers in linkage disequilibrium therewith, optionally, wherein said PCTA-1 -related biallelic marker is selected from the group consisting of A45, A54, A60, A61, A77 to A80, A83 to A85, A93, A102 to A106, A109, Al 10, Al 14, and A122, and the complements thereof, or optionally the biallelic markers m linkage disequihbnum therewith, optionally, wherein said PCTA- 7 -related biallelic marker is selected from the group consisting of A55, A56, A59, A92, A94 to AlOl, A108, Al 11 to Al 13, Al 15 to Al 17, and Al 19 to A121, and the complements thereof, or optionally the biallelic markers in linkage disequihbnum therewith, Optionally, said haplotype determination method is performed by asymmetric PCR amplification, double PCR amplification of specific alleles, the Clark algonthm, or an expectation-maximization algoπthm Linkage Disequilibrium Analysis Linkage disequilibrium is the non-random association of alleles at two or more loci and represents a powerful tool for mapping genes involved in disease traits (see Ajioka R S et al , 1997) Biallelic markers, because they are densely spaced in the human genome and can be genotyped in greater numbers than other types of genetic markers (such as RFLP or VNTR markers), are particularly useful m genetic analysis based on linkage disequihbnum When a disease mutation is first introduced into a population (by a new mutation or the immigration of a mutation caπier), it necessaπly resides on a single chromosome and thus on a single "background" or "ancestral" haplotype of linked markers Consequently, there is complete disequilibrium between these markers and the disease mutation one finds the disease mutation only in the presence of a specific set of marker alleles Through subsequent generations recombination events occur between the disease mutation and these marker polymoφhisms, and the disequihbnum gradually dissipates The pace of this dissipation is a function ofthe recombination frequency, so the markers closest to the disease gene will manifest higher levels of disequihbnum than those that are further away When not broken up by recombination, "ancestral" haplotypes and linkage disequilibrium between marker alleles at different loci can be tracked not only through pedigrees but also through populations Linkage disequihbnum is usually seen as an association between one specific allele at one locus and another specific allele at a second locus The pattern or curve of disequilibrium between disease and marker loci is expected to exhibit a maximum that occurs at the disease locus Consequently, the amount of linkage disequilibrium between a disease allele and closely linked genetic markers may yield valuable information regarding the location ofthe disease gene For fine-scale mapping of a disease locus, it is useful to have some knowledge of the patterns of linkage disequilibrium that exist between markers in the studied region As mentioned above the mapping resolution achieved through the analysis of linkage disequilibrium is much higher than that of linkage studies The high density of biallelic markers combined with linkage disequihbnum analysis provides powerful tools for fine- scale mapping Different methods to calculate linkage disequihbnum are descnbed below under the heading "Statistical Methods" Population-Based Case-Control Studies Of Trait-Marker Associations As mentioned above, the occuπence of pairs of specific alleles at different loci on the same chromosome is not random and the deviation from random is called linkage disequihbnum Association studies focus on population frequencies and rely on the phenomenon of linkage disequilibrium If a specific allele m a given gene is directly involved in causing a particular trait, its frequency will be statistically increased in an affected (trait positive) population, when compared to the frequency a trait negative population or in a random control population As a consequence of the existence of linkage disequilibrium, the frequency of all other alleles present in the haplotype carrying the trait-causmg allele will also be increased in trait positive individuals compared to trait negative individuals or random controls Therefore, association between the trait and any allele (specifically a biallelic marker allele) in linkage disequilibrium with the trait-causmg allele will suffice to suggest the presence of a trait-related gene in that particular region Case-control populations can be genotyped for biallelic markers to identify associations that naπowly locate a trait causing allele As any marker m linkage disequilibrium with one given marker associated with a trait will be associated with the trait Linkage disequihbnum allows the relative frequencies m case-control populations of a limited number of genetic polymoφhisms (specifically biallelic markers) to be analyzed as an alternative to screening all possible functional polymoφhisms m order to find trait-causing alleles Association studies compare the frequency of marker alleles in unrelated case-control populations, and represent powerful tools for the dissection of complex traits Case-Control Populations (Inclusion Criteria) Population-based association studies do not concern familial mhentance but compare the prevalence of a particular genetic marker, or a set of markers, m case-control populations They are case-control studies based on comparison of unrelated case (affected or trait positive) individuals and unrelated control (unaffected, trait negative or random) individuals Preferably the control group is composed of unaffected or trait negative individuals Further, the control group is ethnically matched to the case population Moreover, the control group is preferably matched to the case-population for the mam known confusion factor for the trait under study (for example age- matched for an age-dependent trait). Ideally, individuals in the two samples are paired m such a way that they are expected to differ only in their disease status. The terms "trait positive population", "case population" and "affected population" are used interchangeably herein. An important step m the dissection of complex traits using association studies is the choice of case-control populations (see Lander and Schork, 1994). A major step in the choice of case- control populations is the clinical definition of a given trait or phenotype. Any genetic trait may be analyzed by the association method proposed here by carefully selecting the individuals to be included in the trait positive and trait negative phenotypic groups. Four cntena are often useful: clinical phenotype, age at onset, family history and seventy The selection procedure for continuous or quantitative traits (such as blood pressure for example) involves selecting individuals at opposite ends of the phenotype distπbution ofthe trait under study, so as to include in these trait positive and trait negative populations individuals with non-overlappmg phenotypes. Preferably, case-control populations consist of phenotypically homogeneous populations Trait positive and trait negative populations consist of phenotypically uniform populations of individuals representing each between 1 and 98%, preferably between 1 and 80%, more preferably between 1 and 50%, and more preferably between 1 and 30%, most preferably between 1 and 20% of the total population under study, and preferably selected among individuals exhibiting non-overlappmg phenotypes. The clearer the difference between the two trait phenotypes, the greater the probability of detecting an association with biallelic markers The selection of those drastically different but relatively uniform phenotypes enables efficient comparisons in association studies and the possible detection of marked differences at the genetic level, provided that the sample sizes of the populations under study are significant enough. In prefeπed embodiments, a first group of between 50 and 300 trait positive individuals, preferably about 100 individuals, are recruited according to their phenotypes. A similar number of control individuals are included in such studies. In the present invention, typical examples of inclusion cπteπa include, but are not restπcted to, prostate cancer or aggressiveness of prostate cancer tumors. In one prefeπed embodiment ofthe present invention, association studies are earned out on the basis of a presence (trait positive) or absence (trait negative) of prostate cancer. Associations studies can be earned out by the skilled technician using the biallelic markers of the invention defined above, with different trait positive and trait negative populations. Suitable further examples of association studies using biallelic markers ofthe PCTA-1 gene, including the biallelic markers Al to A125, involve studies on the following populations * - a frait positive population suffeπng from a cancer and a healthy unaffected population, or - a trait positive population suffeπng from prostate cancer treated with agents acting against prostate cancer and suffenng from side-effects resulting from this treatment and an trait negative population suffenng from prostate cancer treated with same agents without any substantial side-effects, or - a trait positive population suffenng from prostate cancer treated with agents acting against prostate cancer showing a beneficial response and a trait negative population suffenng from prostate cancer treated with same agents without any beneficial response, or - a trait positive population suffenng from prostate cancer presenting highly aggressive prostate cancer tumors and a trait negative population suffering from prostate cancer with prostate cancer tumors devoid of aggressiveness. Association Analysis The general strategy to perform association studies using biallelic markers derived from a region carrying a candidate gene is to scan two groups of individuals (case-control populations) m order to measure and statistically compare the allele frequencies of the biallelic markers ofthe present invention in both groups. If a statistically significant association with a trait is identified for at least one or more ofthe analyzed biallelic markers, one can assume that: either the associated allele is directly responsible for causing the trait (i.e. the associated allele is the trait causing allele), or more likely the associated allele is in linkage disequihbnum with the trait causing allele The specific charactenstics ofthe associated allele with respect to the candidate gene function usually give further insight into the relationship between the associated allele and the trait (causal or in linkage disequihbnum). If the evidence indicates that the associated allele withm the candidate gene is most probably not the trait causing allele but is m linkage disequihbnum with the real trait causing allele, then the trait causing allele can be found by sequencing the vicinity of the associated marker, and performing further association studies with the polymoφhisms that are revealed in an iterative manner. Association studies are usually run m two successive steps. In a first phase, the frequencies of a reduced number of biallelic markers from the candidate gene are determined in the trait positive and control populations In a second phase of the analysis, the position of the genetic loci responsible for the given trait is further refined using a higher density of markers from the relevant region. However, if the candidate gene under study is relatively small in length, as is the case for PCTA-1, a single phase may be sufficient to establish significant associations. It is another object ofthe present invention to provide a method for the identification and characteπzation of an association between an allele of one or more biallelic markers oi a PCTA-1 gene and a trait. The method comprises the steps of: - genotyping a marker or a group of biallelic markers according to the invention in trait positive and control individuals; and - establishing a statistically significant association between one allele of at least one marker and the trait. The control individuals can be random or trait negative populations. Preferably, the trait positive and trait negative individuals are selected from non-overlappmg phenotypes relating trait under study. In some embodiments, the biallelic marker is comprised in one or more of the sequences of PI to PI 25, and the complementary sequences thereof. The invention also comprises methods of detecting an association between a genotype and a phenotype, comprising the steps of a) determining the frequency of at least one PC7 -7-related biallelic marker m a trait positive population according to a genotyping method of the invention; b) determining the frequency of said PCTA- 1 -related biallelic marker m a control population according to a genotyping method of the invention, and c) determining whether a statistically significant association exists between said genotype and said phenotype. In addition, the methods of detecting an association between a genotype and a phenotype of the invention encompass methods with any further limitation described m this disclosure, or those following, specified alone or m any combination * Optionally, wherein said PCTA-1 -related biallelic marker is selected from the group consisting of Al to A 125, and the complements thereof, or optionally the biallelic markers m linkage disequihbnum therewith; optionally, wherein said PC7 -7-related biallelic marker is selected from the group consisting of Al to A44, A46 to A53, A57, A58, A62 to A76, A81, A82, A86 to A91, A107, Al 18, and A123 to A125, and the complements thereof, or optionally the biallelic markers m linkage disequilibrium therewith, optionally, wherein said PCTA- 1 -related biallelic marker is selected from the group consisting of A45, A54, A60, A61, A77 to A80, A83 to A85, A93, A102 to A106, A109, Al 10, Al 14, and A122, and the complements thereof, or optionally the biallelic markers in linkage disequihbnum therewith; optionally, wherein said PCTA- 7-related biallelic marker is selected from the group consisting of A55, A56, A59, A92, A94 to AlOl, A108, Al 11 to Al 13, Al 15 to Al 17, and Al 19 to A121, and the complements thereof, or optionally the biallelic markers in linkage disequihbnum therewith; Optionally, said control population may be a trait negative population, or a random population; Optionally, each of said genotyping steps a) and b) may be performed on a pooled biological sample derived from each of said populations; Optionally, each of said genotyping of steps a) and b) is performed separately on biological samples denved from each individual in said population or a subsample thereof; Optionally, the identity of the nucleotides at the biallelic markers of the PCTA-1 gene is determined in steps a) and b). Optionally, said phenotype is symptoms of, or susceptibility to cancer, preferably prostate cancer, the level of aggressiveness of prostate cancer tumors, an early onset of prostate cancer, a beneficial response to or side effects related to treatment against prostate cancer. If the trait is a beneficial response or inversely a side effect to a treatment of prostate cancer, the method of the invention refeπed to above further compnses some or all ofthe following steps. - selecting a population or cohort of subjects diagnosed as suffering from prostate cancer, - administering a specified treatment of prostate cancer to said cohort of subjects, - momtoπng the outcome of drug administration and identifying those individuals that are trait positive or trait negative relative to the treatment; - taking from said cohort biological samples containing DNA and testing this DNA for the presence of a specific allele or of a set of alleles of biallelic markers of the PCTA-1 gene; - analyzing the distπbution of alleles of biallelic markers between trait positive and trait negative individuals; and - performing a statistical analysis to determine a statistically significant association between the presence or absence of alleles of biallelic markers ofthe PCTA-1 gene and the treatment related trait Haplotype Analysis As described above, when a chromosome carrying a disease allele first appears m a population as a result of either mutation or migration, the mutant allele necessaπly resides on a chromosome having a set of linked markers: the ancestral haplotype This haplotype can be tracked through populations and its statistical association with a given trait can be analyzed. Complementing single point (allelic) association studies with multi-pomt association studies also called haplotype studies increases the statistical power of association studies Thus, a haplotype association study allows one to define the frequency and the type of the ancestral caπier haplotype A haplotype analysis is important in that it increases the statistical power of an analysis involving individual markers In a first stage of a haplotype frequency analysis, the frequency of the possible haplotypes based on various combinations of the identified biallelic markers of the invention is determined. The haplotype frequency is then compared for distinct populations of trait positive and control individuals The number of trait positive individuals, which should be, subjected to this analysis to obtain statistically significant results usually ranges between 30 and 300, with a prefeπed number of individuals ranging between 50 and 150 The same considerations apply to the number of unaffected individuals (or random control) used in the study. The results of this first analysis provide haplotype frequencies in case-control populations, for each evaluated haplotype frequency a p-value and an odd ratio are calculated. If a statistically significant association is found the relative πsk for an individual carrying the given haplotype of being affected with the trait under study can be approximated. The present invention also provides a method for the identification and characteπzation of an association between a haplotype compnsing alleles of several biallelic markers ofthe genomic sequence ofthe PCTA-1 gene and a trait The method compnses the steps of: - genotyping a group of biallelic markers according to the invention m trait positive and control individuals; and - establishing a statistically significant association between a haplotype and the trait Preferably, the control individuals can be random or trait negative populations In some embodiments, the haplotype compπses two or more biallelic markers comprised in the sequences of PI to PI 25, and the complementary sequences thereof An additional embodiment ofthe present invention encompasses methods of detecting an association between a haplotype and a phenotype, compnsing the steps of a) estimating the frequency of at least one haplotype m a trait positive population, according to a method of the invention for estimating the frequency of a haplotype, b) estimating the frequency of said haplotype in a confrol population, according to a method of the invention for estimating the frequency of a haplotype, and c) determining whether a statistically significant association exists between said haplotype and said phenotype In addition, the methods of detecting an association between a haplotype and a phenotype of the invention encompass methods with any further limitation described m this disclosure, or those following Optionally, wherein said PCTA- 1 -related biallelic marker is selected from the group consisting of Al to A125, and the complements thereof, or optionally the biallelic markers in linkage disequihbnum therewith, optionally, wherein said PCTA- 7-related biallelic marker is selected from the group consisting of Al to A44, A46 to A53, A57, A58, A62 to A76, A81, A82, A86 to A91, A107, Al 18, and A123 to A125, and the complements thereof, or optionally the biallelic markers in linkage disequihbnum therewith, optionally, wherein said PCZ^-7-related biallelic marker is selected from the group consisting of A45, A54, A60, A61, A77 to A80, A83 to A85, A93, A102 to A106, A109, Al 10, Al 14, and A122, and the complements thereof, or optionally the biallelic markers in linkage disequihbnum therewith, optionally, wherein said PCTA-1 -related biallelic marker is selected from the group consisting of A55, A56, A59, A92, A94 to AlOl, A108, Al 11 to Al 13, Al 15 to Al 17, and Al 19 to A121, and the complements thereof, or optionally the biallelic markers m linkage disequihbnum therewith, Optionally, said confrol population is a trait negative population, or a random population Optionally, said phenotype is symptoms of, or susceptibility to cancer, preferably prostate cancer, the level of aggressiveness of prostate cancer tumors, an early onset of prostate cancer, a beneficial response to or side effects related to treatment against prostate cancer, Optionally, said method comprises the additional steps of determining the phenotype in said trait positive and said control populations pnor to step c) Interaction Analysis The biallelic markers ofthe present invention may also be used to identify patterns of biallelic markers associated with detectable traits resulting from polygemc interactions The analysis of genetic interaction between alleles at unlinked loci requires individual genotyping using the techniques described herein The analysis of allelic interaction among a selected set of biallelic markers with appropriate level of statistical significance can be considered as a haplotype analysis Interaction analysis consists in stratifying the case-control populations with respect to a given haplotype for the first loci and performing a haplotype analysis with the second loci with each subpopulation. Statistical methods used in association studies are further descnbed below. Testing For Linkage In The Presence Of Association The biallelic markers of the present invention may further be used in TDT (transmission/disequihbnum test). TDT tests for both linkage and association and is not affected by population stratification. TDT requires data for affected individuals and their parents or data from unaffected sibs instead of from parents (see Spielmann S. et al., 1993; Schaid DJ. et al., 1996, Spielmann S. and Ewens W.J., 1998). Such combined tests generally reduce the false - positive eπors produced by separate analyses. Association OF Biallelic Markers Of The Invention With Prostate Cancer Trait Positive And Control Populations Two groups of independent individuals were used: the overall trait positive and the trait negative populations included 491 individuals suffering from prostate cancer and 313 individuals without any sign of prostate cancer. A specific protocol for the collection of DNA samples from trait positive and trait negative individuals is descnbed m Example 5 The 491 individuals suffenng from prostate cancer can be subdivided into a population of individuals who developed prostate cancer under 65 years-old and a population of individuals who developed prostate cancer after the age of 65. The population of individuals who are less than 65 years-old was used to determine an association with an early onset of prostate cancer. The affected individuals can also be subdivided in familial cases and sporadic cases. In order to have as much certainty as possible on the absence of prostate cancer in trait negative individuals, it is prefeπed to conduct a PSA dosage analysis on this population. Several commercial assays can be used (WO 96/21042, herein by reference). In one prefeπed embodiment, a Hybntech assay is used and trait negative individuals must have a level of PSA less than 2.8 ng/ml of serum in order to be selected as such. In a prefeπed embodiment, the Yang assay is used and trait negative individuals must have a level of PSA of less than 4 ng/ml of serum in order to be included in the population under study. Association Analysis In one prefeπed embodiment ofthe invention in which a coπelation was found between biallelic markers ofthe PCTA-1 gene and prostate cancer, results of the association study, further details of which are provided in example 5, seem to indicate that prostate cancer, preferably familial prostate cancer, more preferably early onset familial prostate cancer, is associated most strongly with the biallelic markers A30 (99-1572/440) and A41 (5-171/204) which present a particular interest. These association results constitute new elements for studying the genetic susceptibility of individuals to prostate cancer, preferably to familial prostate cancer, more preferably familial early onset prostate cancer. Further details concerning this association study are provided below. The biallelic markers most sfrongly associated with prostate cancer, namely A30 and A41, are located in the regulatory region ofthe PCTA-1 gene, more particularly in the promoter region. The consequences of the presence of these markers m these regions are discussed below. Furthermore, the biallelic marker A2 (99-1601/402) was found to be also associated with prostate cancer, more particularly with sporadic prostate cancer. This biallelic marker is localized in the 5' regulatory region of the PCTA-1 gene. Similar association studies can also be caπied out with other biallelic markers withm the scope ofthe invention, preferably with biallelic markers m linkage disequihbnum with the markers associated with prostate cancer as described above, including the biallelic markers Al to A125. Analysis Of Biallelic Marker Associations Even though polymoφhisms associated with prostate cancer have been identified in the coding region of the PCTA-1 gene, these polymoφhisms do not appear to be as significant as those found in the upsfream regulatory region of the PCTA-1 gene. The results further suggest that a trait- causmg mutation is likely to be located withm the 5' regulatory region of the PCTA-1 gene. The extent to which the markers found withm the coding region oi PCTA-1 are significant in relation to cancer can be determined using haplotype analyses involving at least two ofthe biallelic markers of the present invention. Six of the biallelic markers ofthe present invention result in a change in the ammo acid sequence of a PCTA-1 protein. These are biallelic markers A54, A56, A60, A75, A76 and A85. These mutations may change the function and/or the stability ofthe PCTA-1 protein. An ammo acid change in a PCTA-1 protein can lead to alterations in PCTA-1 biological activity. Either a modified function or an increased stability can be involved m prostate cancer appearance. Furthermore, as the expression ofthe PCTA-1 gene has mainly been reported in prostate cancer cells, one can assume that its expression is closely linked to the development of cancer, particularly prostate cancer. Generally, a major control of gene expression proceeds at the level of the initiation ofthe transcription. This initiation involves the promoter which can be considered as a concentration of transcription factor binding sites. The initiation of the franscnption also involves enhancers which modulate the efficiency ofthe initiation and consist of DNA binding sites which are located in regulatory regions of the considered gene which may be at a certain distance in 3' or 5' ofthe gene. Most ofthe biallelic polymoφhisms ofthe PCTA-1 gene associated with prostate cancer according to the present invention are located in the regulatory region upsfream ofthe transcription start site ofthe PCTA-1 gene and particularly in the promoter. Biallelic marker A41, which is located about 120 bp upsfream of the beginning ofthe first exon (exon 0), may be comprised in the proximal promoter of the PCTA-1 gene This biallelic marker could be a trait causing mutation of prostate cancer. Biallelic marker A30, which is located about 1.5 kb upstream the beginning ofthe first exon (exon 0), may be comprised m the distal promoter ofthe PCTA-1 gene. Biallelic marker A2 is located in the 5' regulatory region of the PCTA-1 gene. As the expression of the PCTA-1 gene has mamly been reported in prostate cancer cells, the expression oi PCTA-1 gene is modified dunng the carcmogenesis. The exact mechanism through which PCTA expression is modified is not understood. However, it is possible that the polymoφhisms A41, A30, and A2 modulate PCTA-1 expression by modulating PCTA-1 transcription through DNA binding proteins, which will be explained in further detail below. The regulation oi PCTA-1 expression is a key factor m the onset and for development of cancer and particularly prostate cancer In this regard, the polymoφhisms located in the 5' regulatory region of the PCTA-1 gene appear to play the most significant role in the association of PCTA-1 with cancer. It appears clear that the polymoφhisms found in the promoter region adjacent to the transcπption initiation site, and particularly those located m the proximal PCTA-1 promoter, are more strongly associated with prostate cancer than polymoφhisms ofthe other promoter elements located further upstream of this site. Furthermore, some polymoφhisms, such as the biallelic marker A41, are clearly associated with early onset prostate cancer The polymoφhisms found in the proximal 2000 to 3000 bp ofthe 5' regulatory region are associated with early onset prostate cancer. The inventors have also shown an association between some of the biallelic markers ofthe present invention located at the 3' end ofthe PCTA-1 genomic DNA and prostate cancer. The involvement ofthe associated polymoφhisms in the modification of the PCTA-1 expression in prostate cancer cells can be confirmed through the assays described below. The expression levels oi a PCTA-1 gene, preferably a gene comprising at least one biallelic marker according to the invention, m different tissues, can be determined by analyses of tissue samples from individuals typed for the presence or absence of a specific polymoφhism. Any convenient method can be used such as Northern, or Dot blot or other hybridization analyses, and quantitative RT-PCR for mRNA quantitation, Western blot ELISA, RIA for protein quantitation. The tissue specific expression can then be coπelated with the genotype. More details on some of these methods are provided below under the heading "Method For Screening". The effects of modifications in the regulatory regions ofthe PCTA-1 gene, and particularly in the sequence of its promoter, can be studied through the determination of expression levels by expression assays for the particular promoter sequence. The assays are performed with the PCTA-1 coding sequence or with a detectable marker sequence using a reporter gene. To determine tissue specificity, the assay is performed in cells from different sources. Preferably the assay is performed on normal tissue cells and cancerous cells of the same tissue type (e.g. prostate cells and on prostate cancer cells). More preferably, the assay is performed on a large range of cell lines with an increasing level of malignancy. Some methods are discussed in more detail below under the heading "Method For Screening". An assay to determine the effect of a sequence polymoφhism on PCTA-1 expression may be performed in cell-free extracts, or in cell-culture assays, such as transient or stable transfection assays. This assay is also within the scope of the present invention. Alterations in expression may be coπelated to decreases or increases in the basic amounts oi PCTA-1 mRNA and/or protein that are expressed in one or more cell types. Expression levels of different alleles are compared using various methods known m the art. Methods for determining whether the level of expression tπggered by promoter or enhancer sequences is increased or decreased depending on the studied allele of said sequence include the insertion into a vector of said sequence upsfream a reporter gene such as β-galactosidase, luciferase, green fluorescent protein or chloramphe col acetyltransferase. Expression levels are assessed by quantitation of expressed reporter proteins that provides for convenient quantitation The changes in PCTA-1 expression can be the result of modifications in the modulation of PCTA-1 transcπption by DNA binding proteins, which are able to activate or inhibit the initiation of the transcription ofthe PCTA-1 gene. The term "DNA binding protein" is intended to encompass more particularly transcriptional factors. The binding of these proteins on the sites located in the promoter is critical for a coπect binding of polymerases and consequently for the initiation of transcription. The binding of these proteins on the sites located in the 5' upstream regulatory regions modulates franscnption. The binding sites of DNA binding proteins, preferably transcription factors, are generally 6- 20 nucleotides in length. A polymoφhic site located in a franscnption factor binding site may result in a difference of binding affinity ofthe said transcπption factor between the two allele of the polymoφhism This difference of affinity could explain the changes of expression ofthe PCTA-1 gene. When one or more alleles ofthe biallelic markers ofthe PCTA-1 gene associated with cancer are present in the genome of an individual since conception, there would be an event which provokes a drastic increase m the expression oi PCTA-1. There are at least two possible hypotheses that can be formulated to explain this event. Firstly, as cancer is the result of a succession of mutations, one mutation could lead to either the expression of a new DNA binding activity, or the overexpression of a DNA binding factor which binds to the site containing the polymoφhism and which is involved in the transcπption of the PCTA-1 gene. Secondly the DNA binding factor readily binds to the site containing the polymoφhism in normal cells where it is either unable to activate the transcription of PCTA-1 or repressor ofthe PCTA-1 transcπption initiation. A mutation in the transcπption factor can make the transcπption factor either functional m the case of an activator or unfunctional in the case of a repressor. Likewise, a mutation in an additional protein can induce the binding of this protein which is needed by the DNA binding factor for activating the transcription of the PCTA-1 gene. In order to confirm the capacity of transcπption factors to bind sites containing the biallelic markers of the present invention, so as to assess the difference in affinity between the two alleles of the considered biallelic marker and to discriminate between these hypotheses, a gel retardation assay or DNA mobility shift assay can be earned out. This type of assay is well-known to those skilled m the art and is described m US 5,698,389, US 5,502,176, Fried and Crothers (1981), Gamer and Revzin (1981) and Dent and Latchman (1993). This type of method relies on the principle that a fragment of DNA to which a protein has bound will move more slowly in gel electrophoresis than the same DNA fragment without the bound protein. The DNA mobility shift assay is earned out, therefore, by first labeling the specific DNA segment whose protem-binding properties are being investigated. The labeled DNA is then incubated with a nuclear (Dignam et al., 1983; Schreiber et al., 1989; Muller et al., 1989; Mizokami et al., 1994) or whole cell (Manley et al., 1980) extract of cells prepared in such a way as to contain DNA-bmdmg proteins. DNA-protem complexes are then allowed to form. The complexes are then electrophoresed on a non-denaturing polyacrylamide gel and the position of the labeled DNA is visualized by suitable techniques. Various types of suitable labels can be selected by the person skilled in the art. Notably, the radioactive labeling is appropπate. If no protein has bound to the DNA, all the label is free to migrate quickly, whereas labeled protem-DNA complexes migrate more slowly and hence give a different signal from that of the unbound DNA near the top of the gel. The interaction specificity can be estimated by carrying out a gel retardation assay with increasing amount of unlabeled DNA segment which can compete with the labeled one. A positive confrol can be realized with an oligonucleotide containing the androgene responsive element. The investigated DNA segment preferably compπses the sequence of a potential binding site containing an allele of a polymoφhism of the present invention, more preferably a sequence comprising a sequence selected from PI to PI 25 and the complementary sequences thereto, still more preferably a sequence compnsing a sequence selected from PI to P43 and the complementary sequences thereto. In an embodiment, the polymoφhism site is located in the middle of the DNA fragment. In an other embodiment, the polymoφhism site can be located close to an end ofthe DNA fragment, for example at 6 nucleotides away from the end. The DNA fragment has a sufficient length to hybridize with the complementary strand and to form a stable double strand. For example, the DNA fragment comprises at least 8 nucleotides, preferably at least 20 nucleotides, more preferable 30 nucleotides. In a specific embodiment, the DNA fragment comprises the sequence of interest at the middle ofthe fragment and some poly G, poly C, or poly GC at its 5' and/or 3' ends. In a prefeπed embodiment, the DNA segment consists of an oligonucleotide selected from the group consisting of Ohgol to Ohgo60 which are described in Table C and detailed as feature in SEQ ED No 1. For each polymoφhic site, 4 ohgonucleotides are generated and coπespond to the two complementary strands ofthe DNA for each of the two alleles of the considered polymoφhism. The DNA segments are designed such as the polymoφhic base is suπounded with 14 nucleotides on each side. Table C Each oligonucleotide selected from Ohgol to OhgoόO comprises 4 additional bases, namely In a prefeπed embodiment, either the nuclear or whole cell extracts are provided from normal and cancer cells, particularly from normal prostate cells and prostate cancer cells. For example, suitable cell extracts can be provided from PZ-HPV-7 (ATCC : CRL-2221), CA-HPV-10 (ATCC : CRL-2220), PC-3 (ATCC : CRL-1435), DU 145 (ATCC : HTB-81), LNCaP-FGC (ATCC : CRL-10995 and CRL-1740), or NCI-H660 (ATCC : CRL-5813) cells. In a more prefeπed embodiment, the cell exfracts are provided form PNT1 A, PNT2, LNCaP-JMV, DU145 (ATCC Nr : HTB-81) or PC3 (ATCC Nr : CRL-1435) cells. In case a new franscnption factor is specifically expressed in cancer cells, a gel retardation assay will show a retarded or shifted band only when the DNA was incubated with cell extracts from prostate cancer cells. If the DNA binding activity already exists m normal cells, the gel retardation assay will show a shifted band with cell extracts from normal prostate cells and prostate cancer cells. Gel retardation assays will also allow to show a significant difference in affinity between a DNA binding factor and binding sites containing the two alleles ofthe considered polymoφhism. The interaction ofthe DNA segment descnbed above with transcnption factors can also be studied with an optical biosensor such as BIACORE. This technology is well-known to those skilled m the art and is descnbed in Szabo et al. (1995) and Edwards et al. (1997). The mam advantage of this method is that it allows the determination of the association rate between the DNA fragment which is investigated and the DNA binding protein. Typically, a DNA segment such as those defined above is biotinylated at its 5' or 3' ends and is immobilized on a streptavidin-coated sensor chip. Then, a whole or a nuclear extract of cells is placed in contact with the DNA segment. The binding of DNA binding proteins to the DNA fragment causes a change m the refractive index and/or thickness. This change is detected by the Biosensor provided it occurs in the evanescent field. The affinity of the DNA binding protein to the DNA fragment can then be measured. In order to precisely localize the binding site of the transcπption factors, DNAse I footpπnting or DMS protection footpnntmg assays can also be earned out with DNA fragments which contain the sequence of a potential binding site containing an allele of a polymoφhism of the present invention, preferably a sequence comprising a sequence selected from PI to PI 25 and the complementary sequences thereto, more preferably a sequence compπsmg a sequence selected from PI to P43 and the complementary sequences thereto. This type of assay is well-known to those skilled the art and is descnbed in Galas and Schmitz (1978), and Dynan and Tjian (1983). Bnefly, in the DNAse I footpnntmg assay, end-labeled DNA is incubated with protein extract and then partially digested with DNAse I. Specific binding of proteins to DNA will modify nuclease digestion at the site of interaction relative to free DNA, leaving an "imprint" which can be visualized after extraction ofthe labeled DNA and electrophoresis in a sequence gel. The interaction with transcription factors can also be studied with the methylation interference assay which is well-known to those skilled m the art and is described in Siebenhst and Gilbert (1980) and Maxam and Gilbert (1980). Bnefly, this method relies on the ability of DMS to methylate G residues, which can be cleaved with piperidine. The target DNA is partially methylated so that, on average, only one G residue per DNA molecule is methylated. These partially methylated molecules is used m a DNA mobility shift experiment with an appropπate cell extract containing transcπption factors. After electrophoresis, the band produced by the DNA which has bound protein and that produced by the unbound DNA are excised from the gel and treated with piperidine to cleave the DNA at the methylated G residues and not at unmethylated G residues If methylation of a particular G residue prevents transcnption factors binding, then cleavage at this methylated G residue will be observed only in the DNA that failed to bind the protein In order to confirm the implication of a particular PCTA-1 denved sequence containing the biallelic marker as a binding site for a transcnption regulator oi PCTA-1 m cancer cells, a transient expression assay can be earned out in which a vector compπsmg the considered binding site upstream ofthe HSV1 thymidme kinase promoter operably linked to a reporter gene such as chloramphemcol acetyltransferase is transfected in appropriate cell lines This assay is well-known to those skilled in the art and is descnbed in Doucas et al (1991) This assay can also be realized by cloning the considered binding site upstream the SV40 promoter into the pGL3-promoter luciferase vector (Promega) as descnbed in Coles et al (1998) Both normal and cancer cells, more particularly normal and cancer cells from prostate, are transfected with said vector The effect ofthe binding site and more particularly ofthe alleles comprised in the binding site can be assessed through the expression level of the reporter gene The inventors believe that these polymoφhisms, particularly the polymoφhisms located on or close to polyadenylation sites have a direct although somewhat milder effect on prostate cancer development Haplotype Analysis In the context of the present invention, a haplotype can be defined as a combination of biallelic markers found in a given individual and which may be associated more or less significantly, as a result of appropπate statistical analyses, with the expression of a given trait A two-marker haplotype including markers A30 and A41 (TT alleles respectively) was shown to be significantly associated with prostate cancer, preferably with a familial prostate cancer, more preferably with a familial early onset prostate cancer As shown in Table 8, the "TT" haplotype present a p-value of 2 5 x 10 6 for the familial early onset prostate cancer (see Example 5) A three-marker haplotype including markers A2, A30, and A41 (ATT alleles respectively) was shown to be significantly associated with prostate cancer, preferably with a familial prostate cancer, more preferably with a familial early onset prostate cancer As shown in table 8, the "ATT" haplotype present a p-value of 2 5 x 10 for the familial early onset prostate cancer (see Example 5) A first two-marker haplotype including markers A2 and A57 (99-1605/112) (TA alleles, respectively) was shown to be significantly associated with prostate cancer, preferably with a sporadic prostate cancer As shown in table 8, the "TA" haplotype present a p-value of 3 4 x 10 5 for the sporadic informative prostate cancer (see Example 5) A second two-marker haplotype including markers A2 and A55 (5-2/178) (TT alleles, respectively) was shown to be significantly associated with prostate cancer, preferably with a sporadic prostate cancer As shown in table 8, the "TT" haplotype present a p-value of 1 x 10 3 for the sporadic informative prostate cancer (see Example 5) Therefore, one prefeπed haplotype ofthe present invention associated with a familial prostate cancer compπses a biallelic marker selected from the group consisting of A30 (allele T), A41 (allele T), A2 (allele A), A55 (allele C) and A57 (allele G) One more prefeπed haplotype of the present invention associated with a familial prostate cancer comprises a biallelic marker selected from the group consisting of A30 (allele T), A41 (allele T), and A2 (allele A). One still more haplotype ofthe present invention associated with a familial prostate cancer comprises a biallelic marker selected from the group consisting of A30 (allele T), and A41 (allele T). Furthermore, one prefeπed haplotype ofthe present invention associated with a sporadic prostate cancer comprises a biallelic marker selected from the group consisting of A2 (allele T), A55 (allele T), A57 (allele A), A30 (allele T) and A41 (allele T) One more prefeπed haplotype of the present invention associated with a sporadic prostate cancer comprises a biallelic marker selected from the group consisting of A2 (allele T), A41 (allele T), A55 (allele T), A57 (allele A). The permutation tests clearly validated the statistical significance of the association between these haplotypes and the prostate cancer (see Example 5). All these haplotypes can be used m diagnostic of prostate cancer, more particularly either familial prostate cancer or sporadic prostate cancer One can observe that the haplotypes associated to familial cases of prostate cancer are not associated with the sporadic cases of prostate cancer and that the haplotypes associated to the sporadic cases are not associated with the familial cases (see Table 7 of Example 5) Moreover, except the biallelic markers A2, the familial and sporadic cases haplotypes do not present any common biallelic marker. Therefore, the ancestral haplotypes would be different and the causing trait allele would not be the same. This information is extremely valuable. The knowledge of a potential genetic predisposition to prostate cancer, even if this predisposition is not absolute, might contnbute in a very significant manner to treatment efficacy of prostate cancer and to the development of new therapeutic and diagnostic tools. Statistical methods In general, any method known in the art to test whether a trait and a genotype show a statistically significant coπelation may be used 1) Methods In Linkage Analysis Statistical methods and computer programs useful for linkage analysis are well-known to those skilled in the art (see Terwilliger J.D. and Ott J., 1994; Ott J., 1991). 2) Methods To Estimate Haplotype Frequencies In A Population As described above, when genotypes are scored, it is often not possible to distinguish heterozygotes so that haplotype frequencies cannot be easily mfeπed. When the gametic phase is not known, haplotype frequencies can be estimated from the multilocus genotypic data. Any method known to person skilled in the art can be used to estimate haplotype frequencies (see Lange K., 1997; Weir, B.S., 1996) Preferably, maximum-likelihood haplotype frequencies are computed using an Expectation- Maximization (EM) algonthm (see Dempster et al., 1977; Excoffier L. and Slatkin M., 1995) This procedure is an iterative process aiming at obtaining maximum-hkehhood estimates of haplotype frequencies from multi-locus genotype data when the gametic phase is unknown. Haplotype estimations are usually performed by applying the EM algorithm using for example the EM-HAPLO program (Hawley M. E. et al, 1994) or the Arlequin program (Schneider et al., 1997). The EM algorithm is a generalized iterative maximum likelihood approach to estimation and is briefly descnbed below. Please note that in the present section, "Methods To Estimate Haplotype Frequencies In A Population, " of this text, phenotypes will refer to multi-locus genotypes with unknown phase. Genotypes will refer to known-phase multi-locus genotypes. A sample of N unrelated individuals is typed for K markers. The data observed are the unknown-phase K-locus phenotypes that can categorized in F different phenotypes. Suppose that we have H underlying possible haplotypes (in case of K biallelic markers, H=2 K ). For phenotype j, suppose that c, genotypes are possible. We thus have the following equation c , , Pj = Σ pr (genotype ι ) = ∑pr(h k ,h t ) Equation 1 i=\ i=\ where Pj is the probability ofthe phenotypey, h k and h t are the two haplotypes constituent the genotype /. Under the Hardy-Weinberg equilibrium, pr(h h h) becomes: pr(h k , Λ/ ) = pr(h k ) if h k = A/ , pr(h k ,h t ) - 2pr(h k ).pr(h [ ) if h k ≠ hi . Equation 2 The successive steps ofthe E-M algorithm can be described as follows: Starting with initial values of the of haplotypes frequencies, noted _p, (0) , p 0) , p^ , these initial values serve to estimate the genotype frequencies (Expectation step) and then estimate another set of haplotype frequencies (Maximization step), noted p[ l p ] p^ , these two steps are iterated until changes in the sets of haplotypes frequency are very small. A stop cnteπon can be that the maximum difference between haplotype frequencies between two iterations is less than 10 "7 . These values can be adjusted according to the desired precision of estimations. At a given iteration s, the Expectation step consists m calculating the genotypes frequencies by the following equation: pr (genotype ι ) ( y s) ' = p (phenotype : ).pr (genotype ^ iphenotype j ) ( y s) ' _ *j pr(h k ,hι)^ Equation 3 ~ N ' p{ s ) where genotype i occurs in phenotypey, and where h k and hi constitute genotype i. Each probability is derived according to eq. 1, and eq. 2 described above Then the Maximization step simply estimates another set of haplotype frequencies given the genotypes frequencies This approach is also known as the gene-counting method (Smith, 1957). P t ι t . pr (genotype i s > Equation 4 Where δ( t is an indicator variable which count the number of time haplotype t m genotype * It takes the values of 0, 1 or 2 To ensure that the estimation finally obtained is the maximum-hkehhood estimation several values of departures are required. The estimations obtained are compared and if they are different the estimations leading to the best likelihood are kept. 3) Methods To Calculate Linkage Disequilibrium Between Markers A number of methods can be used to calculate linkage disequilibrium between any two genetic positions, m practice linkage disequihbnum is measured by applying a statistical association test to haplotype data taken from a population. Linkage disequilibrium between any pair of biallelic markers comprising at least one ofthe biallelic markers ofthe present invention (M„ M,) having alleles (a,/b,) at marker M, and alleles (a b j ) at marker M, can be calculated for every allele combination (a„a j a„b j b„a j andb„b j ), according to the Piazza formula. Δ a ,a j = Vθ4 - (Θ4 + Θ3) (Θ4 +Θ2), where: Θ4= - - = frequency of genotypes not having allele a, at M, and not having allele a, at M, Θ3= - + - frequency of genotypes not having allele a, at M, and having allele a, at M, Θ2= + - = frequency of genotypes having allele a, at M, and not having allele a, at M, Linkage disequilibrium (LD) between pairs of biallelic markers (M„ M,) can also be calculated for every allele combination (aι,aj_ aι,bj b„a, andb„b,), according to the maximum- hkehhood estimate (MLE) for delta (the composite genotypic disequilibrium coefficient), as descnbed by Weir (Weir B. S., 1996). The MLE for the composite linkage disequihbnum is: Where m = Σ phenotype (a,/a„ a/a,), n 2 = ∑ phenotype (a,/a„ a/b,), n 3 = Σ phenotype (a/b,, a/a^, n4= Σ phenotype (a,/b„ a, b j ) and N is the number of individuals in the sample This formula allows linkage disequilibrium between alleles to be estimated when only genotype, and not haplotype, data are available Another means of calculating the linkage disequihbnum between markers is as follows For a couple of biallelic markers, M, (a/b,) and M } (a/b j ), fitting the Hardy-Wemberg equilibrium, one can estimate the four possible haplotype frequencies in a given population according to the approach described above The estimation of gametic disequihbnum between at and aj is simply D aia j = pr(haplotype(a a ,-)) - pr(a t ).pr(a j) Where pr(aj is the probability of allele a, and pr(a,) is the probability of allele α,and where pr(haplotype (a„ a)) is estimated as in Equation 3 above For a couple of biallelic marker only one measure of disequihbnum is necessary to describe the association between M, and M j Then a normalized value ofthe above is calculated as follows D'auy = D aιaj / max (-pr(a,) pr(a j ) , -pr(b,) pr(b j )) wιth D aιaj <0 D' aιaj = D a , aj / max (pr(b,) pr(a,) , pr(a,) pr(b,)) with D aιaj >0 The skilled person will readily appreciate that other linkage disequilibrium calculation methods can be used Linkage disequilibrium among a set of biallelic markers having an adequate heterozygosity rate can be determined by genotyping between 50 and 1000 unrelated individuals, preferably between 75 and 200, more preferably around 100 4) Testing For Association Methods for determining the statistical significance of a coπelation between a phenotype and a genotype, m this case an allele at a biallelic marker or a haplotype made up of such alleles, may be determined by any statistical test known m the art and with any accepted threshold of statistical significance being required The application of particular methods and thresholds of significance are well with in the skill ofthe ordinary practitioner ofthe art Testing for association is performed by determining the frequency of a biallelic marker allele m case and control populations and comparing these frequencies with a statistical test to determine if their is a statistically significant difference in frequency which would indicate a coπelation between the trait and the biallelic marker allele under study Similarly, a haplotype analysis is performed by estimating the frequencies of all possible haplotypes for a given set of biallelic markers in case and confrol populations, and comparing these frequencies with a statistical test to determine if their is a statistically significant coπelation between the haplotype and the phenotype (trait) under study Any statistical tool useful to test for a statistically significant association between a genotype and a phenotype may be used. Preferably the statistical test employed is a chi-square test with one degree of freedom. A P-value is calculated (the P-value is the probability that a statistic as large or larger than the observed one would occur by chance). Statistical Significance In prefeπed embodiments, significance for diagnosis puφoses, either as a positive basis for further diagnostic tests or as a preliminary starting point for early preventive therapy, the p value related to a biallelic marker association is preferably about 1 x 10 " or less, more preferably about 1 x 10 " or less, for a single biallelic marker analysis and about 1 x 10 "3 or less, still more preferably 1 x 10 6 or less and most preferably of about 1 x 10 "8 or less, for a haplotype analysis involving two or more markers. These values are believed to be applicable to any association studies involving single or multiple marker combinations The skilled person can use the range of values set forth above as a starting point in order to carry out association studies with biallelic markers ofthe present invention En doing so, significant associations between the biallelic markers of the present invention and prostate cancer, the level of aggressiveness of prostate cancer tumors, an early onset of prostate cancer, or a beneficial response to or side effects related to treatment against prostate cancer can be revealed and used for diagnosis and drug screening puφoses. Phenotypic Permutation In order to confirm the statistical significance of the first stage haplotype analysis descnbed above, it might be suitable to perform further analyses m which genotyping data from case-control individuals are pooled and randomized with respect to the trait phenotype. Each individual genotyping data is randomly allocated to two groups, which contain the same number of individuals as the case-control populations used to compile the data obtained in the first stage. A second stage haplotype analysis is preferably run on these artificial groups, preferably for the markers included m the haplotype ofthe first stage analysis showing the highest relative risk coefficient. This expenment is reiterated preferably at least between 100 and 10000 times. The repeated iterations allow the determination ofthe probability to obtain by chance the tested haplotype Assessment Of Statistical Association To address the problem of false positives similar analysis may be performed with the same case-control populations m random genomic regions. Results in random regions and the candidate region are compared as descnbed in a co-pendmg US Provisional Patent Application entitled "Methods, Software And Apparati For Identifying Genomic Regions Harboring A Gene Associated With A Detectable Trait," U.S. Serial Number 60/107,986, filed November 10, 1998. 5) Evaluation Of Risk Factors The association between a πsk factor (m genetic epidemiology the πsk factor is the presence or the absence of a certain allele or haplotype at marker loci) and a disease is measured by the odds ratio (OR) and by the relative risk (RR). If P(R + ) is the probability of developing the disease for individuals with R and P(R ) is the probability for individuals without the nsk factor, then the relative nsk is simply the ratio ofthe two probabilities, that is RR= P(R + )/P(R ) In case-control studies, direct measures of the relative πsk cannot be obtained because of the sampling design However, the odds ratio allows a good approximation ofthe relative nsk for low- incidence diseases and can be calculated. OR= (F7(l-F T ))/(F /(l-F )) F + is the frequency of the exposure to the nsk factor m cases and F is the frequency of the exposure to the πsk factor in controls F + and F are calculated using the allelic or haplotype frequencies of the study and further depend on the underlying genetic model (dominant, recessive, additive...) One can further estimate the attributable risk (AR) which descnbes the proportion of individuals in a population exhibiting a trait due to a given πsk factor This measure is important in quantifying the role of a specific factor in disease etiology and in terms ofthe public health impact of a risk factor The public health relevance of this measure lies in estimating the proportion of cases of disease in the population that could be prevented if the exposure of interest were absent AR is determined as follows: AR = P E (RR-1) / (P E (RR-1)+1) AR is the πsk attributable to a biallelic marker allele or a biallelic marker haplotype. P E is the frequency of exposure to an allele or a haplotype withm the population at large; and RR is the relative risk which, is approximated with the odds ratio when the trait under study has a relatively low incidence in the general population Identification Of Biallelic Markers In Linkage Disequilibrium With The PCTA-1 - Related Biallelic Markers Once an association has been demonstrated between a given biallelic marker and a trait, the discovery of additional biallelic markers associated to trait and m linkage disequilibrium with one of the biallelic markers disclosed herein can easily be caπied out by the skilled person. The present invention then also concerns biallelic markers in linkage disequihbnum with the specific biallelic markers descnbed above, more particularly with biallelic markers Al to A 125, and which are expected to present similar characteπstics in terms of their respective association with a given trait. Hence, once linkage disequihbnum has been demonstrated between a trait and a given biallelic marker, all the biallelic markers shown to be in linkage disequilibrium with the given biallelic marker are expected to present similar characteristics m terms of their respective association with a given trait. The discovery of additional biallelic markers associated with this trait is of great interest in order to increase the density of biallelic markers in this particular region because the causal mutation will be found in the vicinity ofthe marker or set of markers showing the highest coπelation with the trait These additional markers which can be identified and sequenced by the skilled person using the teachings ofthe present application also fall within the scope of the present invention The invention also concerns a method for the identification and characteπzation of a biallelic marker in linkage disequihbnum with a biallelic marker ofthe PCTA-1 gene, preferably a biallelic marker of the PCTA-1 gene of which one allele is associated with a trait. In one embodiment, the biallelic marker ofthe PCTA-1 gene is outside ofthe PCTA-1 gene itself. In another embodiment, the biallelic marker in linkage disequihbnum with a biallelic marker of the PCTA-1 gene is itself located withm the PCTA-1 gene. The method comprises the following steps, (a) amplifying a genomic fragment, preferably comprising a first biallelic marker, from a plurality of individuals; (b) identifying second biallelic markers in said amplified portion, (c) conducting a linkage disequilibrium analysis between said first biallelic marker and second biallelic markers; and, (d) identifying second biallelic markers in linkage disequilibrium with said first marker Subcombmations comprising steps (b) and (c) are also contemplated Optionally, the first biallelic marker is selected from the group consisting of Al to A 125 and the complements thereof Preferably, the first biallelic marker is selected from the group consisting of A2, A30, A41, A55, A57 and the complements thereof. Methods to identify biallelic markers and to conduct linkage disequihbnum analysis are described herein and can be caπied out by the skilled person without undue experimentation Once identified, the sequences in linkage disequihbnum with a biallelic marker ofthe PCTA-1 gene may be used in any of the methods described herein, including methods for determining an association between a biallelic marker and a trait, methods for identifying individuals having a predisposition for a trait, methods of administration of prophylactic or therapeutic agents disease treatment, methods of identifying individuals likely to respond positively or negatively to said agents, and methods of using drugs and vaccines. An example of identification of additional biallelic markers associated to a trait based on the previous knowledge ofthe localization of a first marker associated to a given trait is given below. Biallelic markers in linkage disequilibrium with a particular marker :Apo E4 The following example relating to the identification of markers in linkage disequihbnum with the apoE4 allele is representative of the procedures ofthe present invention in which markers m LD with a target gene are identified. 3 major isoforms of human apohpoprotem E (apoE2, -E3, and - E4) have been identified by lsoelectπc focusing and are coded for by 3 alleles (ε 2, 3, and 4) ofthe Apo E gene. As ongmally reported by Stπttmatter et al. and by Saunders et al. m 1993, the Apo E ε 4 allele is strongly associated with both late-onset familial and sporadic Alzheimer's Disease (AD). Biallelic markers in linkage disequihbnum with the Apo E ε4 allele were identified. This 5 example is illustrative of the general pπnciple that the generation of biallelic markers associated with a trait leads to markers in linkage disequihbnum with any biallelic marker already known to be associated with the trait. An Apo E marker was used to screen the human genomic BAC library. A BAC, which gave a unique hybridization signal on chromosomal region 19ql3.2.3 by FISH, was selected for finding 10 biallelic markers This BAC contained an insert of 205 kb that was subcloned Fifty BAC subclones were randomly selected and sequenced. Twenty-five subclone sequences were selected and used to design twenty-five couples of PCR pnmers that allowed amphcons of approximately 500 bp to be generated. These PCR primers were then used to amplify the coπespondmg genomic sequences in a 15 pool of DNA from 100 individuals (French on gin, blood donors) as already descnbed. Amplification products from pooled DNA were sequenced and analyzed for the presence of biallelic polymoφhisms using the software descnbed herein. Five amphcons were shown to contain a polymoφhic base in the pool of 100 individuals, and therefore these polymoφhisms (99-366/274; 99-344/439; 99-365/344; 99-359/308; 99-355/219) were selected as the random biallelic markers m 20 the vicinity ofthe Apo E gene. An additional couple of primers was designed that allowed amplification ofthe genomic fragment carrying the already known polymoφhism of Apo E, (99-2452/54 C/T). An association study was then performed. As expected, there was a clear association between Alzheimer disease (AD) and the known Apo E4 polymoφhism (biallelic marker 99- 25 2452/54), the C allele frequency being increased in 26 % in the AD case population studied compared to the AD control population analyzed (pvalue of this difference = 2xl0 "2! ). In addition, the association study with the random markers generated in the vicinity ofthe Apo E gene showed that the biallelic marker 99-365/344 C/T is also associated to AD, the T allele frequency being increased of 17 % in the AD case population respect to the AD control population 30 under study (pvalue of this allele frequency difference = 7x10 "10 ). Thus individuals who possess a T allele at the biallelic marker 99-365/344 are at risk of developing AD Among the biallelic markers generated m the Apo E region, 99-365/344 is in LD with the previously known Apo E4 marker 99-2452/54. The linkage disequilibrium is detected in a control population (LD value = 0.08) and is clearly increased in the AD case population (LD = 0.21). Hence 35 the generated biallelic marker which are associated with Alzheimer's disease, namely the biallelic marker 99-365, is in linkage disequilibrium with the biallelic marker 99-2452 already known to be associated with this disease Identification Of A Trait Causing Mutation In The PCTA-1 Gene If a statistically significant association with a trait is identified for at least one or more ofthe analyzed PCTA-1 -related biallelic markers, one can assume that: either the associated allele is directly responsible for causing the trait, or more likely the associated allele is m linkage disequilibrium with the trait causing allele. More probably, the trait causing mutation would be found near to the associated biallelic markers. Mutations in the PCTA-1 gene which are responsible for a detectable phenotype may be identified by comparing the sequences ofthe PCTA-1 gene from trait positive and trait negative individuals. Preferably, trait positive individuals to be sequenced carry a single marker allele or a haplotype shown to be associated to the trait and trait negative individuals to be sequenced do not carry such allele or haplotype associated to the trait. The detectable phenotype may comprise cancer, preferably prostate cancer, a response to or side effects related to a prophylactic or curative agent acting against prostate cancer, the aggressiveness of prostate cancer tumors, expression ofthe PCTA-1 gene, a modified or forthcoming production ofthe PCTA-1 protein, or the production of a modified PCTA-1 protein. The mutations may comprise point mutations, deletions, or insertions in the PCTA-1 gene These mutations are called trait causing mutations and are at least partly responsible for a particular detectable phenotype m an individual. The mutations may he withm the coding sequence for the PCTA-1 protein or withm mtromc and/or within regulatory regions in the PCTA-1 gene, including splice sites, 5' UTRs, 3' UTRs and promoter sequences, including one or more transcnption factor binding sites. A further embodiment ofthe invention is a method to identify a trait causing mutation in the PCTA-1 gene pursuant to the detection of an association between alleles of one or several of the biallelic markers ofthe present invention and a particular trait. This method comprises the following steps - amplifying a region ofthe PCTA-1 gene comprising a biallelic marker or a group of biallelic markers associated to the considered trait from DNA samples of trait positive and trait negative individuals; - sequencing the amplified region; - comparing DNA sequences from trait positive and trait negative individuals; and - determining mutations specific to trait positive patients. In some embodiments, the amplified region is a region located close to a biallelic marker of PCTA-1 gene. In further embodiments, the amplified region is located close to one or more of the biallelic markers Al to A125 and the complements thereof. In a prefeπed embodiment, the amplified region is located close to one or more of the biallelic markers A2, A30, A41, A55, A57 and the complements thereof. Oligonucleotide pnmers are constructed as descnbed previously to amplify the sequences of each of the exons, mtrons, the promoter region and the regulatory regions of the PCTA-1 gene Amplification is earned out on genomic DNA samples from trait positive patients and trait negative controls, preferably using the PCR conditions descnbed in the examples Amplification products from the genomic PCRs are then subjected to sequencing, preferably through automated dideoxy terminator sequencing reactions and elecfrophoresed, preferably on ABI 377 sequencers. Following gel image analysis and DNA sequence extraction, ABI sequence data are automatically analyzed to detect the presence of sequence variations among trait positive and trait negative individuals Sequences are veπfϊed by determining the sequences of both DNA strands for each individual. Candidate polymoφhisms suspected of being responsible for the detectable phenotype, are then veπfied by screening a larger population of trait positive and trait negative individuals using polymoφhism analysis techniques such as the techniques described above Polymoφhisms which exhibit a statistically significant coπelation with the detectable phenotype are deemed responsible for the detectable phenotype. The invention also concerns a mutated PCTA-1 gene comprising a trait causing mutation, and particularly the mutated genes obtained by the process descnbed above A mutated PCTA-1 gene can be defined as a gene encoding either a modified or native PCTA-1 protein through a nucleotide sequence which is different from the nucleotide sequence of the PCTA-1 gene found in a majoπty of trait negative individuals. The region ofthe PCTA-1 gene containing the mutation responsible for the detectable phenotype may be used in diagnostic techniques such as those descnbed below For example, microsequencmg ohgonucleotides, or ohgonucleotides containing the mutation responsible for the detectable phenotype for amplification, or hybndization based diagnostics, such as those descnbed herein, may be used for detecting individuals suffenng from the detectable phenotype or individuals at πsk of developing the detectable phenotype at a subsequent time In addition, the PCTA-1 allele responsible for the detectable phenotype may be used in gene therapy The PCTA-1 allele responsible for the detectable phenotype may also be cloned into an expression vector to express the mutant PCTA-1 protein as described herein Biallelic Markers Of The Invention In Methods Of Genetic Diagnostics The biallelic markers of the present invention can also be used to develop diagnostics tests capable of identifying individuals who express a detectable trait as the result of a specific genotype or individuals whose genotype places them at πsk of developing a detectable trait at a subsequent time. The trait analyzed using the present diagnostics may be any detectable trait, including susceptibility to cancer, preferably prostate cancer, the level of aggressiveness of prostate cancer tumors, an early onset of prostate cancer, a beneficial response to or side effects related to treatment against prostate cancer. Information resulting from single marker association and for haplotype analyses is extremely valuable as it can, m certain circumstances, be used to initiate preventive treatments or to allow an individual carrying a significant haplotype to foresee warning signs such as minor symptoms In diseases such as prostate cancer, m which metastasis can be fatal if not stopped in time, the knowledge of a potential predisposition, might contribute in a very significant manner to treatment efficacy Similarly, a diagnosed predisposition to a potential side-effect could immediately direct the physician toward a treatment for which such side-effects have not been observed during clinical tnals The invention concerns a method for the detection in an individual of alleles oi PCTA-1 - related biallelic markers associated with a trait preferably selected from prostate cancer, an early onset of prostate cancer, a susceptibility to prostate cancer, the level of aggressiveness of prostate cancer tumors, or the level of expression ofthe PCTA-1 gene The information obtained using this method is useful in the diagnosis, staging, monitoring, prognosis and/or prophylactic or curative therapy of prostate cancer The method also concerns the detection of specific alleles present withm the PCTA-1 gene expressing a modified level oi PCTA-1 mRNA or an altered PCTA-1 mRNA, coding for an altered PCTA-1 protein The identities of the polymoφhic bases may be determined using any of the genotyping procedures described above in "Method For Genotyping An Individual For Biallelic Markers" More particularly, the invention concerns the detection oi a PCTA-1 nucleic acid comprising at least one ofthe nucleotide sequences of PI to PI 25 and the complementary sequence thereof This method compπses the following steps - obtaining a nucleic acid sample from the individual to be tested, and - determining the presence in the sample of an allele of a biallelic marker or of a group of biallelic markers ofthe PCTA-1 gene which, when taken alone or m combination with another/other biallelic marker/s of the PCTA-1 gene, is indicative of prostate cancer, of an early onset of prostate cancer, of the level of aggressiveness of prostate cancer tumors, of a modified or forthcoming expression of the PCTA-1 gene, of a modified or forthcoming production of the PCTA-1 protein, or of the production of a modified PCTA-1 protein In some embodiments, the biallelic marker comprises at least one of the biallelic markers defined by the sequences PI to PI 25, and the complementary sequences thereto, more preferably at least one biallelic marker selected from the group consisting of Al to A125, and the complements thereof, or optionally the biallelic markers m linkage disequihbnum therewith In a prefeπed embodiment, the biallelic marker comprises at least one ofthe biallelic markers defined by the sequences of P2, P30, P41, P55, P57, and the complementary sequence thereto, more particularly at least one biallelic marker selected from the group consisting of A2, A30, A41, A55, A57 and the complement thereof In a prefeπed embodiment, the detection method comprises an additional step of amplifying a nucleotide sequence ofthe PCTA-1 gene comprising biallelic markers Optionally, the amplification pnmers can be selected from the group consisting of Bl to B47 and CI to C47 En prefeπed embodiments ofthe detection method descnbed above, the presence of alleles of one or more biallelic markers ofthe PCTA-1 gene is determined through microsequencmg reactions. Optionally, the microsequencmg pnmers are selected from the group consisting of DI to D125 and El to El 25. Optionally, the microsequencmg primers can be bound to a solid support, preferably m the form of aπays of pnmers attached to appropnate chips or be used in microfluidic devices. Such aπays are described in further detail in the "Oligonucleotide aπays" section. Optionally, the microsequencmg primers can be labeled In additional prefeπed embodiments ofthe detection method, the presence of alleles of one or more biallelic markers ofthe PCTA-1 gene is determined through an allele specific amplification assay or an enzyme based mismatch detection assay Optionally, the allele specific amplification assay comprises a step of detecting the presence of the amplification product In further prefeπed embodiments of the detection method, the presence of alleles of one or more biallelic markers ofthe PCTA-1 gene is determined through a hybridization assay. The probes used m the hybridization assay may include a probe selected m the group consisting of PI to PI 25, a complementary sequence thereto or a fragment thereof, said fragment comprising the polymoφhic base Preferably, the probe is labeled A diagnostic method according to the present invention can also consist on the detection of an allele of the PCTA-1 gene comprising a trait causing mutation. The invention also specifically relates to a method of determining whether an individual suffenng from prostate cancer or susceptible of developing prostate cancer is likely to respond positively to treatment with a selected medicament acting against prostate cancer. The method compπses the following steps. - obtaining a DNA sample from the individual to be tested, and - analyzing said DNA sample to determine whether it comprises alleles of one or more biallelic markers associated with a positive response to treatment with the medicament and/or alleles of one or more biallelic markers associated with a negative response to treatment with the medicament. In a prefeπed embodiment, the biallelic marker is selected from the group consisting of Al to A 125, and the complements thereof, or optionally the biallelic markers in linkage disequihbnum therewith. The detection methods of the present invention can be applied to, for example, the preliminary screening of patient populations suffenng from prostate cancer. This preliminary screening is useful to initiate adequate treatment when needed or to determine and select appropπate patient populations for clinical tnals on new compounds in order to avoid the potential occuπence of specific side effects or to enhance the probability of beneficial patient response. By establishing in advance a homogeneous genotype selection for the population to be tested, the assessment of drug efficacy and or toxicity can be more readily achieved and less hampered by divergences in population response. This approach can yield better therapeutic approaches based on patient population targeting resulting from pharmacogenomics studies. The invention also relates to diagnostic kits useful for determining the presence m a DNA sample of alleles associated with the trait, preferably with prostate cancer, with an early onset of prostate cancer, with the level of aggressiveness of prostate cancer tumors, with a modified or forthcoming expression ofthe PCTA-1 gene, with a modified or forthcoming production ofthe PCTA-1 protein, or with the production of a modified PCTA-1 protein. Diagnostic kits can comprise any of the polynucleotides ofthe present invention. In a first embodiment, the kit comprises primers such as those descnbed above, preferably forward and reverse primers which are used to amplify the PCTA-1 gene or a fragment thereof. In some embodiments, at least one ofthe pnmers is complementary to a nucleotide sequence of the PCTA-1 gene comprising a biallelic marker associated with prostate cancer, with an early onset of prostate cancer, with the level of aggressiveness of prostate cancer tumors, with a modified or forthcoming expression of the PCTA-1 gene, with a modified or forthcoming production ofthe PCTA-1 protein, or with the production of a modified PCTA-1 protein. In one embodiment, the biallelic marker is comprised m one of the sequences PI to PI 25 and the complementary sequences thereto. Optionally, the kit comprises an amplification primer which includes a polymoφhic base of at least one biallelic marker selected from the group consisting of Al to A125 and the complements thereof. In a prefeπed embodiment, the kit comprises one or more ofthe sequences Bl to B47 and CI to C47 In a more prefeπed embodiment, the kit comprises one or more of the sequences Bl, B16, B20, B23, B24 and CI, C16, C20, C23, C24. In a second embodiment, the kit comprises microsequencmg primers, wherein at least one of said pnmers is an oligonucleotide capable of hybridizing, either with the coding or with the non- codmg strand, immediately upstream ofthe polymoφhic base of a biallelic marker selected from the group consisting of Al to A 125 and the complements thereof, preferably those of DI to D 125 and El to E125, more preferably those of D2, D30, D41, D55, D57 and E2, E30, E41, E55, E57. In a third embodiment, the kit comprises a hybndization DNA probe, that is or eventually becomes immobilized on a solid support, which is capable of hybridizing with the PCTA-1 gene or fragment thereof, preferably which is capable of hybπdizing with a region of the PCTA-1 gene which comprises an allele of a biallelic marker ofthe present invention, more preferably an allele associated with prostate cancer, with an early onset of prostate cancer, with a susceptibility to prostate cancer, with the level of aggressiveness of prostate cancer tumors, with a modified or forthcoming expression ofthe PCTA-1 gene, with a modified or forthcoming production ofthe PCTA-1 protein, or with the production of a modified PCTA-1 protein. In a prefeπed embodiment, the probe is selected from the group consisting of PI to PI 25 and the complementary sequences thereto, or a fragment thereof, said fragment comprising the polymoφhic base. In a more prefeπed embodiment, the probe is selected from the group consisting of P2, P30, P41, P55, P57 and the complementary sequences thereto, or a fragment thereof, said fragment comprising the polymoφhic base. The kits of the present invention can also compnse optional elements including appropnate amplification reagents such as DNA polymerases when the kit compnses pnmers, reagents useful in hybridization reactions and reagents useful to reveal the presence of a hybridization reaction between a labeled hybridization probe and the PCTA-1 gene containing at least one biallelic marker. Treatment Of Cancer or Prostate Cancer The invention also concerns methods for the treatment of prostate cancer using an allele of a biallelic marker or of a group of biallelic markers, preferably markers of the PCTA-1 gene, associated with a susceptibility to prostate cancer, with an aggressive form of prostate cancer or with a positive or negative response to treatment with an effective amount of a medicament acting against prostate cancer. As the metastasis of prostate cancer can be fatal, it is important to detect prostate cancer susceptibility of individuals. Consequently, the invention also concerns a method for the treatment of prostate cancer comprising the following steps. - selecting an individual whose DNA comprises alleles of a biallelic marker or of a group of biallelic markers, preferably markers ofthe PCTA-1 gene, associated with prostate cancer; - following up said individual for the appearance (and optionally the development) of tumors in prostate; and - administering an effective amount of a medicament acting against prostate cancer to said individual at an appropnate stage ofthe prostate cancer. In some embodiments, the biallelic marker is comprised in one ofthe sequences PI to PI 25 and the complementary sequences thereto. Preferably the biallelic marker is at least one biallelic marker selected from the group consisting of Al to A 125, and the complements thereof, or optionally the biallelic markers in linkage disequihbnum therewith. In particular embodiments, the individual is selected by genotyping one or more biallelic markers ofthe present invention. The prophylactic administration of a freatment serves to prevent, attenuate or inhibit the growth of cancer cells. Therefore, another embodiment ofthe present invention consists of a method for the treatment of prostate cancer comprising the following steps: - selecting an individual whose DNA comprises alleles of a biallelic marker or of a group of biallelic markers, preferably markers of the PCTA-1 gene, associated with prostate cancer; and - administering to said individual, preferably as a preventive treatment of prostate cancer, an effective amount of a medicament acting against prostate cancer such as 4HPR or of a vaccine composition capable of conferring immunity against PCTA-1 related prostate cancer. In some embodiments, the biallelic marker is compnsed in one ofthe sequences PI to PI 25 and the complementary sequences thereto. Preferably the biallelic marker is at least one biallelic marker selected from the group consisting of Al to A 125, and the complements thereof, or optionally the biallelic markers in linkage disequihbnum therewith. More preferably the biallelic marker is at least one biallelic marker selected from the group consisting of A2, A30, A41, A55, A57, and the complements thereof, or optionally the biallelic markers in linkage disequilibrium therewith. In particular embodiments, the individual is selected by genotyping one or more biallelic markers of the present invention In a further embodiment, the present invention concerns a method for the treatment of prostate cancer comprising the following steps: - selecting an individual whose DNA compnses alleles of a biallelic marker or of a group of biallelic markers, preferably markers of the PCTA-1 gene, associated with a susceptibility prostate cancer; - administering to said individual, as a preventive treatment of prostate cancer, an effective amount of a medicament acting against prostate cancer such as 4HPR or of a vaccine composition capable of conferπng immunity against PCTA-1 -related prostate cancer; - following up said individual for the appearance and the development of tumors in prostate, and optionally - administering an effective amount of a medicament acting against prostate cancer to said individual at the appropπate stage ofthe prostate cancer. In some embodiments, the biallelic marker is comprised in one ofthe sequences PI to PI 25 and the complementary sequences thereto. Preferably the biallelic marker is at least one biallelic marker selected from the group consisting of Al to A 125, and the complements thereof, or optionally the biallelic markers m linkage disequihbnum therewith. More preferably the biallelic marker is at least one biallelic marker selected from the group consisting of A2, A30, A41, A55, A57, and the complements thereof, or optionally the biallelic markers in linkage disequihbnum therewith. In particular embodiments, the individual is selected by genotypmg one or more biallelic markers of the present invention. To enlighten the choice of the appropriate beginning ofthe treatment of prostate cancer, the present invention also concerns a method for the treatment of prostate cancer comprising the following steps: - selecting an individual suffering from a prostate cancer whose DNA comprises alleles of a biallelic marker or of a group of biallelic markers, preferably markers of the PCTA-1 gene, associated with the aggressiveness of prostate cancer tumors; and - admmistenng an effective amount of a medicament acting against prostate cancer to said individual. In some embodiments, the biallelic marker is comprised in one ofthe sequences PI to PI 25 and the complementary sequences thereto. Preferably the biallelic marker is at least one biallelic marker selected from the group consisting of Al to A125, and the complements thereof, or optionally the biallelic markers in linkage disequihbnum therewith. More preferably the biallelic marker is at least one biallelic marker selected from the group consisting of A2, A30, A41, A55, A57, and the complements thereof, or optionally the biallelic markers in linkage disequilibrium therewith In particular embodiments, the individual is selected by genotyping one or more biallelic markers ofthe present invention The invention concerns a method of determining whether a subject is likely to respond positively to treatment with a selected medicament acting against prostate cancer The invention also concerns a method for the treatment of prostate cancer in a selected population of individuals The method comprises - selecting an individual suffering from prostate cancer and - whose DNA compπses alleles of a biallelic marker or of a group of biallelic markers, preferably markers of the PCTA-1 gene, associated with a positive response to freatment with an effective amount of a medicament acting against prostate cancer, - and or whose DNA does not comprise alleles of a biallelic marker or of a group of biallelic markers, preferably markers of the PCTA-1 gene, associated with a negative response to freatment with said medicament, and - administering at suitable intervals an effective amount of said medicament to said selected individual In some embodiments, the biallelic marker is comprised in one of the sequences PI to PI 25 and the complementary sequences thereto Preferably the biallelic marker is at least one biallelic marker selected from the group consisting of Al to A 125, and the complements thereof, or optionally the biallelic markers in linkage disequihbnum therewith En particular embodiments, the individual is selected by genotyping one or more biallelic markers of the present invention Another aspect ofthe invention is a method of using a medicament acting against prostate cancer The method compπses obtaining a DNA sample from a subject, determining whether the DNA sample contains one or more biallelic markers associated with a positive response to the medicament and/or whether the DNA sample contains one or more biallelic markers associated with a negative response to the medicament, and admmistenng the medicament to the subject if the DNA sample contains one or more biallelic markers associated with a positive response to the medicament and or if the DNA sample lacks one or more biallelic markers associated with a negative response to the medicament The invention also concerns a method for the clinical testing of a medicament, preferably a medicament acting against prostate cancer In some embodiments, the medicament may be administered to the subject in a clinical trial if the DNA sample contains alleles of one or more biallelic markers associated with a positive response to treatment with the medicament and/or if the DNA sample lacks alleles of one or more biallelic markers associated with a negative response to treatment with the medicament In prefeπed embodiments, the medicament is a drug acting against prostate cancer In other embodiments, the biallelic marker is selected from the group consisting of Al to A 125 and the complements thereof or optionally the biallelic markers in linkage disequihbnum therewith. Using the method of the present invention, the evaluation of drug efficacy may be conducted in a population of individuals likely to respond favorably to the medicament. The invention also concerns a method for the clinical testing of a medicament, preferably a medicament acting against prostate cancer. The method comprises the following steps: - administering a medicament, preferably a medicament susceptible of acting against prostate cancer to a heterogeneous population of individuals, - identifying a first population of individuals who respond positively to said medicament and a second population of individuals who respond negatively to said medicament; - identifying biallelic markers in said first population which are associated with a positive response to said medicament; - selecting individuals whose DNA comprises biallelic markers associated with a positive response to said medicament, and - administering said medicament to said individuals Such methods are deemed to be extremely useful to increase the benefit/πsk ratio resulting from the administration of medicaments which may cause undesirable side effects and/or be inefficacious to a portion of the patient population to which it is normally administered. Once an individual has been diagnosed as suffering from a prostate cancer, selection tests are caπied out to determine whether the DNA of this individual compπses alleles of a biallelic marker or of a group of biallelic markers associated with a positive response to treatment or with a negative response to treatment which may include either side effects or unresponsiveness. The selection ofthe patient to be treated using the method ofthe present invention can be caπied out through the detection methods described above The individuals which are to be selected are preferably those whose DNA does not comprise alleles of a biallelic marker or of a group of biallelic markers associated with a negative response to treatment. The knowledge of an individual's genetic predisposition to unresponsiveness or side effects to particular medicaments allows the clinician to direct treatment toward appropπate drugs against prostate cancer. Once the patient's genetic predispositions have been determined, the clinician can select appropriate treatment for which negative response, particularly side effects, has not been reported or has been reported only marginally for the patient Recombinant Vectors The term "vector" is used herein to designate either a circular or a linear DNA or RNA molecule, which is either double-stranded or s gle-stranded, and which comprise at least one polynucleotide of interest that is sought to be transfeπed m a cell host or in a unicellular or multicellular host organism. Another embodiment ofthe present invention is a recombinant vector. This recombinant vector compπses a nucleotide sequence encoding a regulatory region of the PCTA-1 gene, the promoter region ofthe PCTA-1 gene, an intron of the PCTA-1 gene, exon 0 and/or exon 1 ofthe PCTA-1 gene, exon 6bιs of the PCTA-1 gene, exon 9bιs ofthe PCTA-1 gene, the genomic sequence of the PCTA-1 gene, a cDNA sequence ofthe PCTA-1 gene, or combinations of such sequences, or complementary sequences thereto or fragments or variants thereof. Prefeπed nucleotide sequences included in such an expression vector include at least one nucleotide sequence selected from the group consisting of SEQ TD Nos 1, 2, 3, 4, 8 or fragments or vaπants thereof or a complementary sequence thereto. Generally, a recombinant vector of the invention may comprise any ofthe polynucleotides described herein, including regulatory sequences and coding sequences, as well as any PCTA-1 primer or probe as defined above. More particularly, the recombinant vectors of the present invention can comprise any of the polynucleotides described in the "PCTA-1 cDNA Sequences" section, the "Coding Regions" section, and the "Oligonucleotide Probes And Primers" section. In another embodiment, the vector includes a PCTA-1 gene or cDNA or a fragment thereof comprising at least one ofthe biallelic markers described herein, and more preferably a mutated PCTA-1 gene or cDNA comprising a trait causing mutation, particularly a mutation determined using the method descnbed above. Preferably, the biallelic marker is selected from the group consisting of Al to A 125 and the complements thereof, or optionally the biallelic markers in linkage disequilibrium therewith. One embodiment of the invention is the production of a PCTA-1 protein under the control of its own promoter or of an exogenous promoter. The present invention also relates to expression vectors which include nucleic acids encoding a native or mutated PCTA-1 protein under the control of either a native PCTA-1 regulatory region, preferably a native PCTA-1 promoter which comprises at least one of the biallelic markers of the present invention, more particularly at least one among the Al to A43 and the complements thereof, or an exogenous promoter More particularly, the present invention relates to expression vectors which include nucleic acids encoding a PCTA-1 protein, preferably a PCTA-1 protein comprising a ammo acid sequence selected from the group consisting of SEQ TD Nos 5, 6, 7, 9 or variants or fragments thereof, under the control of a regulatory sequence selected among the PCTA-1 regulatory polynucleotides, or alternatively under the control of an exogenous regulatory sequence. The present invention also concerns an expression vector comprising a PCTA-1 regulatory region or any sequence thereof of 10 to 3000 nucleotides capable of regulating the expression of a nucleotide sequence encoding a protein and operably linked to the regulatory region. A further prefeπed regulatory region is the promoter sequence. In this regard, it is to be noted that a portion of the promoter can be used in the expression vector as long as it can influence the transcnption ofthe coding sequence operably linked thereto. Any nucleotide sequence encoding a polypeptide of interest can be included m an expression vector comprising a PCTA-1 regulatory region and operably linked thereto Prefeπed polypeptides are therapeutic proteins which are described further detail later on In some embodiments, expression vectors are employed to express a PCTA-1 polypeptide which can be then punfied and, for example be used in ligand screening assays or as an immunogen in order to raise specific antibodies directed against a PCTA-1 protein In other embodiments, the expression vectors are used for constructing transgenic animals and also for gene therapy Some of the elements which can be found in the vectors ofthe present invention are described in further detail in the following sections 1. General features of the expression vectors of the invention A recombinant vector according to the invention compπses, but is not limited to, a YAC (Yeast Artificial Chromosome), a BAC (Bacterial Artificial Chromosome), a phage, a phagemid, a cosmid, a plasmid or even a linear DNA molecule which may consist of a chromosomal, non- chromosomal, semi -synthetic or synthetic DNA Such a recombinant vector can comprise a transcriptional unit comprising an assembly of (1) a genetic element or elements having a regulatory role in gene expression, for example promoters or enhancers Enhancers are cis-actmg elements of DNA, usually from about 10 to 300 bp m length that act on the promoter to increase the transcription (2) a structural or coding sequence which is transcnbed into mRNA and eventually translated into a polypeptide, said structural or coding sequence being operably linked to the regulatory elements described m (1), and (3) appropnate transcnption initiation and termination sequences Structural units intended for use in yeast or eukaryotic expression systems preferably include a leader sequence enabling extracellular secretion of translated protein by a host cell Alternatively, when a recombinant protein is expressed without a leader or transport sequence, it may include a N-termmal residue This residue may or may not be subsequently cleaved from the expressed recombinant protein to provide a final product Generally, recombinant expression vectors will include on gins of replication, selectable markers permitting transformation ofthe host cell, and a promoter denved from a highly expressed gene to direct transcription of a downstream structural sequence The heterologous structural sequence is assembled in appropriate phase with translation initiation and termination sequences, and preferably a leader sequence capable of directing secretion of the translated protein into the peπplasmic space or the extracellular medium In a specific embodiment wherein the vector is adapted for fransfectmg and expressing desired sequences in mammalian host cells, prefeπed vectors will comprise an origin of replication m the desired host, a suitable promoter and enhancer, and also any necessary πbosome binding sites, polyadenylation site, splice donor and acceptor sites, transcriptional termination sequences, and 5 '-flanking non-transcribed sequences. DNA sequences derived from the SV40 viral genome, for example SV40 ongin, early promoter, enhancer, splice and polyadenylation sites may be used to provide the required non-transcribed genetic elements. The in vivo expression of a PCTA-1 polypeptide may be useful m order to coπect a genetic defect related to the expression ofthe native gene m a host organism or to the production of a biologically inactive PCTA-1 protein. Consequently, the present invention also deals with recombinant expression vectors mainly designed for the in vivo production of a PCTA-1 polypeptide of SEQ TD Nos 5, 6, 7, 9 or fragments or variants thereof by the introduction of the appropnate genetic matenal in the organism of the patient to be treated. This genetic material may be introduced in vitro in a cell that has been previously exfracted from the organism, the modified cell being subsequently remtroduced in the said organism, directly in vivo into the appropπate tissue. 2. Regulatory Elements Promoters The suitable promoter regions used in the expression vectors according to the present invention are chosen taking into account the cell host in which the heterologous gene has to be expressed. The particular promoter employed to control the expression of a nucleic acid sequence of interest is not believed to be important, so long as it is capable of directing the expression ofthe nucleic acid in the targeted cell. Thus, where a human cell is targeted, it is preferable to position the nucleic acid coding region adjacent to and under the control of a promoter that is capable of being expressed m a human cell, such as, for example, a human or a viral promoter. A suitable promoter may be heterologous with respect to the nucleic acid for which it controls the expression or alternatively can be endogenous to the native polynucleotide containing the coding sequence to be expressed. Additionally, the promoter is generally heterologous with respect to the recombinant vector sequences withm which the construct promoter/coding sequence has been inserted. Promoter regions can be selected from any desired gene using, for example, CAT (chloramphemcol transferase) vectors and more preferably pKK232-8 and pCM7 vectors. Prefeπed bacteπal promoters are the Lad, LacZ, the T3 or T7 bacteπophage RNA polymerase promoters, the gpt, lambda PR, PL and frp promoters (EP 0036776), the polyhedπn promoter, or the plO protein promoter from baculovirus (Kit Novagen) (Smith et al., 1983; O'Reilly et al., 1992), the lambda PR promoter or also the trc promoter. Eukaryotic promoters include CMV immediate early, HSV thymidine k ase, early and late SV40, LTRs from retrovirus, and mouse metallothionme-L. Selection of a convenient vector and promoter is well withm the level of ordinary skill in the art. The choice of a promoter is well within the ability of a person skilled in the field of genetic engineeπng. For example, one may refer to the book of Sambrook et al.(1989) or also to the procedures described by Fuller et al.(1996). Other Regulatory Elements Where a cDNA insert is employed, one will typically desire to include a polyadenylation signal to effect proper polyadenylation ofthe gene franscπpt. The nature ofthe polyadenylation signal is not believed to be crucial to the successful practice ofthe invention, and any such sequence may be employed such as human growth hormone and SV40 polyadenylation signals. Also contemplated as an element of the expression cassette is a terminator. These elements can serve to enhance message levels and to minimize read through from the cassette into other sequences The vector containing the appropπate DNA sequence as descnbed above, more preferably PCTA-1 gene regulatory polynucleotide, a polynucleotide encoding a PCTA-1 polypeptide selected from the group consisting of SEQ TD No 1 or a fragment or a vanant thereof and SEQ ED Nos 2, 3, 4, 8, or both of them, can be utilized to transform an appropriate host to allow the expression ofthe desired polypeptide or polynucleotide 3. Selectable Markers Such markers would confer an identifiable change to the cell permitting easy identification of cells containing the expression construct The selectable marker genes for selection of transformed host cells are preferably dihydrofolate reductase or neomycm resistance for eukaryotic cell culture, TRPl for S cerevisiae or tetracychne, πfampicm or ampicill resistance in E coli, or levan saccharase for mycobactena, this latter marker being a negative selection marker. 4. Preferred Vectors. Bacterial Vectors As a representative but non-hmitmg example, useful expression vectors for bacterial use can comprise a selectable marker and a bacterial origin of replication denved from commercially available plasmids comprising genetic elements of pBR322 (ATCC 37017) Such commercial vectors include, for example, pKK223-3 (Pharmacia, Uppsala, Sweden), and GEM1 (Promega Biotec, Madison, WI, USA). Large numbers of other suitable vectors are known to those of skill m the art, and commercially available, such as the following bacteπal vectors: pQE70, pQE60, pQE-9 (Qiagen), pbs, pDIO, phagescπpt, psιX174, pbluescπpt SK, pbsks, pNH8A, pNH16A, pNH18A, pNH46A (Stratagene); ptrc99a, pKK223-3, pKK233-3, pDR540, pRIT5 (Pharmacia); pWLNEO, pSV2CAT, pOG44, pXTl, pSG (Stratagene); pSVK3, pBPV, pMSG, pSVL (Pharmacia); pQE-30 (QIAexpress). Bacteriophage Vectors The PI bacteriophage vector may contain large inserts ranging from about 80 to about 100 kb. The construction of PI bacteriophage vectors such as pl58 or pl58/neo8 are notably described by Stemberg (1994). Recombinant PI clones comprising PCTA-1 nucleotide sequences may be designed for inserting large polynucleotides of more than 40 kb (Lmton et al., 1993). To generate PI DNA for transgenic expenments, a prefeπed protocol is the protocol descnbed by McCormick et al.(1994). Bnefly, E coli (preferably strain NS3529) harbonng the PI plasmid are grown overnight in a suitable broth medium containing 25 μg ml of kanamycin. The PI DNA is prepared from the E. coli by alkaline lysis using the Qiagen Plasmid Maxi kit (Qiagen, Chatsworth, CA, USA), according to the manufacturer's instructions. The PI DNA is purified from the bacterial lysate on two Qiagen-tip 500 columns, using the washing and elution buffers contained in the kit. A phenol/chloroform extraction is then performed before precipitating the DNA with 70% ethanol. After solubihzmg the DNA TE (10 mM Tπs-HCl, pH 7 4, 1 mM EDTA), the concenfration of the DNA is assessed by spectrophotometry. When the goal is to express a PI clone comprising PCTA-1 nucleotide sequences in a transgenic animal, typically in transgenic mice, it is desirable to remove vector sequences from the PI DNA fragment, for example by cleaving the PI DNA at rare-cutting sites withm the PI polylmker (Sfil, NotT or Sail). The PI insert is then purified from vector sequences on a pulsed-field agarose gel, using methods similar using methods similar to those oπgmally reported for the isolation of DNA from YACs (Schedl et al., 1993a; Peterson et al., 1993). At this stage, the resulting punfied insert DNA can be concentrated, if necessary, on a Milhpore Ultrafree-MC Filter Unit (Millipore, Bedford, MA, USA - 30,000 molecular weight limit) and then dialyzed against microinjection buffer (10 mM Tris-HCl, pH 7.4; 250 μM EDTA) containing 100 mM NaCl, 30 μM spermine, 70 μM spermidine on a microdyalisis membrane (type VS, 0.025 μM from Millipore). The mtactness ofthe purified PI DNA insert is assessed by electrophoresis on 1%> agarose (Sea Kem GTG; FMC Bio-products) pulse-field gel and staining with etmdium bromide. Baculovirus Vectors A suitable vector for the expression of a PCTA-1 polypeptide of SEQ ED Nos 5, 6, 7, 9 or fragments or vanants thereof is a baculovirus vector that can be propagated m insect cells and in insect cell lines. A specific suitable host vector system is the pVL1392/1393 baculovirus transfer vector (Pharmingen) that is used to transfect the SF9 cell line (ATCC N°CRL 1711) which is derived from Spodoptera frugiperda. Other suitable vectors for the expression of a PCTA-1 polypeptide of SEQ TD Nos 5, 6, 7, 9 or fragments or vaπants thereof m a baculovirus expression system include those descnbed by Chai et al.(1993), Vlasak et al.(1983) and Lenhard et al.(1996). Viral Vectors In one specific embodiment, the vector is denved from an adenovirus Prefeπed adenovirus vectors according to the invention are those descnbed by Feldman and Steg (1996) or Ohno et al.(1994). Another prefeπed recombinant adenovirus according to this specific embodiment ofthe present invention is the human adenovirus type 2 or 5 (Ad 2 or Ad 5) or an adenovirus of animal origin ( French patent application N° FR-93.05954) Retrovirus vectors and adeno-associated virus vectors are generally understood to be the recombinant gene delivery systems of choice for the transfer of exogenous polynucleotides in vivo , particularly to mammals, including humans. These vectors provide efficient delivery of genes into cells, and the fransfeπed nucleic acids are stably integrated into the chromosomal DNA of the host Particularly prefeπed retroviruses for the preparation or construction of retroviral in vitro or in vitro gene delivery vehicles of the present invention include retroviruses selected from the group consisting of Mmk-Cell Focus Inducing Virus, Murme Sarcoma Virus, Reticuloendothehosis virus and Rous Sarcoma virus. Particularly prefeπed Muπne Leukemia Viruses include the 4070A and the 1504A viruses, Abelson (ATCC No VR-999), Fπend (ATCC No VR-245), Gross (ATCC No VR-590), Rauscher (ATCC No VR-998) and Moloney Muπne Leukemia Vims (ATCC No VR-190; PCT Application No WO 94/24298). Particularly prefeπed Rous Sarcoma Viruses include Bryan high titer (ATCC Nos VR-334, VR-657, VR-726, VR-659 and VR-728) Other prefeπed retroviral vectors are those described in Roth et al.(1996), PCT Application No WO 93/25234, PCT Application No WO 94/ 06920, Roux et al, 1989, Julan et al, 1992 and Neda et al., 1991. Yet another viral vector system that is contemplated by the invention consists in the adeno- associated virus (AAV). The adeno-associated virus is a naturally occurnng defective virus that requires another virus, such as an adenovirus or a heφes virus, as a helper virus for efficient replication and a productive life cycle (Muzyczka et al., 1992). It is also one of the few viruses that may integrate its DNA into non-dividing cells, and exhibits a high frequency of stable integration (Flotte et al., 1992; Samulski et al., 1989; McLaughlin et al, 1989) One advantageous feature of AAV deπves from its reduced efficacy for transducing pnmary cells relative to transformed cells. BAC Vectors The bacterial artificial chromosome (BAC) cloning system (Shizuya et al., 1992) has been developed to stably maintain large fragments of genomic DNA (100-300 kb) in E coli A prefeπed BAC vector consists of pBeloBACl 1 vector that has been descnbed by Kim et al.(1996). BAC hbranes are prepared with this vector using size-selected genomic DNA that has been partially digested using enzymes that permit hgation into either the Bam HI or HtndϊTT sites m the vector. Flanking these cloning sites are T7 and SP6 RNA polymerase transcnption initiation sites that can be used to generate end probes by either RNA transcnption or PCR methods. After the construction of a BAC library in E coli, BAC DNA is purified from the host cell as a supercoiled circle Converting these circular molecules into a linear form precedes both size determination and introduction ofthe BACs into recipient cells. The cloning site is flanked by two Not I sites, permitting cloned segments to be excised from the vector by Not I digestion. Alternatively, the DNA insert contained in the pBeloBACl 1 vector may be linearized by treatment of the BAC vector with the commercially available enzyme lambda terminase that leads to the cleavage at the unique cosN site, but this cleavage method results in a full length BAC clone containing both the insert DNA and the BAC sequences 5. Delivery Of The Recombinant Vectors In order to effect expression ofthe polynucleotides and polynucleotide constructs of the invention, these constructs must be delivered into a cell. This delivery may be accomplished in vitro, as in laboratory procedures for transforming cell lines, or in vivo or ex vivo, as in the freatment of certain diseases states. One mechanism is viral infection where the expression construct is encapsulated in an infectious viral particle Several non-viral methods for the transfer of polynucleotides into cultured mammalian cells are also contemplated by the present invention, and include, without being limited to, calcium phosphate precipitation (Graham et al., 1973; Chen et al., 1987;), DEAE-dextran (Gopal, 1985), elecfroporation (Tur-Kaspa et al , 1986; Potter et al., 1984), direct micromjection (Harland et al., 1985), DNA-loaded liposomes (Nicolau et al., 1982; Fraley et al., 1979), and receptor-mediate transfection (Wu and Wu, 1987, 1988). Some of these techniques may be successfully adapted for Once the expression polynucleotide has been delivered into the cell, it may be stably integrated into the genome ofthe recipient cell. This integration may be in the cognate location and onentation via homologous recombination (gene replacement) or it may be integrated in a random, non specific location (gene augmentation). In yet further embodiments, the nucleic acid may be stably maintained in the cell as a separate, episomal segment of DNA. Such nucleic acid segments or "episomes" encode sequences sufficient to permit maintenance and replication independent of or in synchronization with the host cell cycle. One specific embodiment for a method for delivering a protein or peptide to the mtenor of a cell of a vertebrate in vivo comprises the step of introducing a preparation comprising a physiologically acceptable earner and a naked polynucleotide operatively coding for the polypeptide of interest into the interstitial space of a tissue comprising the cell, whereby the naked polynucleotide is taken up into the interior of the cell and has a physiological effect This is particularly applicable for transfer in vitro but it may be applied to in vivo as well. Compositions for use in vitro and in vivo comprising a "naked" polynucleotide are described in PCT application N° WO 90/11092 (Vical Inc.) and also in PCT application No. WO 95/11307 (Institut Pasteur, INSERM, Universite d Ottawa) as well as in the articles of Tacson et al (1996) and ofHuygen et al (1996) In still another embodiment of the invention, the transfer of a naked polynucleotide ofthe invention, including a polynucleotide construct ofthe invention, into cells may be proceeded with a particle bombardment (biolistic), said particles being DNA-coated microprojectiles accelerated to a high velocity allowing them to pierce cell membranes and enter cells without killing them, such as described by Klein et al (1987) In a further embodiment, the polynucleotide of the invention may be entrapped in a liposome (Ghosh and Bacchawat, 1991, Wong et al , 1980, Nicolau et al , 1987) In a specific embodiment, the invention provides a composition for the in vivo production of a PCTA-1 protein or polypeptide described herein It compnses a naked polynucleotide operatively coding for this polypeptide, m solution in a physiologically acceptable earner, and suitable for introduction into a tissue to cause cells ofthe tissue to express the said protein or polypeptide The amount of vector to be injected to the desired host organism varies according to the site of injection As an indicative dose, it will be injected between 0,1 and 100 μg ofthe vector in an animal body, preferably a mammal body, for example a mouse body In another embodiment ofthe vector according to the invention, it may be introduced in vitro m a host cell, preferably in a host cell previously harvested from the animal to be treated and more preferably a somatic cell such as a muscle cell In a subsequent step, the cell that has been transformed with the vector coding for the desired PCTA-1 polypeptide or the desired fragment thereof is remtroduced into the animal body m order to deliver the recombinant protein withm the body either locally or systemically Cell Hosts The invention also concerns host cells transformed by one ofthe vectors descnbed above that produce either a heterologous protein, a PCTA-1 protein or fragments thereof encoded by the PCTA-1 gene, preferably compnsing at least one ofthe biallelic polymoφhisms descnbed herein, and more preferably a mutated PCTA-1 gene comprising the trait causing mutation determined using the above -noted method Another object ofthe invention consists of a host cell that has been transformed or transfected with one ofthe polynucleotides described herein, and in particular a polynucleotide either comprising a PCTA-1 regulatory polynucleotide or the coding sequence of a PCTA-1 polypeptide selected from the group consisting of SEQ ED No 1 2, 3, 4, 8 or a fragment or a vanant thereof Also included are host cells that are transformed (prokaryotic cells) or that are transfected (eukaryotic cells) with a recombinant vector such as one of those descnbed above More particularly, the cell hosts ofthe present invention can comprise any ofthe polynucleotides described in the "PCTA-1 cDNA Sequences" section, the "Coding Regions" section, and the "Oligonucleotide Probes And Primers" section. A further recombinant cell host according to the invention comprises a polynucleotide containing a biallelic marker selected from the group consisting of Al to A 125, and the complements thereof. Generally, a recombinant host cell of the invention compπses any one ofthe polynucleotides or the recombinant vectors described herein. Prefeπed host cells used as recipients for the expression vectors ofthe invention are the following: a) Prokaryotic host cells: Escherichia coli strains (I.E.DH5-α strain), Bacillus subtilis, Salmonella typhimurium, and strains from species like Pseudomonas, Streptomyces and Staphylococcus . b) Eukaryotic host cells: HeLa cells (ATCC N°CCL2; N°CCL2.1 ; N°CCL2.2), Cv 1 cells (ATCC N°CCL70), COS cells (ATCC N°CRL1650; N°CRL1651 ), Sf-9 cells (ATCC N°CRL171 1 ), C127 cells (ATCC N° CRL-1 804), 3T3 (ATCC N° CRL-6361 ), CHO (ATCC N° CCL-61), human kidney 293. (ATCC N° 45504; N° CRL-1573) and BHK (ECACC N° 84100501 ; N° 841 1 1301). c) Other mammalian host cells The PCTA-1 gene expression in mammalian, and typically human, cells may be rendered defective, or alternatively it may be proceeded with the insertion oi a PCTA-1 genomic or cDNA sequence with the replacement ofthe PCTA-1 gene counteφart in the genome of an animal cell by a PCTA-1 polynucleotide according to the invention. These genetic alterations may be generated by homologous recombination events using specific DNA constructs that have been previously described. One kind of cell hosts that may be used are mammal zygotes, such as munne zygotes. For example, munne zygotes may undergo micromjection with a purified DNA molecule of interest, for example a purified DNA molecule that has previously been adjusted to a concenfration range from 1 ng/ml -for BAC inserts- 3 ng/μl -for PI bacteriophage inserts- in 10 mM Tris-HCl, pH 7.4, 250 μM EDTA containing 100 mM NaCl, 30 μM spermine, and70 μM spermidine. When the DNA to be micromjected has a large size, polyamines and high salt concentrations can be used in order to avoid mechanical breakage of this DNA, as descnbed by Schedl et al (1993b). Anyone ofthe polynucleotides ofthe invention, including the DNA constructs descnbed herein, may be introduced in an embryonic stem (ES) cell line, preferably a mouse ES cell line. ES cell lines are denved from plunpotent, uncommitted cells of the inner cell mass of pre-implantation blastocysts. Prefeπed ES cell lines are the following: ES-E14TG2a (ATCC n° CRL-1821), ES-D3 (ATCC n° CRL1934 and n° CRL-1 1632), YS001 (ATCC n° CRL-1 1776), 36.5 (ATCC n° CRL- 1 1 116). To maintain ES cells in an uncommitted state, they are cultured in the presence of growth inhibited feeder cells which provide the appropnate signals to preserve this embryonic phenotype and serve as a matrix for ES cell adherence. Prefeπed feeder cells consist of pnmary embryonic fibroblasts that are established from tissue of day 13- day 14 embryos of virtually any mouse strain, that are maintained in culture, such as descnbed by Abbondanzo et al.(1993) and are inhibited in growth by lπadiation, such as descnbed by Robertson (1987), or by the presence of an inhibitory concentration of LEF, such as described by Pease and Williams (1990). The constructs in the host cells can be used in a conventional manner to produce the gene product encoded by the recombinant sequence. Following transformation of a suitable host and growth ofthe host to an appropπate cell density, the selected promoter is induced by appropπate means, such as temperature shift or chemical induction, and cells are cultivated for an additional period. Cells are typically harvested by centnfugation, disrupted by physical or chemical means, and the resulting crude extract retained for further punfication. Microbial cells employed in the expression of proteins can be disrupted by any convenient method, including freeze-thaw cycling, somcation, mechanical disruption, or use of cell lysmg agents. Such methods are well known by the skill artisan. Transgenic Animals The invention also relates to transgenic animals having an exogenous PCTA-1 regulatory region or a PCTA-1 gene, preferably comprising at least one ofthe biallelic polymoφhisms descnbed herein, and more preferably to a mutated PCTA-1 gene comprising the trait causing mutation determined using the above-noted method. Preferably, the biallelic marker is selected from the group consisting of Al to A125 and the complements thereof, or optionally the biallelic markers in linkage disequilibrium therewith. In another embodiment, the invention concerns animals, preferably a mouse, having the mouse PCTA-1 gene which is modified or knocked out. These animals could be used to screen compounds of interest. The terms "transgenic animals" or "host animals" are used herein to designate animals that have their genome genetically and artificially manipulated so as to include one of the nucleic acids according to the invention. Prefeπed animals are non-human mammals and include those belonging to a genus selected from Mus (e.g. mice), Rattus (e.g. rats) and Oryctogalus (e.g. rabbits) which have their genome artificially and genetically altered by the insertion of a nucleic acid according to the invention. In one embodiment, the invention encompasses non-human host mammals and animals comprising a recombinant vector ofthe invention, a polynucleotide construct according to the invention, or a PCTA-1 gene disrupted by homologous recombination with a knock out vector. Generally, a transgenic animal according the present invention comprises any one ofthe polynucleotides, the recombinant vectors and the cell hosts described m the present invention. More particularly, the transgenic animals according to the present invention can comprise any ofthe polynucleotides described in the "PCTA-1 cDNA Sequences" section, the "Coding Regions" section, and the "Oligonucleotide Probes And Primers" section. The fransgenic animals ofthe invention all include withm a plurality of their cells a cloned recombinant or synthetic DNA sequence, more specifically one ofthe punfied or isolated nucleic acids comprising a PCTA-1 coding sequence, a PCTA-1 regulatory polynucleotide or a DNA sequence encoding an antisense polynucleotide such as descnbed in the present specification, and still more preferably a nucleotide comprising an allele of at least one biallelic marker of the PCTA-1 gene. In a first prefeπed embodiment, these transgenic animals may be good expenmental models m order to study cancer, preferably prostate cancer, in particular concerning the transgenic animals withm the genome of which has been inserted one or several copies of a polynucleotide encoding a native PCTA-1 protein, or alternatively a mutant PCTA-1 protein. In a second prefeπed embodiment, these transgenic animals may express a desired polypeptide of interest under the control ofthe regulatory polynucleotides ofthe PCTA-1 gene, leading to good yields m the synthesis of this protein of interest, and eventually a tissue specific expression of this protein of interest. The design ofthe transgenic animals ofthe invention may be made according to the conventional techniques well known from the one skilled in the art. For more details regarding the production of transgenic animals, and specifically transgenic mice, it may be refeπed to US Patents Nos 4,873,191, issued Oct. 10, 1989; 5,464,764 issued Nov 7, 1995; and 5,789,215, issued Aug 4, 1998. Transgenic animals ofthe present invention are produced by the application of procedures which result in an animal with a genome that mcoφorates exogenous genetic material which is integrated into the genome. The procedure involves obtaining the genetic material, or a portion thereof, which encodes either a PCTA-1 coding sequence, a PCTA-1 regulatory polynucleotide or a DNA sequence encoding an antisense polynucleotide such as described in the present specification. A recombinant polynucleotide of the invention is inserted into an embryonic or ES stem cell line. The insertion is made using electroporation. The cells subjected to electroporation are screened (e.g. Southern blot analysis) to find positive cells which have integrated the exogenous recombinant polynucleotide into their genome. An illustrative positive-negative selection procedure that may be used according to the invention is described by Mansour et al. (1988). Then, the positive cells are isolated, cloned and injected into 3.5 days old blastocysts from mice. The blastocysts are then inserted into a female host animal and allowed to grow to term. Alternatively, the positive ES cells are brought into contact with embryos at the 2.5 days old 8-16 cell stage (morulae) such as descnbed by Wood et al.(1993) or by Nagy et al.(1993), the ES cells being internalized to colonize extensively the blastocyst including the cells which will give rise to the germ line. The offsprings ofthe female host are tested to determine which animals are transgenic e g include the inserted exogenous DNA sequence and which are wild-type Thus, the present invention also concerns a transgenic animal containing a nucleic acid, a recombinant expression vector or a recombinant host cell according to the invention Recombinant Cell Lines Derived From The Transgenic Animals Of The Invention. A further object ofthe invention consists of recombinant host cells obtained from a transgenic animal described herein In one embodiment the invention encompasses cells derived from non-human host mammals and animals compπsmg a recombinant vector of the invention or a PCTA-1 gene disrupted by homologous recombination with a knock out vector Recombinant cell lines may be established in vitro from cells obtained from any tissue of a transgenic animal according to the invention, for example by transfection of pnmary cell cultures with vectors expressing one-genes such as SV40 large T antigen, as descnbed by Chou (1989) and Shay et al (1991) Screening Of Agents Acting Against Prostate Cancer In a further embodiment, the present invention also concerns a method for the screening of new agents, or candidate substances, acting against cancer, preferably against prostate cancer and which may be suitable for the treatment of a patient whose DNA comprises an allele ofthe PCTA-1 gene associated with cancer, preferably with prostate cancer, with an early onset of prostate cancer, or with the aggressiveness of prostate cancer tumors, or more generally with a modified or forthcoming expression of the PCTA-1 gene, with a modified or forthcoming production ofthe PCTA-1 protein, or with the production of a modified PCTA-1 protein In a prefeπed embodiment, the invention relates to a method for the screening of candidate substances for cancer treatment, preferably prostate cancer treatment The method comprises the following steps - providing a cell line, an organ, or a mammal expressing a PCTA-1 gene or a fragment thereof, preferably the regulatory region or the promoter region of the PCTA-1 gene, - obtaining a candidate substance, preferably a candidate substance capable of inhibiting the binding of a transcription factor to the PCTA-1 regulatory region, and - testing the ability of the candidate substance to decrease the symptoms of cancer, preferably of prostate cancer and/or to modulate the expression levels oi PCTA-1 In some embodiments, the cell line, organ or mammal expresses a heterologous protein, the coding sequence of which is operably linked to the PCTA-1 regulatory or promoter sequence In other embodiments, they express a PCTA-1 gene comprising alleles of one or more biallelic markers associated with cancer, preferably with prostate cancer, an early onset of prostate cancer, or the aggressiveness of prostate cancer tumors, or a mutated PCTA-1 gene comprising a trait causing mutation determined using the above-noted method Optionally, the biallelic marker is selected from the group consisting of A 1 to A 125 and the complements thereof. Preferably, the biallelic marker is selected from the group consisting of A2, A30, A41, A55, A57 and the complements thereof. In a further embodiment, a mice expressing a PCTA-1 protein, preferably a mouse PCTA-1 protein encoded by a nucleic acid sequence of SEQ ID No 9 or a variant or a fragment thereof can be used to screen agents acting against cancer, preferably prostate cancer A candidate substance is a substance which can interact with or modulate, by binding or other intermolecular interactions, expression, stability, and function oi PCTA-1. Such substances may be potentially interesting for patients who are not responsive to existing drugs or develop side effects to them. Screening may be effected using either in vitro methods or in vivo methods Such methods can be earned out m numerous ways such as on transformed cells which express the considered alleles ofthe PCTA-1 gene, on tumors induced by said transformed cells, for example in mice, or on PCTA-1 protein encoded by the considered allelic variant oi PCTA-1 This method preferably includes prepanng transformed cells with different forms oi PCTA-1 sequences containing particular alleles of one or more biallelic markers and/or trait causing mutations described above Optionally, the biallelic marker is selected from the group consisting of Al to A 125 and the complements thereof Screening assays of the present invention generally involve determining the ability of a candidate substance to present a cytotoxic effect, to change the charactenstics of transformed cells such as prohferative and invasive capacity, to affect the tumor growth, or to modify the expression level of PTCA-1 Typical examples of such drug screening assays are provided below. It is to be understood that the parameters set forth in these examples can be modified by the skilled person without undue expeπmentation. Screening Substances Interacting With The Regulatory Sequences Of The PCTA-1 Gene. The present invention also concerns a method for screening substances or molecules that are able to interact with the regulatory sequences of the PCTA-1 gene, such as for example promoter or enhancer sequences. Nucleic acids encoding proteins which are able to interact with the regulatory sequences of the PCTA-1 gene, more particularly a nucleotide sequence selected from the group consisting of the polynucleotides ofthe 5' and 3' regulatory region or a fragment or variant thereof, and preferably a variant comprising one ofthe biallelic markers of the invention, may be identified by using a one- hybrid system, such as that descnbed in the booklet enclosed in the Matchmaker One-Hybrid System kit from Clontech (Catalog Ref. n° K1603-1). Briefly, the target nucleotide sequence is cloned upsfream of a selectable reporter sequence and the resulting DNA construct is integrated in the yeast genome (Saccharomyces cerevisiae) The yeast cells containing the reporter sequence m their genome are then transformed with a library consisting of fusion molecules between cDNAs encoding candidate proteins for binding onto the regulatory sequences ofthe PCTA-1 gene and sequences encoding the activator domain of a yeast transcnption factor such as GAL4. The recombinant yeast cells are plated in a culture broth for selecting cells expressing the reporter sequence. The recombinant yeast cells thus selected contain a fusion protein that is able to bind onto the target regulatory sequence of the PCTA-1 gene. Then, the cDNAs encoding the fusion proteins are sequenced and may be cloned into expression or transcπption vectors in vitro The binding of the encoded polypeptides to the target regulatory sequences of the PCTA-1 gene may be confirmed by techniques familiar to the one skilled the art, such as gel retardation assays or DNAse protection assays. Such assays are detailed in the section "Analysis Of Biallelic Markers Of The Invention With Prostate Cancer" Screening For Expression Modifiers The PCTA-1 gene appears to be involved a seπes of events which most likely include a modification of at least one step of its transcnption process In fact, and as mentioned previously, there is a strong possibility that this modification is directly related to the binding efficiency of DNA binding factors to sites ofthe PCTA-1 regulatory region Screening programs can be used to test potentially therapeutic compounds, either by competitively binding to the sites of the PCTA-1 promoter which would normally bind the DNA transcription factor, or directly binding to the DNA binding factor itself These compounds could reduce the speed at which the cascade of events leading to the development oi PCTA-1 related cancers takes place. In fact, even though it seems clear that a combination of several DNA binding sites may be involved in the development of a PCTA-1 related prostate cancer, binding inhibition of only a few such sites is likely to be sufficient to significantly impact on PCTA-1 production and hence the proliferation of cancer The screening of expression modifiers is important as it can be used for detecting modifiers specific to one allele or a group of alleles ofthe PCTA-1 gene. The alteration oi PCTA-1 expression in response to a modifier can be determined by admmistenng or combining the candidate modifier with an expression system such as animals, cells, and in vitro transcπption assay. The tenn "expression modifier" is intended to encompass but is not limited to chemical agents and polypeptides that modulate the action of PCTA-1 through modulation ofthe PCTA-1 gene expression. The effect of the modifier on PCTA-1 transcription and /or steady state mRNA levels can be also determined. As with the basic expression levels, tissue specific interactions are of interest. Coπelations are made between the ability of an expression modifier to affect PCTA-1 activity, and the presence ofthe targeted polymoφhisms A panel of different modifiers may be screened in order to determine the effect under a number of different conditions. Another subject ofthe present invention is a method for screening molecules that modulate the expression of the PCTA-1 protein. Such a screening method comprises the steps of: a) cultivating a prokaryotic or an eukaryotic cell that has been transfected with a nucleotide sequence encoding the PCTA-1 protein or a variant or a fragment thereof, placed under the control of its own promoter; b) bnngmg into contact the cultivated cell with a molecule to be tested; and c) quantifying the expression ofthe PCTA-1 protein or a vanant or a fragment thereof. In an embodiment, the nucleotide sequence encoding the PCTA-1 protein or a variant or a fragment thereof comprises an allele of at least one ofthe biallelic markers Al to A 125, preferably A2, A30, A41, A55, A57, and the complements thereof. Using DNA recombination techniques well known by the one skill m the art, the PCTA-1 protein encoding DNA sequence is inserted into an expression vector, downstream from its promoter sequence The quantification ofthe expression ofthe PCTA-1 protein may be realized either at the mRNA level or at the protein level. In the latter case, polyclonal or monoclonal antibodies may be used to quantify the amounts of the PCTA-1 protein that have been produced, for example m an ELISA or a RIA assay. In a prefeπed embodiment, the quantification of the PCTA-1 mRNA is realized by a quantitative PCR amplification ofthe cDNA obtained by a reverse transcription of the total mRNA of the cultivated PCTA- 1 -transfected host cell, using a pair of pnmers specific for PCTA-1. Thus, is also part ofthe present invention a method for screening of a candidate substance or molecule that modulated the expression of the PCTA-1 gene, this method comprises the following steps: - providing a recombinant cell host containing a nucleic acid, wherein said nucleic acid compπses a nucleotide sequence of the 5' regulatory region or a biologically active fragment or variant thereof located upsfream a polynucleotide encoding a detectable protein; - obtaining a candidate substance; and - determining the ability ofthe candidate substance to modulate the expression levels of the polynucleotide encoding the detectable protein In a further embodiment, the nucleic acid comprising the nucleotide sequence ofthe 5' regulatory region or a biologically active fragment or variant thereof also includes a 5'UTR region ofthe PCTA-1 cDNAs, or one of its biologically active fragments or variants thereof. Among the prefeπed polynucleotides encoding a detectable protein, there may be cited polynucleotides encoding luciferase, beta galactosidase, green fluorescent protein (GFP) and chloramphemcol acetyl transferase (CAT). In another embodiment of a method for the screening of a candidate substance or molecule that modulates the expression ofthe PCTA-1 gene, wherein said method comprises the following steps: a) providing a recombinant host cell containing a nucleic acid, wherein said nucleic acid comprises the 5'UTR sequence oi a PCTA-1 cDNA, or one of its biologically active fragments or variants, the 5'UTR sequence or its biologically active fragment or variant being operably linked to a polynucleotide encoding a detectable protein; b) obtaining a candidate substance; and c) determining the ability of the candidate substance to modulate the expression levels of the polynucleotide encoding the detectable protein. In one particular embodiment of the above screening method, the nucleic acid that compπses a nucleotide sequence selected from the group consisting of the 5'UTR sequence oi a PCTA-1 cDNA or one of its biologically active fragments or variants, includes a promoter sequence which is exogenous with respect to the PCTA-1 5'UTR sequence defined therein In a further prefeπed embodiment, the nucleic acid comprising the 5'-UTR sequence oi a PCTA-1 cDNA or the biologically active fragments thereof includes a biallelic marker selected from the group consisting of Al to A125, preferably A2, A30, A41, A55, A57, or the complements thereof. The invention also pertains to kits useful for performing the herein described screening method Preferably, such kits comprise a recombinant vector that allows the expression of a nucleotide sequence ofthe 5' regulatory region or a biologically active fragment or variant thereof located upstream and operably linked to a polynucleotide encoding a detectable protein or a PCTA-1 protein or a fragment or a variant thereof. Moreover, the kit can comprise a recombinant vector that comprises a nucleic acid including a 5'UTR sequence oi a PCTA-1 cDNA, or one of their biologically active fragments or variants, said nucleic acid being operably linked to a polynucleotide encoding a detectable protein or a PCTA-1 protein or a fragment or a variant thereof. For the design of suitable recombinant vectors useful for performing the screening methods described above, it will be refeπed to the section ofthe present specification wherein the prefeπed recombinant vectors ofthe invention are detailed Expression levels and patterns oi PCTA-1 may be analyzed by solution hybndization with long probes as descnbed in International Patent Application No. WO 97/05277 Bnefly, a PCTA-1 cDNA or the PCTA-1 genomic DNA described above, or fragments thereof, is inserted at a cloning site immediately downstream of a bacteriophage (T3, T7 or SP6) RNA polymerase promoter to produce antisense RNA. Preferably, the PCTA-1 insert compnses at least 100 or more consecutive nucleotides ofthe genomic DNA sequence or a cDNA sequence, particularly those compnsing at least one of biallelic markers according the present invention, preferably at least one ofthe biallelic markers Al to A125 and the complements thereof or those compπsmg the trait causing mutation. The plasmid is linearized and transcnbed in the presence of πbonucleotides comprising modified nbonucleotides (i.e. biotin-UTP and DIG-UTP). An excess of this doubly labeled RNA is hybndized in solution with mRNA isolated from cells or tissues of interest. The hybridizations are performed under standard stringent conditions (40-50°C for 16 hours in an 80%> formamide, 0.4 M NaCl buffer, pH 7-8). The unhybπdized probe is removed by digestion with nbonucleases specific for smgle-sfranded RNA (i.e. RNases CL3, Tl, Phy M, U2 or A). The presence of the biotm-UTP modification enables capture ofthe hybrid on a microtifration plate coated with sfreptavidin. The presence ofthe DIG modification enables the hybπd to be detected and quantified by ELISA using an anti-DIG antibody coupled to alkaline phosphatase. Quantitative analysis ofthe PCTA-1 gene expression may also be performed using aπays. As used herein, the term aπay means a one dimensional, two dimensional, or multidimensional aπangement of a plurality of nucleic acids of sufficient length to permit specific detection of expression of mRNAs capable of hybndizmg thereto. For example, the aπays may contain a plurality of nucleic acids denved from genes whose expression levels are to be assessed. The aπays may include the PCTA-1 genomic DNA, a PCTA-1 cDNA sequence or the sequences complementary thereto or fragments thereof, particularly those comprising at least one of the biallelic markers according the present invention, preferably at least one ofthe biallelic markers Al to A 125 and the complements thereof or those comprising a trait causing mutation. Preferably, the fragments are at least 15 nucleotides in length. In other embodiments, the fragments are at least 25 nucleotides in length. In some embodiments, the fragments are at least 50 nucleotides in length. More preferably, the fragments are at least 100 nucleotides in length. In another prefeπed embodiment, the fragments are more than 100 nucleotides in length. In some embodiments the fragments may be more than 500 nucleotides in length. For example, quantitative analysis oi PCTA-1 gene expression may be performed with a complementary DNA microaπay as descnbed by Schena et al. (1995 and 1996). Full length PCTA- 7 cDNAs or fragments thereof are amplified by PCR and aπayed from a 96-well microtiter plate onto silylated microscope slides using high-speed robotics. Printed aπays are incubated in a humid chamber to allow rehydration ofthe aπay elements and πnsed, once in 0.2%> SDS for 1 mm, twice m water for 1 mm and once for 5 mm m sodium borohydride solution. The aπays are submerged m water for 2 min at 95°C, transfeπed into 0.2%> SDS for 1 min, rinsed twice with water, air dried and stored in the dark at 25°C. Cell or tissue mRNA is isolated or commercially obtained and probes are prepared by a single round of reverse transcription. Probes are hybndized to 1 cm 2 microaπays under a 14 x 14 mm glass coverslip for 6-12 hours at 60°C. Aπays are washed for 5 min at 25°C in low stringency wash buffer (1 x SSC/0.2%> SDS), then for 10 mm at room temperature m high stπngency wash buffer (0.1 x SSC/0.2% SDS). Aπays are scanned in 0.1 x SSC using a fluorescence laser scanning device fitted with a custom filter set. Accurate differential expression measurements are obtained by taking the average of the ratios of two independent hybridizations. Quantitative analysis of PCTA-1 gene expression may also be performed with full length PCTA-1 cDNAs or fragments thereof in complementary DNA aπays as descnbed by Pietu et al (1996) The full length PCTA-1 cDNA or fragments thereof is PCR amplified and spotted on membranes Then, mRNAs originating from various tissues or cells are labeled with radioactive nucleotides After hybridization and washing in controlled conditions, the hybridized mRNAs are detected by phospho-imagmg or autoradiography Duplicate experiments are performed and a quantitative analysis of differentially expressed mRNAs is then performed Alternatively, expression analysis using the PCTA-1 genomic DNA, a PCTA-1 cDNA, or fragments thereof can be done through high density nucleotide aπays as described by Lockhart et al (1996) and Sosnowsky et al (1997) Ohgonucleotides of 15-50 nucleotides from the sequence of the PCTA-1 genomic DNA, a PCTA-1 cDNA sequence, particularly a sequence comprising at least one of biallelic markers according the present invention, preferably at least one of the biallelic markers Al to A125 and the complements thereof or comprising the trait causing mutation, or a sequence complementary thereto, are synthesized directly on the chip (Lockhart et al , supra) or synthesized and then addressed to the chip (Sosnowski et al , supra) Preferably, the ohgonucleotides are about 20 nucleotides m length PCTA-1 cDNA probes labeled with an appropnate compound, such as biotm, digoxigenm or fluorescent dye, are synthesized from the appropnate mRNA population and then randomly fragmented to an average size of 50 to 100 nucleotides The said probes are then hybridized to the chip After washing as described in Lockhart et al , supra and application of different electric fields (Sosnowsky et al , 1997) , the dyes or labeling compounds are detected and quantified Duplicate hybridizations are performed Comparative analysis of the intensity of the signal oπgmating from cDNA probes on the same target oligonucleotide in different cDNA samples indicates a differential expression oi PCTA-1 mRNA Screening For Molecules Interacting With A PCTA-1 Protein The PCTA-1 proteins or fragments thereof descnbed above may be used in drug screening procedures to identify molecules which are agonists, antagonists, or inhibitors of PCTA-1 activity In a prefeπed embodiment, the PCTA-1 proteins or fragments thereof compπse at least one mutation provided either by biallelic markers ofthe present invention, preferably at least one mutation encoding by the biallelic markers A54, A56, A60, A75, A76, A85, or by a trait causing mutation according to the present invention The PCTA-1 proteins or fragments thereof used in such analyses may be free in solution or linked to a solid support Alternatively, the PCTA-1 proteins or fragments thereof can be expressed on a cell surface The cell may naturally express a PCTA-1 protein or a fragment thereof or, alternatively, the cell may express a PCTA-1 protein or a fragment thereof from an expression vector such as those described above In one method of drug screening, eucaryotic or procaryotic host cells which are stably transformed with recombinant polynucleotides in order to express a PCTA-1 protein or a fragment thereof are used m conventional competitive binding assays or standard direct binding assays To study the interaction of a PCTA-1 protein or a fragment thereof with drugs or small molecules, such as molecules generated through combinatorial chemistry approaches, the microdialysis coupled to HPLC method descnbed by Wang et al (1997) or the affinity capillary electrophoresis method described by Bush et al (1997) can be used In further methods, molecules which interact with a PCTA- 1 protein or a fragment thereof may be identified using assays such as the following The molecule to be tested for binding is labeled with a detectable label, such as a fluorescent , radioactive, or enzymatic tag and placed in contact with an immobilized PCTA-1 protein or a fragment thereof under conditions which permit specific binding to occur After removal of non-specifically bound molecules, bound molecules are detected using appropπate means Another object ofthe present invention consists of methods and kits for the screening of candidate substances that interact with a PCTA-1 polypeptide A method for the screening of a candidate substance compπses the following steps a) providing a polypeptide consisting of a PCTA-1 protein or a fragment thereof, b) obtaining a candidate substance, c) bringing into contact said polypeptide with said candidate substance, and d) detecting the complexes formed between said polypeptide and said candidate substance Optionally, said PCTA-1 protein or fragment thereof is selected from the group consisting of polypeptides of SEQ ED Nos 5, 6, 7, 9 and fragments thereof The invention also pertains to kits useful for performing the hereinbefore described screening method Preferably, such kits comprise a PCTA-1 polypeptide or a fragment thereof, and optionally means useful to detect the complex formed between a PCTA-1 polypeptide or a fragment thereof and the candidate substance In a prefeπed embodiment the detection means consist in monoclonal or polyclonal antibodies directed against the coπespondmg PCTA-1 polypeptide or a fragment thereof Various candidate substances or molecules can be assayed for interaction with a PCTA-1 protein or a fragment thereof These substances or molecules include, without being limited to, natural or synthetic organic compounds or molecules of biological origin such as polypeptides, antibodies, fatty acids and lipoprotems When the candidate substance or molecule consists of a polypeptide, this polypeptide may be the resulting expression product of a phage clone belonging to a phage-based random peptide library, or alternatively the polypeptide may be the resulting expression product of a cDNA library cloned in a vector suitable for performing a two-hybrid screening assay For the puφose ofthe present invention, a ligand means a molecule, such as a protein, a peptide, an antibody, a fatty acid, a lipoprotein, or any synthetic chemical compound capable of binding to a PCTA-1 protein or a fragment thereof A. Candidate Ligands Obtained From Random Peptide Libraries In a particular embodiment ofthe screening method, the putative ligand is the expression product of a DNA insert contained in a phage vector (Parmley and Smith, 1988) Specifically, random peptide phages libraπes are used The random DNA inserts encode for peptides of 8 to 20 ammo acids in length (Oldenburg K R et al , 1992, Valadon P , et al , 1996, Lucas A H , 1994, Westennk M A J , 1995, Fehci F et al , 1991) According to this particular embodiment, the recombinant phages expressing a protein that binds to the immobilized PCTA-1 protein or a fragment thereof is retained and the complex formed between the PCTA-1 polypeptide and the recombinant phage may be subsequently immunoprecipitated by a polyclonal or a monoclonal antibody directed against the PCTA-1 polypeptide Once the ligand library in recombinant phages has been constructed, the phage population is brought into contact with the immobilized PCTA-1 protein or a fragment thereof Then the preparation of complexes is washed in order to remove the non-specifically bound recombinant phages The phages that bind specifically to the PCTA-1 protein or a fragment thereof are then eluted by a buffer (acid pH) or immunoprecipitated by the monoclonal antibody produced by the hybridoma antι-PCTA-1, and this phage population is subsequently amplified by an over-mfection of bacteria (for example E coli) The selection step may be repeated several times, preferably 2-4 times, in order to select the more specific recombinant phage clones The last step consists m charactenzmg the peptide produced by the selected recombinant phage clones either by expression in infected bacteria and isolation, expressing the phage insert in another host-vector system, or sequencing the insert contained m the selected recombinant phages B. Candidate Ligands Obtained By Competition Experiments. Alternatively, peptides, drugs or small molecules which bind to the PCTA-1 protein, or a fragment thereof may be identified m competition expeπments In such assays, the PCTA-1 protein or a fragment thereof is immobilized to a surface, such as a plastic plate Increasing amounts ofthe peptides, drugs or small molecules are placed m contact with the immobilized PCTA-1 protein or a fragment thereof in the presence of a detectable labeled known PCTA-1 protein ligand For example, the PCTA-1 ligand may be detectably labeled with a fluorescent, radioactive, or enzymatic tag The ability ofthe test molecule to bind the PCTA-1 protein or a fragment thereof is determined by measuring the amount of detectably labeled known ligand bound in the presence of the test molecule A decrease in the amount of known ligand bound to the PCTA-1 protein or a fragment thereof when the test molecule is present indicated that the test molecule is able to bind to the PCTA-1 protein or a fragment thereof C. Candidate Ligands Obtained By Affinity Chromatography. Proteins or other molecules interacting with the PCTA-1 protein or a fragment thereof can also be found using affinity columns which contain the PCTA-1 protein or a fragment thereof The PCTA-1 protein or a fragment thereof may be attached to the column using conventional techniques including chemical coupling to a suitable column matrix such as agarose, Affi Gel® , or other matrices familiar to those of skill m art. In some embodiments of this method, the affinity column contains chimenc proteins in which the PCTA-1 protein or a fragment thereof is fused to glutathion S transferase (GST). A mixture of cellular proteins or pool of expressed proteins as described above is applied to the affinity column. Proteins or other molecules interacting with the PCTA-1 protein or a fragment thereof attached to the column can then be isolated and analyzed on 2-D electrophoresis gel as descnbed in Ramunsen et al. (1997). Alternatively, the proteins retained on the affinity column can be punfied by electrophoresis based methods and sequenced. The same method can be used to isolate antibodies, to screen phage display products, or to screen phage display human antibodies D. Candidate Ligands Obtained By Optical Biosensor methods Proteins interacting with the PCTA-1 protein or a fragment thereof can also be screened by using an Optical Biosensor as described in Edwards and Leatherbaπow ( 1997) and also m Szabo et al. (1995) This technique permits the detection of interactions between molecules m real time, without the need of labeled molecules. This technique is based on the surface plasmon resonance (SPR) phenomenon. Briefly, the candidate ligand molecule to be tested is attached to a surface (such as a carboxymethyl dextran matnx) A light beam is directed towards the side ofthe surface that does not contain the sample to be tested and is reflected by said surface The SPR phenomenon causes a decrease in the intensity of the reflected light with a specific association of angle and wavelength. The binding of candidate ligand molecules cause a change in the refraction index on the surface, which change is detected as a change in the SPR signal For screening of candidate ligand molecules or substances that are able to interact with the PCTA-1 protein or a fragment thereof, the PCTA-1 polypeptide is immobilized onto a surface. This surface consists of one side of a cell through which flows the candidate molecule to be assayed. The binding of the candidate molecule on the PCTA-1 protein or a fragment thereof is detected as a change ofthe SPR signal. The candidate molecules tested may be proteins, peptides, carbohydrates, lipids, or small molecules generated by combinatorial chemistry. This technique may also be performed by immobilizing eukaryotic or prokaryotic cells or lipid vesicles exhibiting an endogenous or a recombinantly expressed PCTA-1 protein at their surface The mam advantage ofthe method is that it allows the determination ofthe association rate between the PCTA-1 protein and molecules interacting with the PCTA-1 protein. It is thus possible to select specifically ligand molecules interacting with the PCTA-1 protein, or a fragment thereof, through strong or conversely weak association constants. E. Candidate Ligands Obtained Through A Two-Hybrid Screening Assay. The yeast two-hybrid system is designed to study protem-protem interactions in vivo (Fields and Song, 1989), and relies upon the fusion of a bait protein to the DNA binding domain ofthe yeast Gal4 protein. This technique is also described in the US Patent N° US 5,667,973 and the US Patent N° 5,283,173 (Fields et al.). The general procedure of library screening by the two-hybrid assay may be performed as described by Haφer et al. (1993) or as descnbed by Cho et al. (1998) or also Fromont-Racme et al. (1997). The bait protein or polypeptide consists of a PCTA-1 polypeptide or a fragment thereof. More precisely, the nucleotide sequence encoding the PCTA-1 polypeptide or a fragment thereof is fused to a polynucleotide encoding the DNA binding domain of the GAL4 protein, the fused nucleotide sequence being inserted in a suitable expression vector, for example pAS2 or pM3. Then, a human cDNA library is constructed m a specially designed vector, such that the human cDNA insert is fused to a nucleotide sequence in the vector that encodes the transcriptional domain of the GAL4 protein. Preferably, the vector used is the pACT vector. The polypeptides encoded by the nucleotide inserts ofthe human cDNA library are termed "pray" polypeptides. A third vector contains a detectable marker gene, such as beta galactosidase gene or CAT gene that is placed under the confrol of a regulation sequence that is responsive to the binding of a complete Gal4 protein containing both the franscnptional activation domain and the DNA binding domain. For example, the vector pG5EC may be used. Two different yeast strains are also used. As an illustrative but non limiting example the two different yeast strains may be the followmgs • - Y190, the phenotype of which is (MATa, Leu2-3, 112 uraS-12, trpl-901, his3-D200, ade2-101, gal4Dgall80D URA3 GAL-LacZ, LYS GAL-H1S3, cyh r ), Y187, the phenotype of which is (MATa gal4 gal80 hιs3 trpl-901 ade2-101 ura3-52 leu2-3, - 112 URA3 GAL-lacZmet ), which is the opposite mating type of Y190. Briefly, 20 μg of pAS2/PCTA-l and 20 μg of pACT-cDNA library are co-transformed into yeast strain Y190. The transformants are selected for growth on minimal media lacking histidine, leucme and tryptophan, but containing the histidine synthesis inhibitor 3-AT (50 mM) Positive colonies are screened for beta galactosidase by filter lift assay. The double positive colonies (His + , beta-gat) are then grown on plates lacking histidine, leucine, but containing tryptophan and cycloheximide (10 mg/ml) to select for loss of ΌAS2/PCTA-1 plasmids bu retention of pACT-cDNA library plasmids. The resulting Y190 strains are mated with Y187 strains expressing PCTA-1 or non-related control proteins; such as cyclophilm B, lamin, or SNFl, as Gal4 fusions as descnbed by Ηaφer et al. (1993) and by Bram et al. (1993), and screened for beta galactosidase by filter lift assay. Yeast clones that are beta gal- after mating with the control Gal4 fusions are considered false positives In another embodiment ofthe two-hybrid method according to the invention, interaction between the PCTA-1 or a fragment thereof with cellular proteins may be assessed using the Matchmaker Two Hybrid System 2 (Catalog No. K 1604-1 , Clontech). As descnbed m the manual accompanying the Matchmaker Two Hybnd System 2 (Catalog No. K 1604-1 , Clontech), nucleic acids encoding the PCTA-1 protein or a fragment thereof, are inserted into an expression vector such that they are m frame with DNA encoding the DNA binding domain ofthe yeast franscnptional activator GAL4. A desired cDNA, preferably human cDNA, is inserted into a second expression vector such that they are in frame with DNA encoding the activation domain of GAL4 The two expression plasmids are transformed into yeast and the yeast are plated on selection medium which selects for expression of selectable markers on each ofthe expression vectors as well as GAL4 dependent expression ofthe HIS3 gene. Transformants capable of growing on medium lacking histidine are screened for GAL4 dependent lacZ expression Those cells which are positive in both the histidine selection and the lacZ assay contain interaction between PCTA-1 and the protein or peptide encoded by the initially selected cDNA insert. Screening Through Spontaneous Metastatic Assay Screening of new compounds can be caπied out through a spontaneous metastatic assay as described in Nihei et al. (1995). Hence, it can be possible to assess the decrease of metastatic potential of transformed cells related to treatment of said compounds Indeed, according to the present invention, the metastatic potential of cells constitutes the major cπteπa ofthe aggressiveness of prostate cancer tumors. To evaluate the metastatic ability, about SxlO 5 cells expressing a PCTA-1 gene compnsing alleles for one or more biallelic markers associated with cancer, preferably with prostate cancer, or with the aggressiveness of prostate cancer tumors, are injected subcutaneously in the flank of male athymic nude mice. The mice are treated with the screened compounds. Tumor volume and tumor volume doubling time are used as the index ofthe tumor growth rate and are determined as described m Isaacs & Hukku, 1988) The tumor-bearmg animals are scored for lung metastases at spontaneous death or when killed at day 35 post-inoculation. Gene Therapy Gene therapy involves the alteration of the phenotypic expression of a targeted cell, usually a cancer cell through the alteration ofthe cell's genotypic content. The desired effect of gene therapy is a reduction or interruption of tumor growth or, ideally, the destruction of the cell itself An appropπate gene for gene therapy must be capable of altenng the biological behavior of the cancer cell order to slow growth, reduce local invasive potential, or induce apoptosis. The PCTA-1 gene, or certain portions thereof, is a good candidate for gene therapy. The present invention also comprises the use ofthe genomic PCTA-1 DNA descnbed above or a fragment thereof, in gene therapy strategies, such as antisense and tnple helix strategies, and in the introduction of a therapeutic gene. Prefeπed nucleotide sequences useful in gene therapy include the sequences of SEQ ED Nos 1, 2, 3, 4, 8, complementary sequences thereto, and fragments thereof More particularly, prefeπed nucleotide sequences comprise any of the polynucleotides described in the "PCTA-1 cDNA Sequences" section, the "Coding Regions" section, and the "Oligonucleotide Probes And Primers" section. Prefeπed PCTA-1 DNA fragments used m such approaches are those comprising a nucleotide sequence compnsing a PCTA-1 regulatory region or a fragment thereof. More particularly, the regulatory regions comprise at least one ofthe biallelic markers according to the invention, more particularly those comprising a biallelic marker selected from the group consisting of Al to A125, preferably A2, A30, A41, A55, A57, or a trait causing mutation, or complementary sequences thereof or variants or fragments thereof In a first embodiment, the invention therefore concerns a method for the treatment of prostate cancer. The method compπses: (a) selecting an individual whose DNA compπses an allele of biallelic marker or of a group of biallelic markers, preferably markers of the PCTA-1 gene, associated with a susceptibility to prostate cancer, and (b) admmistenng to the individual an effective amount of a molecule capable of modifying the expression of the PCTA-1 gene. In one embodiment, the molecule is an antisense nucleotide sequence, capable of competitively binding to the mRNA sequence resulting from the transcπption of the PCTA-1 genomic DNA so as to prevent the translation of said mRNA In prefeπed embodiments of this method, the antisense nucleotide sequence is characterized in that it hybridizes with exons ofthe PCTA-1 gene, preferably with a region of such exons comprising a least an allele of one of the biallelic markers ofthe present invention. Optionally, the antisense nucleotide sequence hybridizes with exons 0, 1, 6bιs, 9 or 9ter ofthe PCTA-1 gene In an other embodiment, the molecule is a nucleotide sequence comprising a homopurme or homopyπdine, preferably a 10-mer to 20-mer homopurme or homopyndme, which is complementary to a homopuπne or homopyndme sequence of the PCTA-1 genomic DNA so as to prevent transcription of said genomic DNA into mRNA. In a further embodiment, the molecule is a nucleotide sequence comprising a DNA sequence encoding a protein capable, when expressed, of exerting a therapeutic effect on prostate cancer cells, operably linked to the promoter oi PCTA-1 gene, so as to kill or disable said prostate cancer cells. The invention also concerns a method for the treatment of prostate cancer compnsing: - administering to an individual an effective amount of a nucleotide sequence comprising a DNA sequence encoding a protein capable, when expressed, of exerting a therapeutic effect on prostate cancer cells, operably linked to the promoter oi PCTA-1 gene The gene encoding a protein capable of exerting a therapeutic effect on prostate cancer cells is called the therapeutic gene m the present application. En some embodiments, the therapeutic gene is a toxin gene encoding a cytotoxic or cytostatic gene product. In another embodiment, the therapeutic gene is a gene encoding an immunogenic antigen which is highly visible to the immune system. In further embodiment, the therapeutic gene is a gene encoding a lymphokme which activates an anti-tumor immune response. In additional embodiments, the therapeutic gene encodes an antisense sequence having as a target the coding region of an essential gene for the proliferation or viability of the cell. Antisense Approach In antisense approaches, nucleic acid sequences complementary to a targeted mRNA are hybridized to the mRNA lntracellularly, thereby blocking the expression ofthe protein encoded by the mRNA. The antisense sequences can prevent gene expression through a vaπety of mechanisms. For example, the antisense sequences may inhibit the ability of πbosomes to translate the mRNA. Alternatively, the antisense sequences may block transport of the mRNA from the nucleus to the cytoplasm, thereby limiting the amount of mRNA available for translation. Another mechanism through which antisense sequences may inhibit gene expression is by mterfeπng with mRNA splicing. In yet another strategy, the antisense nucleic acid may be incoφorated in a nbozyme capable of specifically cleaving the target mRNA The antisense nucleic acid molecules to be used in gene therapy may be either DNA or RNA sequences. They comprise a nucleotide sequence complementary to the targeted sequence of the PCTA-1 genomic DNA or a PCTA-1 cDNA. The targeted DNA or RNA sequence preferably compπses at least one of the biallelic markers according to the present invention, particularly a biallelic marker selected from the group consisting of A 1 to A 125 and the complements thereof, or comprises a trait causing mutation. In a prefeπed embodiment, the antisense oligonucleotide are able to hybridize with at least one ofthe splicing sites ofthe targeted PCTA-1 gene, with the 3'UTR or the 5'UTR, with exon 0, 1, 6bis, 9 or 9ter, or with an exonic region comprising at least one ofthe biallelic markers ofthe present invention or comprising a trait causing mutation. Prefeπed methods using antisense polynucleotide according to the present invention are the procedures described by Sczakiel et al.(1995). Preferably, the antisense tools are chosen among the polynucleotides (15-200 bp long) that are complementary to the 5'end ofthe PCTA-1 mRNA. In another embodiment, a combination of different antisense polynucleotides complementary to different parts of the desired targeted gene are used. Prefeπed antisense polynucleotides according to the present invention are complementary to a sequence ofthe mRNAs oi PCTA-1 that contains either the translation initiation codon ATG or a splicing donor or acceptor site. The antisense nucleic acids should have a length and melting temperature sufficient to permit formation of an intracellular duplex having sufficient stability to inhibit the expression ofthe PCTA-1 mRNA in the duplex Strategies for designing antisense nucleic acids suitable for use in gene therapy are disclosed in Green et al., (1986) and Izant and Weintraub, (1984). In some strategies, antisense molecules are obtained by reversing the onentation of the PCTA-1 coding region with respect to a promoter so as to transcribe the opposite strand from that which is normally transcribed m the cell. The antisense molecules may be franscnbed using m vitro transcription systems such as those which employ T7 or SP6 polymerase to generate the transcript. Another approach involves transcπption oi PCTA-1 antisense nucleic acids m vivo by operably linking DNA containing the antisense sequence to a promoter m a suitable expression vector. Alternatively, suitable antisense strategies are those described by Rossi et al.(1991), in the International Applications Nos. WO 94/23026, WO 95/04141, WO 92/18522, WO 96/31523 and m the European Patent Application No. EP 0 572 287 A2. An alternative to the antisense technology that is used according to the present invention consists in using πbozymes that will bind to a target sequence via their complementary polynucleotide tail and that will cleave the coπespondmg RNA by hydrolyzing its target site (namely "hammerhead ribozymes"). Briefly, the simplified cycle of a hammerhead nbozyme consists of (1) sequence specific binding to the target RNA via complementary antisense sequences; (2) site-specific hydrolysis ofthe cleavable motif of the target strand; and (3) release of cleavage products, which gives rise to another catalytic cycle. Indeed, the use of long-cham antisense polynucleotide (at least 30 bases long) or πbozymes with long antisense arms are advantageous. A prefeπed delivery system for antisense nbozyme is achieved by covalently linking these antisense ribozymes to lipophilic groups or to use liposomes as a convenient vector. Prefeπed antisense ribozymes according to the present invention are prepared as described by Sczakiel et al.(1995). Triple Helix Approach The PCTA-1 genomic DNA, preferably comprising at least one of the biallelic markers according to the invention, more preferably at least one biallelic marker selected from the group consisting of Al to A125, or comprising a trait causing mutation, or complementary sequences, variants or fragments thereof, may also be used in gene therapy approaches based on intracellular tnple helix formation. Tnple helix ohgonucleotides are used to inhibit transcπption from a genome. They are particularly useful for studying alterations in cell activity when it is associated with a particular gene. Fragments ofthe PCTA-1 genomic DNA can be used to inhibit gene expression in individuals suffenng from prostate cancer or from another detectable phenotype, or m individuals at nsk of developing prostate cancer or another detectable phenotype at a later date as a result of their PCTA-1 genotype. Similarly, a portion ofthe PCTA-1 genomic DNA can be used to study the effect of inhibiting PCTA-1 transcription withm a cell. Traditionally, homopurme sequences were considered the most useful for tnple helix strategies. However, homopyπmidme sequences can also inhibit gene expression. Such homopyπmidme ohgonucleotides bind to the major groove at homopuπne:homopyrιmιdme sequences. Thus, both types of sequences from the PCTA-1 genomic DNA, preferably comprising at least one of the biallelic markers according to the invention, more preferably at least one ofthe biallelic markers Al to A125, or comprising the trait causing mutation, or complementary sequences thereof, vanants thereof, are contemplated within the scope of this invention. To carry out gene therapy strategies using the triple helix approach, the sequences of the PCTA-1 genomic DNA, preferably comprising at least one ofthe biallelic markers according to the invention, or comprising the trait causing mutation, or complementary sequences thereof, or vaπants thereof, are first scanned to identify 10-mer to 20-mer homopyπmidme or homopurme stretches which could be used m tπple-hehx based strategies for inhibiting PCTA-1 expression. Following identification of candidate homopyπmidine or homopurme stretches, their efficiency in inhibiting PCTA-1 expression is assessed by introducing varying amounts of ohgonucleotides containing the candidate sequences into tissue culture cells which express the PCTA-1 gene. The ohgonucleotides can be introduced into the cells using a vaπety of methods known to those skilled m the art, including but not limited to calcium phosphate precipitation, DEAE-Dextran, electroporation, liposome-mediated transfection or native uptake Treated cells are monitored for altered cell function or reduced PCTA-1 expression using techniques such as Northern blotting, RNase protection assays, or PCR based sfrategies to monitor the transcription levels of the PCTA-1 gene in cells which have been treated with the oligonucleotide The ohgonucleotides which are effective in inhibiting gene expression in tissue culture cells may then be introduced in vivo using the techniques described above the antisense approach at a dosage calculated based on the in vitro results, as described in antisense approach. Ln some embodiments, the natural (beta) anomers of the oligonucleotide units can be replaced with alpha anomers to render the oligonucleotide more resistant to nucleases. Further, an intercalating agent such as ethidium bromide, or the like, can be attached to the 3' end of the alpha oligonucleotide to stabilize the tnple helix. For information on the generation of ohgonucleotides suitable for tnple helix formation see Gπffin et al (1989) Introduction Of A Therapeutic Gene One important aspect of the present invention concerns a promoter specifically expressed in prostate cancer cells More particularly, the present invention relates to the regulatory sequences, and particularly the promoter ofthe PCTA-1 gene The expression oi PCTA-1 appears to be specific to prostate cancer cells The term "specific", when used herein with reference to a promoter, is intended to designate a promoter which is specifically expressed in prostate cancer cells, at a level which is sufficient to have a significant impact on the metabolism of such cells. In other words, the promoter is specific m activity, effect or function. However, the term does not necessaπly designate a promoter which is expressed solely in prostate cancer cells. Indeed, it is possible that the PCTA-1 gene is expressed, under the control of its promoter, m other cells at levels which are sufficiently low to be undetectable by cuπent detection techniques such as those involving antibodies, hybndization with a probe or even PCR. The promoter ofthe PCTA-1 gene can be advantageously used to introduce a therapeutic gene which will be expressed specifically in prostate cancer cells. The invention therefore also concerns an expression vector comprising a DNA sequence encoding a functional protein, particularly a functional protein capable of exerting a therapeutic effect on prostate cancer cells, operably linked to the promoter ofthe PCTA-1 gene which is specifically expressed in prostate cancer cells Furthermore, the PCTA-1 promoter preferably comprises biallelic markers according to the invention, more particularly those described previously Some alleles ofthe biallelic markers ofthe invention show an association with prostate cancer and may be involved m a modified or forthcoming expression of the PCTA-1 gene in prostate cancer cells. It may therefore advantageous to use the PCTA-1 promoter comprising such an allele to introduce a therapeutic gene for enhancing its expression m prostate cancer cells The term "therapeutic gene" is intended to designate DNA encoding an amino acid sequence coπesponding to a functional peptide or protein capable of exerting a therapeutic effect on prostate cancer cells preferably by killing or disabling such cells, or having a regulatory effect on the expression of an important function in prostate cells In one embodiment, a single enhancer element or multiple enhancer elements which amplify the expression of the therapeutic gene without compromising tissue specificity can also be combined with the promoter of the PCTA-1 gene. In a prefeπed embodiment, the enhancer element may be a portion ofthe cytomegalovirus LTR, SV40 enhancer sequences, or MMTV LTR Preferably, the enhancer element is positioned upstream ofthe PCTA-1 promoter. The term "enhancer element" is intended to designate a nucleotide sequence that increases the rate of transcπption of therapeutic genes or genes of interest but does not have promoter activity An enhancer can be moved upstream, downstream, and to the other side of the PCTA-1 promoter without significant loss of activity. In a prefeπed embodiment, a vector is constructed by inserting the therapeutic gene downstream of the PCTA-1 promoter The therapeutic gene is inserted so as to be operably linked to the promoter. Examples of therapeutic genes include suicide genes. These are gene sequences, the expression of which produces a protein or agent that inhibits prostate tumor cell growth or induces prostate tumor cell death Genes of interest include genes encoding enzymes, oncogenes, tumor suppressor genes, genes encoding toxms, genes encoding cytokines, or a gene encoding oncostatm The puφose ofthe therapeutic genes is to inhibit the growth of or kill prostate cancer cells or to produce cytokines or other cytotoxic agents which directly or indirectly inhibit the growth of or kill prostate cancer cell. Suitable enzymes include thymidme kmase, xanthine-guanme phosphonbosyltransferase, cytosine deammase, and hypoxanthine phosphoπbosyl transferase Suitable oncogenes and tumor suppressor genes include neu, EGF, ras, p53, retinoblastoma tumor suppressor gene (Rb), Wilm's tumor gene product, phosphotyrosme phosphatase, and nm23 Suitable toxins include Pseudomonas exotoxm A and S, diphtena toxm, E. coh LT toxms, Shiga toxm, Shiga-hke toxms, ncm, abnn, suppoπn, and gelonin. Suitable cytokines include mterferons, GM-CSF mterleukms, tumor necrosis factor Other gene therapy strategies include antisense sequences as mentioned above of at least about 30 bp, preferably 50 pb, having as target the coding sequence of an essential gene for the proliferation or viability of the cell. Numerous proteins associated with transcnption, translation, metabolic pathways, cytostructural genes can be used as target, preferably those which are essential, present at relatively low levels, and particularly associated with cancer cells The three presently available methodologies for DNA delivery are well-known by the skilled artisan: transfection with a viral vector, fusion with a lipid, and cationic supported DNA introduction A suitable DNA delivery method should meet the following cnteπa * 1) capable of directing the therapeutic polynucleotides into specific target cell types, 2) highly efficient in mediating uptake of the therapeutic polynucleotide into the target cells, and 3) suited for use in vivo for therapeutic application The prefeπed method relies on replication-defective viral vectors harbonng the therapeutic polynucleotide sequence as part of retroviral genome. Prefeπed vectors for use m the present invention are viral including adenoviruses, retroviral vectors, and adeno-associated viral vectors Retroviral vectors and adenoviruses offer an efficient, useful, and presently the best-characteπzed means of introducing and expressing foreign genes efficiently m mammalian cells. These vectors have very broad host and cell type range and express genes stably and efficiently Other virus vectors that may be used for gene transfer into cells include retroviruses such as Moloney muπne lekemia virus, papovaviruses such as JC, SV40, polyoma, and adenoviruses, Epstem-Baπ virus, papilloma viruses such as bovme papilloma virus type I, vaccinia, and polio virus. Another gene transfer method is physical transfer of plasmid DNA comprising the therapeutic polynucleotide in liposomes directly into prostate, preferably into tumors cells m situ Immunohposomes may improve cell type specificity as compared to liposomes by virtue ofthe inclusion of specific antibodies which presumably bind to surface antigens specific of prostate cells In one embodiment, antibodies are directed against PCTA-1 protein which is specific to prostate cancer cells Direct physical application of naked DNA comprising the therapeutic polynucleotide to the target cells is believed to be prefeπed in many cases. Vaccine composition The invention concerns a vaccine composition compnsing a vaccination agent including one of the following polypeptide: a) a polypeptide compnsing a contiguous span of at least 6 ammo acids, preferably at least 8 to 10 ammo acids, more preferably at least 12, 15, 20, 25, 30, 40, 50, or 100 ammo acids of SEQ ED No 5 , wherein said contigous span comprises l) a serine residue at ammo acid position 170 and/or a lysine residue at ammo acid position 203 in SEQ ED No 5; and/or n) at least one residue selected in the group consisting of a tyrosine residue at amino acid position 18, a cysteine residue at ammo acid position 35, a methionine residue at ammo acid position 55 and an argmme residue at ammo acid position 183 in SEQ ED No 5, b) a polypeptide comprising a contiguous span of at least 6 ammo acids, preferably at least 8 to 10 amino acids, more preferably at least 12, 15, 20, 25, 30, 40, 50, or 100 amino acids of SEQ ED No 6 , wherein said contigous span comprises: l) a serine residue at ammo acid position 170 and/or a lysine residue at ammo acid position 245 in SEQ ED No 6; and/or n) at least one residue selected in the group consisting of a tyrosine residue at ammo acid position 18, a cysteme residue at ammo acid position 35, a methionine residue at ammo acid position 55 and an argmme residue at ammo acid position 225 in SEQ ED No 6; and/or in) at least 1, 2, 3, 5 or 10 of the ammo acid encoded by the exon 6bιs, more particularly at least 1, 2, 3, 5 or 10 of the ammo acid positions 183-224 of the SEQ ED No 6; c) a polypeptide comprising a contiguous span of at least 6 ammo acids, preferably at least 8 to 10 ammo acids, more preferably at least 12, 15, 20, 25, 30, 40, 50, or 100 amino acids of SEQ TD No 7 , wherein said contigous span comprises I) a senne residue at amino acid position 170 and/or a lysine residue at ammo acid position 203 in SEQ ED No 7; and/or n) at least one residue selected in the group consisting of a tyrosine residue at amino acid position 18, a cysteine residue at ammo acid position 35, a methionine residue at amino acid position 55 and an argmme residue at ammo acid position 183 in SEQ ED No 7; and/or in) at least 1, 2, 3, 5 or 10 of the ammo acid encoded by the exons 9bιs and 9ter, more particularly at least 1, 2, 3, 5 or 10 ofthe ammo acid positions 313-368 ofthe SEQ ED No 7; and d) a polypeptide compnsing a contiguous span of at least 6 ammo acids, preferably at least 8 to 10 ammo acids, more preferably at least 12, 15, 20, 25, 30, 40, 50, or 100 ammo acids of SEQ ED No 9. "Vaccine agent or vaccination agent" is intended to designate a substance which has the ability, when administered to a patient in suitable amounts, to generate an immunogenic reaction which can confer either immunity to the patent against prostate cancer or kill or disable prostate cancer cells beanng on their surface the PCTA-1 protein or a fragment thereof. The vaccine compositions of the present invention are intended to be administered to patients m an amount sufficient to inhibit the growth of cancer cells expressing the PCTA-1 protein More particularly the vaccine composition is intended to decrease the growth rate, rate of division, or viability of the prostate cancer cells. The administration of a vaccine composition ofthe invention may be for either a "prophylactic" or "therapeutic" puφoses. When provided prophylactically, the vaccine agent are provided in advance of symptoms indicative of prostate cancer. The prophylactic administration of vaccine agent serves to prevent, attenuate, or inhibit of the growth of prostate cancer cells. The therapeutic administration ofthe vaccine agent serves to attenuate the pathological symptoms of prostate cancer, to decrease the size or growth of cancer tumors and or metastasis or to remove them The term "inhibition of growth" refers in the present application to the decrease ofthe rate of growth, rate of division, or viability ofthe cells in question. Indeed, as the PCTA-1 gene is specifically expressed in prostate cancer cells, these vaccine agents can initiate the production of PCTA-1 specific cytotoxic T lymphocytes which lyse cells beanng, preferably on their surface, PCTA-1, a fragment of PCTA-1, or one or more PCTA-1 epitope peptides thereof and which lead to an inhibition ofthe growth of cancer also beanng the PCTA-1 protein. Vaccine preparations which contain protein or peptide sequences as active substances are generally well known m the art, as exemplified by U.S. Patents 4,608,251; 4,601,903; 4,599,231; 4,599,230; 4,596,792; and 4,578,770. A vaccine according to the present invention may further contain auxiliary vaccine constituents, such as earners, buffers, stabilizers, solubihzers, adjuvants and preservatives In order to enhance the immunogenic character ofthe polypeptides taken from the mutated PCTA-1 protein, the polypeptides may be prepared as homopolymers (a multitude of identical polypeptides coupled to one another) or heteropolymers (a multitude of at least two different polypeptides coupled to one another). The vaccine agents ofthe present invention can be used in native form or can be modified to form a chemical derivative. As used herein, a molecule is said to be a "chemical derivative" of another molecule when it contains additional chemical moieties not normally a part ofthe molecule. Such moieties may improve the molecule's solubility, absoφtion, biological half life, etc... The moieties may alternatively decrease the toxicity ofthe molecule, eliminate or attenuate any undesirable side effect ofthe molecule, et. Moieties capable of mediating such effects are disclosed in Remington's Pharmaceutical Sciences (1980). The vaccine agents ofthe present invention may be administered m a convenient manner such as by oral, topical, intravenous, mtrapeπtoneal, intramuscular, subcutaneous, mtranasal, or mtradermal routes. The vaccine agents ofthe present invention are administered in an amount which is effective for freatment and/or prophylaxis ofthe specific indication. In general, they are administered in an amount of at least about 10 μg/kg body weight per day and in most cases they are administered in an amount not in excess of about 8 mg kg body weight per day. In most cases, the dosage is from about 10 μg/kg to about 1 mg/kg body weight daily, taking into account the routes of administration, symptoms, etc. When admmistenng the vaccine agent ofthe present invention to a patient, the dosage ofthe administered vaccine agent varies depending upon such factors as the patient's age, weight, sex, general medical condition, previous medical history In general, it is desirable to provide the recipient with a dosage of vaccine agent which is m the range of from about 1 pg/kg to 10 mg/kg body weight, although a lower or higher dosage may be administered. The therapeutically effective dose can be lowered by using combinations of the vaccine agents of the present invention or other agents. It is normally necessary to have multiple administrations ofthe vaccine agents, usually not exceeding six vaccinations, more usually not exceeding four vaccinations, preferably one or more vaccinations, more preferably about three vaccinations. The vaccinations will be normally be at from two to twelve week intervals, more usually from three to five week intervals. Peπodic boosters at intervals of 1-5 years will be desirable to maintain levels of protective immunity. The vaccine agents of the present invention are intended to be provided to recipient subjects in an amount sufficient to inhibit the growth (as defined above) of cancer cells bearing PCTA-1 protein. The effect of the vaccine agents of the present invention can be assessed through the measurement of released EFN-γ from memory T-lymphocytes. The stronger ofthe immune response, the more EFN-γ will be released. Accordingly, a vaccine according to the invention comprises a polypeptide capable of releasing from the memory T-lymphocytes at least 1500 pg/ml, preferably 200 pg ml, and more preferably 300 pg/ml of EFN-γ. Practically, the levels of EFN-γ from the primed lymphocytes are measured with m vitro proliferation assays of peπpheral blood lymphocytes co-cultured with a vaccine agents to be tested. These techniques are well known and may be found in a wide variety of patents, such as U.S. Patent 3,791,932; 4,174,384; and 3,949,064, as illustrative of these types of assays. The administration ofthe vaccine agent ofthe invention may be for either a "prophylactic" or "therapeutic" puφoses When provided prophylactically, the vaccine agent are administered in advance of any symptoms indicative of prostate cancer. The prophylactic administration ofthe vaccine agent serves to prevent, attenuate, or inhibit ofthe growth of prostate cancer cells. The therapeutic administration ofthe vaccine agent serves to attenuate the pathological symptoms of prostate cancer and to decrease the size of prostate cancer tumors or to remove them. Typically, such vaccine agents are prepared as injectable either as liquid solutions or suspensions. Solid forms suitable for solution in, or suspension in, liquid pnor to injection may also be prepared. The preparation may be emulsified. The active immunogenic ingredient is often mixed with excipients which are pharmaceutically acceptable and compatible with the vaccine agent. Suitable excipients are, for example, water, salme, dextrose, ethanol, or the like, and combinations thereof. In addition, if desired, the vaccine may contain minor amounts of auxiliary substances such as wetting or emulsifying agents, pH buffering agents, or adjuvants which enhance the effectiveness ofthe vaccines. PCTA-1 protein and peptides, preferably mutated, may be formulated into the vaccine as neutral or salt forms. Pharmaceutically acceptable salts include acid addition salts which are formed between the free ammo groups of the peptide, and inorganic acids, such as hydrochloric or phosphoric acids, or organic acids, such as acetic oxalic, tartaπc, mandelic, and the like. Salts formed with the free carboxyl groups may also be denved from inorganic bases such as sodium, potassium, ammonium, calcium, or feme hydroxydes, or from organic bases such as isopropylamine, tπmethylamine, 2-ethylammoethanol, histidine, procaine, and the like. Some ofthe polypeptides ofthe vaccine agents ofthe invention are sufficiently immunogenic in a vaccine, but the immune response can be enhanced if the vaccine further comprises an adjuvant substance. Various methods of achieving adjuvant effects for vaccines include the use of agents such as alumimm hydroxide or phosphate, commonly used as 0.05 to 0.1 percent solution in phosphate buffered saline, admixture with synthetic polymers of sugars (Carbopol) used as 0.25 percent solution, aggregation ofthe protein m the vaccine by heat treatment with temperature ranging between 70°C and 101 °C for 30 second to 2 minute periods, respectively. Aggregation by reacting with pepsm treated antibodies (Fab) to albumin, mixture with bacteπal cells such as C. parvum or endotoxms or hpopolysacchande components of gram-negative bacteria, emulsion in physiologically acceptable oil vehicles such as mannide monoleate (Aracel A) or emulsion with 20 percent solution of a perfluorocarbon (Fluosol-DA) used as a block substitute may also be employed. According to the invention, dimethyldioctadecylammomum bromide is an interesting candidate for an adjuvant, but also Freund's complete and incomplete adjuvants as well as QuilA and REBI are interesting possibilities. Other possibilities involve the use of immune modulating substances such as lymphokmes (e.g. EFN-γ, IL-2 and EL-12) or synthetic EFN-γ mducers such as poly I:C in combination with the above-mentioned adjuvants. The vaccine agent ofthe present invention can be formulated according to known methods to prepare pharmaceutically useful compositions, whereby immunogenic peptides, or their functional deπvatives, are combined m admixture with a pharmaceutically acceptable earner vehicle Suitable vehicles and their formulation, inclusive of other human proteins, such as human serum albumin, are 5 described Remington's Pharmaceutical Sciences (1980). In order to form a pharmaceutically acceptable composition suitable for effective administration, such compositions will contain an effective amount of one or more ofthe vaccine agents ofthe present invention, together with a suitable amount of a caπier vehicle. Additional pharmaceutical methods may be employed to confrol the duration of action. 10 Control release preparations may be achieved through the use of polymers to complex or absorb one or more ofthe vaccine agents ofthe present invention The controlled delivery may be exercised by selecting appropπate macromolecule (for example polyesters, polyammo acids, polyvinyl, pyπohdone, ethylenevinylacetate, methylcellulose, carboxymethylcellulose, protamme, or sulfate) and the concentration of macromolecules as well as the methods of mcoφoration in order to control 15 release. Another possible method to control the duration of action by controlled release preparations is to incoφorate vaccine agents ofthe present invention into particles of a polymeric matenal such as polyesters, polyammo acids, hydrogels, poly(lactιc acid) or ethylene vmylacetate copolymers. Alternatively, instead of incoφorating these vaccine agents into polymeric particles, it is possible to entrap these mateπals m microcapsules prepared, for example, bu coacervation techniques or by 20 mterfacial polymerization, for example, hydroxymethylcellulose or gelatme-microcapsules and poly(methylmethacylate) microcapsules, respectively, onn colloidal drug delivery systems, for example, liposomes, albumin microspheres, microemulsions, nanoparticles, and nanocapsules or in macroemulsions. Such techniques are disclosed in Remington's Pharmaceutical Sciences (1980). The invention further provides a pharmaceutical pack or kit comprising one or more 25 containers filled with one or more ofthe ingredients of the vaccine compositions of the invention. Computer-Related Embodiments As used herein the term "nucleic acid codes ofthe invention" encompass the nucleotide sequences compπsmg, consisting essentially of, or consisting of any one ofthe following: a) a contiguous span of at least 12, 15, 18, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 50, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100, 150, 200, 500, or 30 1000 nucleotides of SEQ ED No 1, wherein said contiguous span compπses at least 1, 2, 3, 5, or 10 of the following nucleotide positions of SEQ ED No 1: 1-70715, 70795-82207, 82297-83612, 83824- 85297, 85418-86388, 86446-87495, 87523-88294, 88384-89483, 89650-92748, 97156-98309, 98476-99329, 99491-100026, 100212-100281, 100396-100538, 100682-100833, 100995-101920, 102087-102970, 103264-103724, and 103753-106746; b) a contiguous span of at least 12, 15, 18, 35 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 50, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100, 150, 200, 500, or 1000 nucleotides of SEQ ED No 1 or the complements thereof, wherein said contiguous span compπses at least one nucleotide selected from the group consisting of a nucleotide G at positions 70728, 87860, 88297, 94432, and 95340 of SEQ ED No 1; a nucleotide A at positions 82218, 83644, 83808, 87787, 87806, 94218, and 97144 of SEQ ED No 1 ; a nucleotide C at positions 87902, 88215, 88283, 92760, 93726, and 94422 of SEQ TD No 1; and a nucleotide T at positions 93903, and 94170 of SEQ ED No 1; c) a contiguous span of at 5 least 12, 15, 18, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 50, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100, 150, 200, 500, or 1000 nucleotides of SEQ TD No 1 or the complements thereof, wherein said contiguous span compπses at least one nucleotide selected from the group consisting of a nucleotide G at positions 86435, 93592, 93680, 93681, 93682, 93728, 93761, and 95445 of SEQ ED No 1; a nucleotide A at positions 86434, 88355, 93240, 93471, and 93747of SEQ ED No 1; a nucleotide C at positions 93683, 95126, and 95444 of 10 SEQ ED No 1, and a nucleotide T at positions 94154, and 94430 of SEQ ED No 1; d) a contiguous span of at least 12, 15, 18, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 50, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100, 150, 200, 500, or 1000 nucleotides of SEQ ED No 1 or the complements thereof, wherein said contiguous span compπses nucleotide positions selected from the group consisting ofthe nucleotide positions of SEQ ID No 1: 92975-92977, 93711-93715, 94151-94153, 94240-94243, 94770-94773, 94804-94808, 95121- 15 95122, 95129-95135, 95148-95153, 95154-95159, 95173-95178, 95367-95374, 95410-95413, 95418-95420, 95430-95436, 95533-95535, and 95677-95677, e) a contiguous span of at least 12, 15, 18, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 50, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100, 150, 200, 500, or 1000 nucleotides of SEQ ED No 2 or the complements thereof, wherein said contiguous span comprises at least 1, 2, 3, 5, or 10 ofthe nucleotide positions 1-162 of SEQ ED No 2; f) a contiguous span of at least 12, 15, 18, 20, 25, 30, 20 35, 40, 50, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100, 150, 200, 500, or 1000 nucleotides of SEQ ED No 2 or the complements thereof, wherein said contiguous span comprises at least one nucleotide selected in the group consisting of a nucleotide A at positions 253, 363, 527, 2471, and 5397 of SEQ ED No 2; a nucleotide C at positions 1013, 1979, and 2675 of SEQ ED No 2; a nucleotide G at positions 176, 749, 2685, 3593 of SEQ TD No 2; and a nucleotide T at positions 2156, and 2423 of SEQ TD No 2; 25 g) a contiguous span of at least 12, 15, 18, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 50, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100, 150, 200, 500, or 1000 nucleotides of SEQ ED No 2 or the complements thereof, wherein said contiguous span comprises at least one nucleotide selected m the group consisting of a nucleotide A at positions 708, 807, 1493, 1724, and 2000; a nucleotide C at positions 1936, 3379, and 3697; a nucleotide G at positions 709, 1845, 1933, 1934, 1935, 1981, 2014, and 3698; and a nucleotide T at positions 2407, 30 and 2683 of SEQ TD No 2; h) a contiguous span of at least 12, 15, 18, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 50, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100, 150, 200, 500, or 1000 nucleotides of SEQ ED No 2 or the complements thereof, wherein said contiguous span compnses nucleotide positions selected from the group consisting of the nucleotide positions of SEQ ED No 2: 1229-1231, 1964-1968, 2404-2406, 2493-2496, 3023- 3026, 3057-3061, 3374-3375, 3382-3388, 3401-3406, 3407-3412, 3426-3431, 3620-3627, 3663- 35 3666, 3671-3673, 3683-3689, 3786-3788 and 3930-3932; l) a contiguous span of at least 12, 15, 18, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 50, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100, 150, 200, 500, or 1000 nucleotides of SEQ ED No 3 or the complements thereof, wherein said contiguous span comprises at least 1, 2, 3, 5, or 10 ofthe following nucleotide positions of SEQ ID No 3: 1-162 and 747-872; j) a contiguous span of at least 12, 15, 18, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 50, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100, 150, 200, 500, or 1000 nucleotides of SEQ TD No 3 or the complements thereof, wherein said contiguous span comprises at least one nucleotide selected in the group consisting of a nucleotide A at positions 253, 363, 527, 2597, and 5523 of SEQ 5 ID No 3; a nucleotide C at positions 1139, 2105, and 2801 of SEQ ED No 3; a nucleotide G at positions 176, 875, 2811, 3719 of SEQ TD No 3; and a nucleotide T at positions 2282, and 2549 of SEQ ED No 3; k) a contiguous span of at least 12, 15, 18, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 50, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100, 150, 200, 500, or 1000 nucleotides of SEQ ED No 3 or the complements thereof, wherein said contiguous span comprises at least one nucleotide selected in the group consisting of a nucleotide A 10 at positions 708, 807, 1619, 1850, and 2126; a nucleotide C at positions 2062, 3505, and 3823; a nucleotide G at positions 709, 1971, 2059, 2060, 2061, 2107, 2140, and 3824; and a nucleotide T at positions 2533, and 2809 of SEQ ED No 3; 1) a contiguous span of at least 12, 15, 18, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 50, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100, 150, 200, 500, or 1000 nucleotides of SEQ ED No 3 or the complements thereof, wherein said contiguous span comprises nucleotide positions selected from the group 15 consisting ofthe nucleotide positions of SEQ ED No 3- 1355-1357, 1892-1894, 2090-2094, 2530- 2532, 2619-2622, 3149-3152, 3183-3187, 3500-3501, 3508-3514, 3527-3532, 3533-3538, 3552- 3557, 3746-3749, 3789-3792, 3797-3799, 3809-3815, 3912-3914 and 4056-4058; m) a contiguous span of at least 12, 15, 18, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 50, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100, 150, 200, 500, or 1000 nucleotides of SEQ ED No 4 or the complements thereof, wherein said contiguous span comprises at 20 least 1, 2, 3, 5, or 10 ofthe nucleotide positions 1-162 of SEQ ED No 4; n) a contiguous span of at least 12, 15, 18, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 50, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100, 150, 200, 500, or 1000 nucleotides of SEQ ED No 4 or the complements thereof, wherein said contiguous span comprises at least one nucleotide selected in the group consisting of a nucleotide A at positions 253, 363, 527 and 2460 of SEQ ED No 4; a nucleotide C at position 1013 of SEQ ED No 4 and a nucleotide G at positions 176, 25 and 749 of SEQ TD No 4; o) a contiguous span of at least 12, 15, 18, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 50, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100, 150, 200, 500, or 1000 nucleotides of SEQ ED No 4 or the complements thereof, wherein said contiguous span compnses at least one nucleotide selected m the group consisting of a nucleotide A at positions 708 and 807 and a nucleotide G at position 709 of SEQ ED No 4; p) a contiguous span of at least 12, 15, 18, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 50, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100, 150, 200, 500, or 30 1000 nucleotides of SEQ ED No 4 or the complements thereof, wherein said contiguous span comprises the pairs of nucleotide positions 1136-1137 of SEQ ED No 4; q) a contiguous span of at least 12, 15, 18, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 50, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100, 150, 200, 500, or 1000 nucleotides of SEQ ED No 8 or the complements thereof, wherein said contiguous span comprises at least 1, 2, 3, 5, or 10 ofthe following nucleotide positions of SEQ ED No 8: 1-500, 501-1000, 1001-1500, and 1501- 35 1738; and, r) a nucleotide sequence complementary to any one of the preceding nucleotide sequences. The "nucleic acid codes ofthe invention" further encompass nucleotide sequences homologous to: a) a contiguous span comprises at least 1, 2, 3, 5, or 10 ofthe following nucleotide positions of SEQ ED No 1 * 1-70715, 70795-82207, 82297-83612, 83824-85297, 85418-86388, 86446-87495, 87523-88294, 88384-89483, 89650-92748, 97156-98309, 98476-99329, 99491- 100026, 100212-100281, 100396-100538, 100682-100833, 100995-101920, 102087-102970, 103264-103724, and 103753-106746; b) a contiguous span of at least 12, 15, 18, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 50, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100, 150, 200, 500, or 1000 nucleotides of SEQ ED No 2 or the complements thereof, wherein said contiguous span comprises at least 1, 2, 3, 5, or 10 ofthe nucleotide positions 1-162 of SEQ ED No 2, c) a contiguous span of at least 12, 15, 18, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 50, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100, 150, 200, 500, or 1000 nucleotides of SEQ ED No 3 or the complements thereof, wherein said contiguous span comprises at least 1, 2, 3, 5, or 10 of the following nucleotide positions of SEQ ID No 3: 1-162 and 747-872; d) a contiguous span of at least 12, 15, 18, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 50, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100, 150, 200, 500, or 1000 nucleotides of SEQ ED No 4 or the complements thereof, wherein said contiguous span compπses at least 1, 2, 3, 5, or 10 of the nucleotide positions 1-162 of SEQ ED No 4, e) a contiguous span of at least 12, 15, 18, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 50, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100, 150, 200, 500, or 1000 nucleotides of SEQ ED No 8 or the complements thereof, wherein said contiguous span comprises at least 1, 2, 3, 5, or 10 of the following nucleotide positions of SEQ ED No 8: 1-500, 501-1000, 1001-1500, and 1501-1738; and f) sequences complementary to all ofthe preceding sequences. Homologous sequences refer to a sequence having at least 99%, 98%, 97%, 96%, 95%, 90%, 85%, 80%, or 75% homology to these contiguous spans. Homology may be determined using any method descnbed herein, including BLAST2N with the default parameters or with any modified parameters. Homologous sequences also may include RNA sequences in which undmes replace the thymines in the nucleic acid codes ofthe invention. It will be appreciated that the nucleic acid codes ofthe invention can be represented m the traditional single character format (See the inside back cover of Stryer, Lubert. Biochemistry, 3 rd edition W. H Freeman & Co., New York.) or in any other format or code which records the identity ofthe nucleotides in a sequence. As used herein the term "polypeptide codes ofthe invention" encompass the polypeptide sequences compnsing * a) a contiguous span of at least 6 amino acids, preferably at least 8 to 10 amino acids, more preferably at least 12, 15, 20, 25, 30, 40, 50, or 100 amino acids of SEQ ID No 5, wherein said contiguous span includes: I) a serine residue at ammo acid position 170 and/or a lysine residue at ammo acid position 203 in SEQ ED No 5; and/or n) at least one residue selected m the group consisting of a tyrosme residue at ammo acid position 18, a cysteine residue at ammo acid position 35, a methionine residue at amino acid position 55 and an argmme residue at ammo acid position 183 m SEQ TD No 5; b) a contiguous span of at least 6 ammo acids, preferably at least 8 to 10 amino acids, more preferably at least 12, 15, 20, 25, 30, 40, 50, or 100 ammo acids of SEQ ED No 6, wherein said contiguous span includes: 1) a senne residue at ammo acid position 170 and/or a lysine residue at ammo acid position 245 in SEQ ED No 6; and/or n) at least one residue selected m the group consisting of a tyrosine residue at amino acid position 18, a cysteine residue at ammo acid position 35, a methionine residue at ammo 5 acid position 55 and an argmme residue at amino acid position 225 in SEQ TD No 6; and/or in) at least 1, 2, 3, 5 or 10 ofthe ammo acid encoded by the exon 6bιs, more particularly at least 1, 2, 3, 5 or 10 of the ammo acid positions 183-224 of the SEQ ED No 6; c) a contiguous span of at least 6 amino acids, preferably at least 8 to 10 ammo acids, more preferably at least 12, 15, 20, 25, 30, 40, 50, or 100 ammo acids of SEQ ED No 7, wherein said 10 contiguous span includes: l) a senne residue at amino acid position 170 and/or a lysine residue at ammo acid position 203 m SEQ ED No 7; and/or n) at least one residue selected m the group consisting of a tyrosine residue at ammo acid position 18, a cysteine residue at ammo acid position 35, a methionine residue at ammo acid position 15 55 and an argmme residue at amino acid position 183 in SEQ ID No 7; and/or m) at least 1, 2, 3, 5 or 10 ofthe ammo acid encoded by the exons 9bιs and 9ter, more particularly at least 1, 2, 3, 5 or 10 of the ammo acid positions 313-368 of the SEQ ED No 7; and, d) a contiguous span of at least 6 ammo acids, preferably at least 8 to 10 ammo acids, more preferably at least 12, 15, 20, 25, 30, 40, 50, or 100 amino acids of SEQ TD No 9. 20 It will be appreciated that the polypeptide codes ofthe invention can be represented in the traditional single character format or three letter format (See the inside back cover of Stryer, Lubert Biochemistry, 3 rd edition. W. H Freeman & Co., New York ) or in any other format or code which records the identity ofthe polypeptides in a sequence. It will be appreciated by those skilled m the art that the nucleic acid codes ofthe invention and 25 polypeptide codes ofthe invention can be stored, recorded, and manipulated on any medium which can be read and accessed by a computer. As used herein, the words "recorded" and "stored" refer to a process for stoπng information on a computer medium. A skilled artisan can readily adopt any ofthe presently known methods for recording information on a computer readable medium to generate manufactures compnsing one or more ofthe nucleic acid codes ofthe invention, or one or more ofthe 30 polypeptide codes ofthe invention. Another aspect ofthe present invention is a computer readable medium having recorded thereon at least 2, 5, 10, 15, 20, 25, 30, or 50 nucleic acid codes ofthe invention. Another aspect ofthe present invention is a computer readable medium having recorded thereon at least 2, 5, 10, 15, 20, 25, 30, or 50 polypeptide codes ofthe invention. Computer readable media include magnetically readable media, optically readable media, 35 electronically readable media and magnetic/optical media. For example, the computer readable media may be a hard disk, a floppy disk, a magnetic tape, CD-ROM, Digital Versatile Disk (DVD), Random Access Memory (RAM), or Read Only Memory (ROM) as well as other types of other media known to those skilled m the art. Embodiments ofthe present invention include systems, particularly computer systems which store and manipulate the sequence information descnbed herein. One example of a computer system 5 100 is illustrated in block diagram form in Figure 3. As used herein, "a computer system" refers to the hardware components, software components, and data storage components used to analyze the nucleotide sequences ofthe nucleic acid codes ofthe invention or the ammo acid sequences ofthe polypeptide codes ofthe invention. In one embodiment, the computer system 100 is a Sun Enteφπse 1000 server (Sun Microsystems, Palo Alto, CA). The computer system 100 preferably includes a 10 processor for processing, accessing and manipulating the sequence data. The processor 105 can be any well-known type of central processing unit, such as the Pentium III from Intel Coφoration, or similar processor from Sun, Motorola, Compaq or International Business Machines. Preferably, the computer system 100 is a general puφose system that compπses the processor 105 and one or more internal data storage components 110 for stoπng data, and one or more data 15 retrieving devices for retnevmg the data stored on the data storage components. A skilled artisan can readily appreciate that any one ofthe cuπently available computer systems are suitable. In one particular embodiment, the computer system 100 includes a processor 105 connected to a bus which is connected to a mam memory 115 (preferably implemented as RAM) and one or more internal data storage devices 110, such as a hard dnve and/or other computer readable media having 20 data recorded thereon. In some embodiments, the computer system 100 further includes one or more data retnevmg device 118 for reading the data stored on the internal data storage devices 110. The data retnevmg device 118 may represent, for example, a floppy disk dnve, a compact disk dnve, a magnetic tape dnve, etc. In some embodiments, the internal data storage device 110 is a removable computer readable medium such as a floppy disk, a compact disk, a magnetic tape, etc 25 containing control logic and/or data recorded thereon. The computer system 100 may advantageously include or be programmed by appropnate software for reading the control logic and/or the data from the data storage component once inserted in the data retnevmg device. The computer system 100 includes a display 120 which is used to display output to a computer user. It should also be noted that the computer system 100 can be linked to other computer systems 30 125a-c m a network or wide area network to provide centralized access to the computer system 100. Software for accessing and processing the nucleotide sequences ofthe nucleic acid codes ofthe invention or the amino acid sequences ofthe polypeptide codes ofthe invention (such as search tools, compare tools, and modeling tools etc.) may reside m ma memory 115 dunng execution. In some embodiments, the computer system 100 may further comprise a sequence comparer for 35 comparing the above-descnbed nucleic acid codes ofthe invention or the polypeptide codes ofthe invention stored on a computer readable medium to reference nucleotide or polypeptide sequences stored on a computer readable medium. A "sequence comparer" refers to one or more programs which are implemented on the computer system 100 to compare a nucleotide or polypeptide sequence with other nucleotide or polypeptide sequences and/or compounds including but not limited to peptides, peptidomimetics, and chemicals stored withm the data storage means For example, the sequence comparer may compare the nucleotide sequences of nucleic acid codes ofthe invention or the ammo 5 acid sequences ofthe polypeptide codes ofthe invention stored on a computer readable medium to reference sequences stored on a computer readable medium to identify homologies, motifs implicated in biological function, or structural motifs. The vaπous sequence comparer programs identified elsewhere m this patent specification are particularly contemplated for use m this aspect ofthe invention. Figure 4 is a flow diagram illustrating one embodiment of a process 200 for compaπng a new 10 nucleotide or protein sequence with a database of sequences in order to determine the homology levels between the new sequence and the sequences m the database. The database of sequences can be a pπvate database stored within the computer system 100, or a public database such as GENBANK, PER OR SWISSPROT that is available through the Internet. The process 200 begins at a start state 201 and then moves to a state 202 wherein the new 15 sequence to be compared is stored to a memory m a computer system 100 As discussed above, the memory could be any type of memory, including RAM or an internal storage device The process 200 then moves to a state 204 wherein a database of sequences is opened for analysis and companson The process 200 then moves to a state 206 wherein the first sequence stored in the database is read into a memory on the computer A companson is then performed at a state 210 20 to determine if the first sequence is the same as the second sequence. It is important to note that this step is not limited to performing an exact companson between the new sequence and the first sequence m the database Well-known methods are known to those of skill m the art for compaπng two nucleotide or protem sequences, even if they are not identical. For example, gaps can be mfroduced into one sequence m order to raise the homology level between the two tested sequences The parameters 25 that control whether gaps or other features are introduced into a sequence dunng companson are normally entered by the user ofthe computer system. Once a companson ofthe two sequences has been performed at the state 210, a determination is made at a decision state 210 whether the two sequences are the same. Of course, the term "same" is not limited to sequences that are absolutely identical. Sequences that are within the homology parameters 30 entered by the user will be marked as "same" in the process 200. If a determination is made that the two sequences are the same, the process 200 moves to a state 214 wherein the name ofthe sequence from the database is displayed to the user This state notifies the user that the sequence with the displayed name fulfills the homology constraints that were entered. Once the name ofthe stored sequence is displayed to the user, the process 200 moves to a decision state 35 218 wherein a determination is made whether more sequences exist in the database. If no more sequences exist in the database, then the process 200 terminates at an end state 220. However, if more sequences do exist m the database, then the process 200 moves to a state 224 wherein a pointer is moved to the next sequence m the database so that it can be compared to the new sequence In this manner, the new sequence is aligned and compared with every sequence in the database It should be noted that if a determination had been made at the decision state 212 that the sequences were not homologous, then the process 200 would move immediately to the decision state 5 218 m order to determine if any other sequences were available in the database for companson Accordingly, one aspect ofthe present invention is a computer system comprising a processor, a data storage device having stored thereon a nucleic acid code of the invention or a polypeptide code ofthe invention, a data storage device having retπevably stored thereon reference nucleotide sequences or polypeptide sequences to be compared to the nucleic acid code ofthe 0 invention or polypeptide code of the invention and a sequence comparer for conducting the comparison The sequence comparer may indicate a homology level between the sequences compared or identify structural motifs m the nucleic acid code ofthe invention and polypeptide codes ofthe invention or it may identify structural motifs in sequences which are compared to these nucleic acid codes and polypeptide codes In some embodiments, the data storage device may have 5 stored thereon the sequences of at least 2, 5, 10, 15, 20, 25, 30, or 50 ofthe nucleic acid codes ofthe invention or polypeptide codes ofthe invention Another aspect ofthe present invention is a method for determining the level of homology between a nucleic acid code ofthe invention and a reference nucleotide sequence, compnsing the steps of reading the nucleic acid code and the reference nucleotide sequence through the use of a 0 computer program which determines homology levels and determining homology between the nucleic acid code and the reference nucleotide sequence with the computer program The computer program may be any of a number of computer programs for determining homology levels, including those specifically enumerated herein, including BLAST2N with the default parameters or with any modified parameters The method may be implemented using the computer systems descnbed above The 5 method may also be performed by reading 2, 5, 10, 15, 20, 25, 30, or 50 ofthe above described nucleic acid codes ofthe invention through the use of the computer program and determining homology between the nucleic acid codes and reference nucleotide sequences Figure 5 is a flow diagram illustrating one embodiment of a process 250 in a computer for determining whether two sequences are homologous The process 250 begins at a start state 252 and 0 then moves to a state 254 wherein a first sequence to be compared is stored to a memory The second sequence to be compared is then stored to a memory at a state 256 The process 250 then moves to a state 260 wherein the first character in the first sequence is read and then to a state 262 wherein the first character ofthe second sequence is read It should be understood that if the sequence is a nucleotide sequence, then the character would normally be either A, T, C, G or U If 5 the sequence is a protein sequence, then it should be in the single letter ammo acid code so that the first and sequence sequences can be easily compared A determination is then made at a decision state 264 whether the two characters are the same. If they are the same, then the process 250 moves to a state 268 wherein the next characters in the first and second sequences are read. A determination is then made whether the next characters are the same. If they are, then the process 250 continues this loop until two characters are not the same. If a determination is made that the next two characters are not the same, the process 250 moves to a decision state 274 to determine whether there are any more characters either sequence to read. If there aren't any more characters to read, then the process 250 moves to a state 276 wherein the level of homology between the first and second sequences is displayed to the user. The level of homology is determined by calculating the proportion of characters between the sequences that were the same out ofthe total number of sequences m the first sequence. Thus, if every character in a first 100 nucleotide sequence aligned with a every character in a second sequence, the homology level would be 100%. Alternatively, the computer program may be a computer program which compares the nucleotide sequences ofthe nucleic acid codes ofthe present invention, to reference nucleotide sequences m order to determine whether the nucleic acid code ofthe invention differs from a reference nucleic acid sequence at one or more positions. Optionally such a program records the length and identity of inserted, deleted or substituted nucleotides with respect to the sequence of either the reference polynucleotide or the nucleic acid code ofthe invention. In one embodiment, the computer program may be a program which determines whether the nucleotide sequences ofthe nucleic acid codes ofthe invention contain one or more single nucleotide polymoφhisms (SNP) with respect to a reference nucleotide sequence. These single nucleotide polymoφhisms may each compπse a single base substitution, insertion, or deletion. Another aspect ofthe present invention is a method for determining the level of homology between a polypeptide code ofthe invention and a reference polypeptide sequence, compnsing the steps of reading the polypeptide code ofthe invention and the reference polypeptide sequence through use of a computer program which determines homology levels and determining homology between the polypeptide code and the reference polypeptide sequence using the computer program. Accordingly, another aspect ofthe present invention is a method for determining whether a nucleic acid code ofthe invention differs at one or more nucleotides from a reference nucleotide sequence comprising the steps of reading the nucleic acid code and the reference nucleotide sequence through use of a computer program which identifies differences between nucleic acid sequences and identifying differences between the nucleic acid code and the reference nucleotide sequence with the computer program. In some embodiments, the computer program is a program which identifies single nucleotide polymoφhisms The method may be implemented by the computer systems descnbed above and the method illustrated in Figure 5. The method may also be performed by reading at least 2, 5, 10, 15, 20, 25, 30, or 50 of the nucleic acid codes ofthe invention and the reference nucleotide sequences through the use ofthe computer program and identifying differences between the nucleic acid codes and the reference nucleotide sequences with the computer program. In other embodiments the computer based system may further compπse an identifier for identifying features withm the nucleotide sequences of the nucleic acid codes ofthe invention or the 5 ammo acid sequences of the polypeptide codes of the invention An "identifier" refers to one or more programs which identifies certain features within the above-described nucleotide sequences of the nucleic acid codes of the invention or the ammo acid sequences ofthe polypeptide codes ofthe invention. In one embodiment, the identifier may comprise a program which identifies an open reading frame in the cDNAs codes of the invention 10 Figure 6 is a flow diagram illustrating one embodiment of an identifier process 300 for detecting the presence of a feature in a sequence. The process 300 begins at a start state 302 and then moves to a state 304 wherein a first sequence that is to be checked for features is stored to a memory 115 m the computer system 100. The process 300 then moves to a state 306 wherein a database of sequence features is opened. Such a database would include a list of each feature's 15 attributes along with the name of the feature. For example, a feature name could be "Initiation Codon" and the attribute would be "ATG". Another example would be the feature name "TAATAA Box" and the feature attribute would be "TAATAA". An example of such a database is produced by the University of Wisconsin Genetics Computer Group (www.gcg.com) Once the database of features is opened at the state 306, the process 300 moves to a state 20 308 wherein the first feature is read from the database A comparison of the attnbute of the first feature with the first sequence is then made at a state 310. A determination is then made at a decision state 316 whether the attnbute ofthe feature was found in the first sequence. If the attnbute was found, then the process 300 moves to a state 318 wherein the name of the found feature is displayed to the user. 25 The process 300 then moves to a decision state 320 wherein a determination is made whether move features exist in the database. If no more features do exist, then the process 300 terminates at an end state 324 However, if more features do exist in the database, then the process 300 reads the next sequence feature at a state 326 and loops back to the state 310 wherein the attribute of the next feature is compared against the first sequence 30 It should be noted, that if the feature attπbute is not found m the first sequence at the decision state 316, the process 300 moves directly to the decision state 320 in order to determine if any more features exist in the database. In another embodiment, the identifier may comprise a molecular modeling program which determines the 3-dιmensιonal structure ofthe polypeptides codes ofthe invention. In some 35 embodiments, the molecular modeling program identifies target sequences that are most compatible with profiles representing the structural environments ofthe residues in known three-dimensional protein structures. (See, e.g., Eisenberg et al., U.S. Patent No 5,436,850 issued July 25, 1995). In another technique, the known three-dimensional sfructures of proteins m a given family are supenmposed to define the structurally conserved regions in that family. This protem modeling technique also uses the known three-dimensional structure of a homologous protem to approximate the structure ofthe polypeptide codes of the invention. (See e.g., Snmvasan, et al., U.S. Patent No. 5,557,535 issued September 17, 1996). Conventional homology modeling techniques have been used routinely to build models of proteases and antibodies. (Sowdhamim et al., 1997). Comparative approaches can also be used to develop three-dimensional protein models when the protem of interest has poor sequence identity to template proteins. In some cases, proteins fold into similar three-dimensional structures despite having very weak sequence identities. For example, the three - dimensional sfructures of a number of helical cytokines fold in similar three-dimensional topology m spite of weak sequence homology. The recent development of threading methods now enables the identification of likely folding patterns in a number of situations where the structural relatedness between target and template(s) is not detectable at the sequence level. Hybnd methods, in which fold recognition is performed using Multiple Sequence Threading (MST), structural equivalencies are deduced from the threading output using a distance geometry program DRAGON to construct a low resolution model, and a full-atom representation is constructed using a molecular modeling package such as QUANTA According to this 3-step approach, candidate templates are first identified by using the novel fold recognition algorithm MST, which is capable of performing simultaneous threading of multiple aligned sequences onto one or more 3-D structures. In a second step, the structural equivalencies obtained from the MST output are converted into inteπesidue distance restraints and fed into the distance geometry program DRAGON, together with auxiliary information obtained from secondary structure predictions. The program combines the restraints m an unbiased manner and rapidly generates a large number of low resolution model confirmations. In a third step, these low resolution model confirmations are converted into full-atom models and subjected to energy minimization using the molecular modeling package QUANTA. (See e.g., Aszόdi et al., 1997). The results ofthe molecular modeling analysis may then be used m rational drug design techniques to identify agents which modulate the activity ofthe polypeptide codes ofthe invention. Accordingly, another aspect of the present invention is a method of identifying a feature withm the nucleic acid codes ofthe invention or the polypeptide codes of the invention comprising reading the nucleic acid code(s) or the polypeptide code(s) through the use of a computer program which identifies features therein and identifying features within the nucleic acid code(s) or polypeptide code(s) with the computer program. In one embodiment, computer program comprises a computer program which identifies open reading frames. In a further embodiment, the computer program identifies structural motifs m a polypeptide sequence. In another embodiment, the computer program comprises a molecular modeling program. The method may be performed by reading a single sequence or at least 2, 5, 10, 15, 20, 25, 30, or 50 of the nucleic acid codes of the invention or the polypeptide codes of the invention through the use of the computer program and identifying features within the nucleic acid codes or polypeptide codes with the computer program. The nucleic acid codes ofthe invention or the polypeptide codes ofthe invention may be stored and manipulated m a vaπety of data processor programs in a vaπety of formats. For example, they may be stored as text m a word processing file, such as MicrosoftWORD or WORDPERFECT or as an ASCII file in a vaπety of database programs familiar to those of skill m the art, such as DB2, SYBASE, or ORACLE. In addition, many computer programs and databases may be used as sequence comparers, identifiers, or sources of reference nucleotide or polypeptide sequences to be compared to the nucleic acid codes of the invention or the polypeptide codes of the invention. The following list is intended not to limit the invention but to provide guidance to programs and databases which are useful with the nucleic acid codes ofthe invention or the polypeptide codes of the invention. The programs and databases which may be used include, but are not limited to: MacPattern (EMBL), DiscoveryBase (Molecular Applications Group), GeneMme (Molecular Applications Group), Look (Molecular Applications Group), MacLook (Molecular Applications Group), BLAST and BLAST2 (NCBI), BLASTN and BLASTX (Altschul et al, 1990), FASTA (Pearson and Lipman, 1988), FASTDB (Brutlag et al., 1990), Catalyst (Molecular Simulations Inc.), Catalyst/SHAPE (Molecular Simulations Inc.), Cenus 2 .DB Access (Molecular Simulations Inc.), HypoGen (Molecular Simulations Inc.), Insight II, (Molecular Simulations Inc.), Discover (Molecular Simulations Inc ), CHARMm (Molecular Simulations Inc.), Felix (Molecular Simulations Inc.), DelPhi, (Molecular Simulations Inc.), QuanteMM, (Molecular Simulations Inc.), Homology (Molecular Simulations Inc.), Modeler (Molecular Simulations Inc.), ISIS (Molecular Simulations Inc.), Quanta/Protem Design (Molecular Simulations Inc.), WebLab (Molecular Simulations Inc.), WebLab Diversity Explorer (Molecular Simulations Inc.), Gene Explorer (Molecular Simulations Inc.), SeqFold (Molecular Simulations Inc.), the EMBL/Swissprotein database, the MDL Available Chemicals Directory database, the MDL Drug Data Report data base, the Comprehensive Medicinal Chemistry database, Derwents's World Drug Index database, the BioByteMasterFile database, the Genbank database, and the Genseqn database Many other programs and data bases would be apparent to one of skill in the art given the present disclosure. Motifs which may be detected using the above programs include sequences encoding leucine zippers, hehx-turn-hehx motifs, glycosylation sites, ubiquitmation sites, alpha helices, and beta sheets, signal sequences encoding signal peptides which direct the secretion ofthe encoded proteins, sequences implicated m transcription regulation such as homeoboxes, acidic stretches, enzymatic active sites, substrate binding sites, and enzymatic cleavage sites. Throughout this application, various publications, patents and published patent applications are cited The disclosures of these publications, patents and published patent specification referenced in this application are hereby incoφorated by reference into the present disclosure to more fully descnbe the sate ofthe art to which this invention pertains. EXAMPLES Example 1 Detection Of PCTA-1 Biallelic Markers: DNA Extraction Blood donors were from French Caucasian origin. They presented a sufficient diversity for being representative of a French heterogeneous population. The DNA from 100 unrelated and healthy individuals was exfracted, pooled and tested for the detection of biallelic markers The pool was constituted by mixing equivalent quantities of DNA from each individual. 30 ml of penpheral venous blood were taken from each donor in the presence of EDTA. Cells (pellet) were collected after centnfugation for 10 minutes at 2000 φm. Red cells were lysed by a lysis solution (50 ml final volume : 10 mM Tns pH7.6; 5 mM MgCL; 10 mM NaCl). The solution was centrifuged (10 minutes, 2000 φm) as many times as necessary to eliminate the residual red cells present in the supernatant, after resuspension of the pellet in the lysis solution. The pellet of white cells was lysed overnight at 42°C with 3.7 ml of lysis solution composed of: - 3 ml TE 10-2 (Tns-HCl 10 mM, EDTA 2 mM) / NaCl 0.4 M - 200 μl SDS 10% - 500 μl K-proteinase (2 mg K-proteinase in TE 10-2 / NaCl 0.4 M). For the extraction of proteins, 1 ml saturated NaCl (6M) (1/3.5 v/v) was added. After vigorous agitation, the solution was centnfuged for 20 minutes at 10000 φm. For the precipitation of DNA, 2 to 3 volumes of 100% ethanol were added to the previous supernatant, and the solution was centnfuged for 30 minutes at 2000 φm. The DNA solution was rinsed three times with 70% ethanol to eliminate salts, and centπfuged for 20 minutes at 2000 φm. The pellet was dried at 37°C, and resuspended in 1 ml TE 10-1 or 1 ml water. The DNA concentration was evaluated by measuring the OD at 260 nm (1 unit OD = 50 μg/ml DNA). To determine the presence of proteins in the DNA solution, the OD 260 / OD 280 ratio was determined. Only DNA preparations having a OD 260 / OD 280 ratio between 1.8 and 2 were used the subsequent examples descnbed below. Example 2 Detection Of The Biallelic Markers: Amplification Of Genomic DNA By PCR The amplification of specific genomic sequences ofthe DNA samples of example 1 was caπied out on the pool of DNA obtained previously. In addition, 10 individual samples were similarly amplified. PCR assays were performed using the following protocol: Final volume 25 μl DNA 2 ng/μl MgCl 2 2 mM dNTP (each) 200 μM pnmer (each) 2.9 ng/μl Amph Taq Gold DNA polymerase 0.05 unit/μl PCR buffer (lOx = 0.1 M TnsHCl pH8.3 0.5M KC1 lx Each pair of primers was designed using the sequence information of our total genomic sequence (SEQ ED No 1) and the OSP software (Hillier & Green, 1991). These pnmers had about 10 20 nucleotides m length and their respective sequences are disclosed m Table 1 and had the sequences disclosed in Table 1 in the columns labeled "Position range of amplification primer in SEQ ID No 1" and "Complementary position range of amplification primer in SEQ ID No 1". The pnmers contained a common oligonucleotide tail upsfream of the specific bases targeted for amplification which was useful for sequencing 15 Primers from the columns labeled "Position range of amplification primer in SEQ ID No 1," contain the following additional PU 5' sequence. TGTAAAACGACGGCCAGT; and primers from the columns labeled "Complementary position range of amplification primer in SEQ ID No 1," contain the following RP 5' sequence: CAGGAAACAGCTATGACC. The primer containing the additional PU 5' sequence is listed in SEQ ID No 10. The primer containing the additional RP 5' 20 sequence is listed in SEQ ED No 11. The synthesis of these primers was performed following the phosphoramidite method, on a GENSET UFPS 24.1 synthesizer. DNA amplification was performed on a Genius II thermocycler. After heating at 94°C for 10 min, 40 cycles were performed. Each cycle comprised: 30 sec at 94°C, 55°C for 1 min, and 30 25 sec at 72°C. For final elongation, 7 min at 72°C end the amplification. The quantities of the amplification products obtained were determined on 96-well microtiter plates, using a fluorometer and Picogreen as intercalant agent (Molecular Probes). Table 1 Example 3 Detection Of The Biallelic Markers: Sequencing Of Amplified Genomic DNA And Identification Of Polymorphisms The sequencing of the amplified DNA obtained in example 2 was earned out on ABI 377 sequencers The sequences of the amplification products were determined using automated dideoxy terminator sequencing reactions with a dye terminator cycle sequencing protocol The products of the sequencing reactions were run on sequencing gels and the sequences were determined using gel image analysis (ABI Prism DNA Sequencing Analysis software (2.1.2 version)). The sequence data were further evaluated using the above mentioned polymoφhism analysis software designed to detect the presence of biallelic markers among the pooled amplified fragments. The polymoφhism search was based on the presence of superimposed peaks in the electrophoresis pattern resulting from different bases occuπing at the same position as descnbed previously. 47 fragments of amplification were analyzed In these segments, 125 markers were detected The localization of the biallelic markers was as shown in Table 2 Table 3 comprises the polynucleotides defining the PCTA-1 -related biallelic markers. They could be used as probes and their sequence are disclosed in Table 3 in "Position range of probes in SEQ ID No 1". Table 2 Table 2 (following) Table 2 (following) Table 2 (following) Table 3 Example 4 Validation Of The Polymorphisms Through Microsequencing The biallelic markers identified in example 3 were further confirmed and their respective frequencies were determined through microsequencmg. Microsequencing was caπied out for each individual DNA sample described in Example 1. Amplification from genomic DNA of individuals was performed by PCR as descnbed above for the detection of the biallelic markers with the same set of PCR pnmers (Table 1) The prefeπed pnmers used in microsequencmg had about 19 nucleotides m length and hybndized just upsfream of the considered polymoφhic base. Their sequences are disclosed in Table 4 in columns labeled " Position range of microsequencing primer mis. 1 in SEQ ID No 1" and " Complementary position range of microsequencing primer mis. 2 in SEQ ID No 1". Mis 1 and Mis 2 respectively refer to microsequencmg pnmers which hybndized with the non-coding strand of the PCTA-1 gene or with the coding strand of the PCTA-1 gene. The microsequencmg reaction was performed as follows : 10 μl of PCR products were added to 20 μl of microsequencing reaction mixture containing : 10 pmol microsequencmg oligonucleotide (crude synthesis, 5 OD), 1 U Thermosequenase (Amersham E79000G), 1.25 μl Thermosequenase buffer (260 mM Tris HCl pH 9.5, 65 mM MgCl 2 ), and the appropπate fluorescent ddNTPs complementary to the nucleotides at the polymoφhic site corresponding to the polymoφhic bases (11.25 nM TAMRA-ddTTP ; 16.25 nM ROX-ddCTP ; 1.675 nM REG-ddATP ; 1.25 nM RHO-ddGTP ; Perkm Elmer, Dye Terminator Set 401095). After 4 minutes at 94°C, 20 PCR cycles of 15 sec at 55°C, 5 sec at 72°C, and 10 sec at 94°C were caπied out in a thermocycler. After amplification, the unmcoφorated dye terminators were removed by ethanol precipitation. After discarding the supernatants, the microplate was evaporated to dryness under reduced pressure (Speed Vac) ; samples were resuspended in 2.5 μl formamide EDTA loading buffer and heated for 2 min at 95°C. 0.8 μl microsequencing reaction were loaded on a 10 % (19: 1) polyacrylamide sequencing gel. The data were collected by an ABI PRISM 377 DNA sequencer and processed using the GENESCAN software (Perkm Elmer) Following gel analysis, data were automatically processed with software that allows the determination of the alleles of biallelic markers present m each amplified fragment. The software evaluates such factors as whether the intensities ofthe signals resulting from the above microsequencmg procedures are weak, normal, or saturated, or whether the signals are ambiguous. En addition, the software identifies significant peaks (according to shape and height cπteπa). Among the significant peaks, peaks coπespondmg to the targeted site are identified based on their position. When two significant peaks are detected for the same position, each sample is categoπzed classification as homozygous or heterozygous type based on the height ratio Table 4 Table 4 (following) Example 5 Association Study Between Prostate Cancer And The Biallelic Markers Of The PCTA-1 Gene Collection Of DNA Samples From Affected And Non- Affected Individuals Affected population : The positive trait followed in this association study was prostate cancer. Prostate cancer patients were recruited according to a combination of clinical, histological and biological inclusion criteria. Clinical cπteπa can include rectal examination and prostate biopsies. Biological cnteπa can include PSA assays. The affected individuals were recorded as familial forms when at least two persons affected by prostate cancer have been diagnosed in the family. Remaining cases were classified as non-familial informative cases (at least two sibs of the case both aged over 50 years old are unaffected), or non-familial umformative cases (no information about sibs over 50 years old is available). All affected individuals included m the statistical analysis of this patent were unrelated. Cases were also separated following the cπteπa of diagnosis age : early onset prostate cancer (under 65 years old) and late onset prostate cancer (65 years old or more). Unaffected population Control individuals included m this study were checked for both the absence of all clinical and biological cntena defining the presence or the nsk of prostate cancer (PSA < 4) (WO 96/21042), and for their age (aged 65 years old or more) All unaffected individuals included in the statistical analysis of this patent were unrelated. The affected group was composed by 491 unrelated individuals, comprising - 197 familial cases among which 91 individuals were under 65 years old and 106 individuals were 65 years old or more, and - 294 sporadic cases The unaffected group contained 313 individuals which were 65 years or older As used herein, the term "early onset cancer" refers to a cancer in which the individuals are under 65 years old. Genotyping Of Affected And Control Individuals The general strategy to perform the association studies was to individually scan the DNA samples from all individuals m each ofthe populations descnbed above in order to establish the allele frequencies ofthe above described biallelic markers m each of these populations. More particularly, the biallelic markers used in the present association study are A2, A9, A15, A22, A24, A25, A26, A30, A34, A35, A36, A38, A41, A42, A44, A51, A52, A54, A55, A56, A57, A59, A60, A64, A73, A75, A76, A85, A93, A96, A108, Al 11, Al 15. Allelic frequencies of the above-described biallelic markers in each population were determined by performing microsequencmg reactions on amplified fragments obtained by genomic PCR performed on the DNA samples from each individual. Genomic PCR and microsequencmg were performed as detailed above in examples 2 and 4 using the descnbed PCR and microsequencmg primers Association Study Between Prostate Cancer And The Biallelic Markers Of The PCTA-1 Gene The alleles of two biallelic markers, namely (T) A30 and (T) A41, have been shown to be significantly associated to familial prostate cancer, more particularly early onset familial prostate cancer. Indeed, the allele T ofthe biallelic marker A30 showed a p-value of 1.08 x 10 2 for the early onset familial prostate cancer and of 3.39 x 10 "2 for the familial prostate cancer The allele T ofthe biallelic marker A41 presented a p-value of 4.04 x 10 "2 for the early onset familial prostate cancer These two markers could be then used in diagnostics. Some other biallelic markers, namely A54, A55, A56, A57, A59, A60, A61, A85, A96, A108, Al 15, showed a moderate association. These biallelic markers are localized m the exons and introns ofthe PCTA-1 gene The inventors observed that all the PCTA-1 -related biallelic markers were m linkage disequihbnum with each other m the controls individuals. In the familial cases of prostate cancer, the biallelic markers localized in the promoter did not show a linkage disequihbnum with those localized m exomc and mtromc region ofthe PCTA-1 gene and were not in linkage disequihbnum with each other. This lack of linkage disequihbnum for the promoter biallelic markers suggests that this region comprises a trait causing mutation and could explain the cases haplotypes. 5 A strong association has been observed between the allele A ofthe biallelic marker and sporadic cases of prostate cancer. This association is highly significant with a pvalue of 7.71 x 10 3 . The marker A2 can be then used in diagnostics. Haplotype Frequency Analysis One way of increasing the statistical power of individual markers, is by performing 10 haplotype association analysis. Haplotype analysis for association oi PCTA-1 markers and prostate cancer was performed by estimating the frequencies of all possible haplotypes comprising biallelic markers selected from the group consisting of A2, A9, A15, A22, A24, A25, A26, A30, A34, A35, A36, A38, A41, A42, A44, A51, A52, A54, A55, A56, A57, A59, A60, A64, A73, A75, A76, A85, A93, A96, A108, 15 Al 11, Al 15 m the cases and control populations descnbed in Example 5, and comparing these frequencies by means of a chi square statistical test (one degree of freedom). Haplotype estimations were performed by applying the Expectation-Maximization (EM) algonthm (Excoffier L & Slatkm M, 1995), using the EM-HAPLO program (Hawley ME, Pakstis AJ & Kidd KK, 1994). Haplotype frequency analysis for familial cases of prostate cancer 20 The most significant haplotypes obtained with the familial cases of prostate cancer are shown in Table 5. These haplotypes comprise the biallelic markers A2, A30, A41, A55, A57, and 5- 202/95 The prefeπed two-markers haplotypes are descnbed m Table 5 as HI to H7 of PT2 The more prefeπed haplotype is the haplotype H1/PT2 and comprises the biallelic markers A30 (99- 25 1572/440 allele T) and A41 (allele T). This haplotype presented a p-value of 1.1 x 10 "4 and an odd- ratio of 1.67. Estimated haplotype frequencies were 57.2% m the cases and 44.4% m the controls. The prefeπed three-markers haplotypes are described m Table 5 as HI, H2, H3, H7, H8, H9, H10, HI 1, and H12 of PT3. The more prefeπed haplotype is the haplotype H1/PT3 and comprises the biallelic markers A2 (allele A), A30 (99-1572/440 allele T) and A41 (allele T) This haplotype 30 presented a p-value of 1.1 x 10 "5 and an odd-ratio of 1.84. Estimated haplotype frequencies were 42.9% in the cases and 29% m the controls. The prefeπed four-markers haplotypes are descnbed in Table 5 as HI, H2, H4, H5, H7, H9, H16, H17, H18 and H19 of PT4. In conclusion, most prefeπed haplotypes for the familial cases of prostate cancer compπse 35 the biallelic markers A30 (99-1572/440 allele T) and/or A41 (allele T). Some other prefeπed haplotypes for the familial cases of prostate cancer comprise the biallelic marker A2 (allele A) Optionally, prefeπed haplotypes for the familial cases of prostate cancer compπse the biallelic markers A55 (allele C) and/or A57 (allele G) These haplotypes can be used in diagnostic of prostate cancer susceptibility. Haplotype frequency analysis for sporadic cases of prostate cancer The most significant haplotypes obtained with the sporadic cases of prostate cancer are shown m Table 6. These haplotypes comprise the biallelic markers A2, A30, A41, A55, A57, and 5- 202/95. The prefeπed two-markers haplotypes are descnbed in Table 6 as HI to H4, H6, and H7 of PT2. The first more prefeπed haplotype is the haplotype H1/PT2 and comprises the biallelic markers A2 (allele T) and A55 (allele T) This haplotype presented a p-value of 2.4 x 10 "4 and an odd-ratio of 1.94. Estimated haplotype frequencies were 16.2% m the cases and 9% m the controls. The second more prefeπed haplotype is the haplotype H2/PT2 and comprises the biallelic markers A2 (allele T) and A57 (allele A) This haplotype presented a p-value of 5 3 x 10 and an odd-ratio of 1.84. Estimated haplotype frequencies were 16.3% m the cases and 9.5% in the controls. The prefeπed three-markers haplotypes are descnbed in Table 6 as HI, H2, H3, H4, H6, H7, and H8 of PT3. The more prefeπed haplotype is the haplotype H2/PT3 and compπses the biallelic markers A2 (allele T), A55 (allele T), and A57 (allele A). This haplotype presented a p-value of 2.3 x 10 "3 and an odd-ratio of 1.75. Estimated haplotype frequencies were 15% in the cases and 9.2% in the controls. The prefeπed four-markers haplotypes are descnbed in Table 6 as HI, H2, H3, H4, and H6 ofPT4. In conclusion, most prefeπed haplotypes for the sporadic cases of prostate cancer comprise a biallelic marker selected in the group consisting of A2 (allele T), A55 (allele T), and A57 (allele A). Optionally, prefeπed haplotypes for the familial cases of prostate cancer comprise the biallelic markers A30 (allele T) and/or A41 (allele T) These haplotypes can be used m diagnostic of prostate cancer. Summary of haplotype frequency analysis The most prefeπed two- and three-biallehc markers haplotypes for the familial and sporadic prostate cancer are summaπzed m Table 7 These haplotypes can be used m diagnostic of prostate cancer susceptibility. The statistical significance of the results obtained for the haplotype analysis was evaluated by a phenotypic permutation test reiterated 1000 or 10,000 times on a computer. For this computer simulation, data from the cases and confrol individuals were pooled and randomly allocated to two groups which contained the same number of individuals as the case-control populations used to produce the haplotype frequency analysis data. A haplotype analysis was then run on these artificial groups for the five haplotypes ofthe Table 7 which presented a strong association with prostate cancer. This experiment was reiterated 1000 times and the results are shown in Table 8. The haplotypes 1 and 2 ofthe Table 7 are clearly associated with familial prostate cancer and more particularly with familial cases which were under 65 years and with >3caP familial cases The permutation test clearly validate the statistical significance ofthe association between these haplotypes and familial prostate cancer since, among 1000 iterations, none ofthe obtained haplotypes had a p-value comparable to the one obtained for the haplotypes 1 and 2 of Table 7 for the familial cases, the familial cases under 65 years and the >3caP familial cases. The haplotypes 3, 4, and 5 ofthe Table 7 are clearly associated with the sporadic prostate cancer. The permutation test clearly validate the statistical significance ofthe association between these haplotypes and sporadic prostate cancer since, among 1000 iterations, less than 6 of the obtained haplotypes had a p-value comparable to the one obtained for the haplotypes 3, 4 and 5 of Table 7 for the sporadic cases. Moreover, among 1000 iterations, none of the obtained haplotypes had a p-value comparable to the one obtained for the haplotypes 3, 4 and 5 of Table 7 for the informative sporadic cases. Attributable Risk The attributable risk has been calculated as described in the "Evaluation of risk factors" of the part entitled "Statistic method". The results are disclosed in Table 9. These results show that the prefeπed haplotypes disclosed m the present invention are highly significant for the prostate cancer. Indeed, 16.92 % of the sporadic prostate cancer cases caπied the haplotype 4 ofthe Table 7 consideπng a dominant model which is the more relevant model for prostate cancer. Moreover, 60.77 % ofthe familial early onset prostate cancer cases caπied the haplotype 1 ofthe Table 7 consideπng a dominant model. Table 8: Haplotype frequency analysis with permutation test results Familial orms in which at least three persons are affected by prostate cancer in t e amily are described in the present application as >3CaP. Sporadic cases were classified as informative sporadic cases when at least two sibs ofthe case both aged over 50 years old are unaffected. Table 9: Attributable risk for prostate cancer CARRIER: Individual carrying the haplotype ODD RATIO of Carrier (OR): Carrier of cases * (1 -Carrier of controls) / Carrier of confrols * (1 -Carrier of cases) ATTRIBUTABLE RISK (RR): Carrier of Randoms confrols * (OR -1) / (Carrier of Randoms controls * (OR -1) + 1) (ref: Epidemiologie - Principes et methodes quantitatives - J. Bouyer, D. Hemon, S. Cordier 1995) Example 6 Mouse PCTA-1 protein The inventors have cloned a cDNA molecule encoding a mouse homologue of the PCTA-1 protein (SEQ ID No 8) The deduce ammo acid sequence is provided in SEQ ID No 9. Figure 7 shows alignments between the human and mouse PCTA-1 protem sequences ofthe inventions, as well as that of GenBank L78132. It shows an 80 % homology between the human and mouse homologues. Further comparisons between these mouse and human cDNA and protem sequences, taking into consideration the position of significant polymorphisms in relation with potentially conserved motifs, should allow the person skilled in the art to identify regions of specific physiological interest, in the design of suitable vaccine or therapeutic candidates Two galactoside binding sites shown in figure 7 are of special interest. These sites are conserved among the PCTA-1 proteins and the galectms, and seem to be involved in the cell-cell and cell-matrix interactions which are of high relevance to cancer. Two other sites, HFNPRF and VVCN, are also highly conserved among all these proteins Example 7 Preparation Of Antibody Compositions To A PCTA-1 Protein Substantially pure protein or polypeptide is isolated from transfected or transformed cells containing an expression vector encoding a PCTA-1 protein or a portion thereof. The concentration of protem m the final preparation is adjusted, for example, by concentration on an Amicon filter device, to the level of a few micrograms/ml. Monoclonal or polyclonal antibody to the protein can then be prepared as follows. A. Monoclonal Antibody Production by Hybridoma Fusion Monoclonal antibody to epitopes m a PCTA-1 protein or a portion thereof can be prepared from muπne hybπdomas according to the classical method of Kohler et al. (1975) or deπvative methods thereof. Also see Harlow et al. 1988. Bnefly, a mouse is repetitively inoculated with a few micrograms of a PCTA-1 protein or a portion thereof over a peπod of a few weeks. The mouse is then sacπficed, and the antibody producing cells ofthe spleen isolated. The spleen cells are fused by means of polyethylene glycol with mouse myeloma cells, and the excess unfused cells destroyed by growth ofthe system on selective media compnsing ammopteπn (HAT media). The successfully fused cells are diluted and ahquots ofthe dilution placed in wells of a microtiter plate where growth ofthe culture is continued. Antibody- producing clones are identified by detection of antibody m the supernatant fluid ofthe wells by lmmunoassay procedures, such as ELISA, as onginally descnbed by Engvall, (1980), and deπvative methods thereof. Selected positive clones can be expanded and their monoclonal antibody product harvested for use. Detailed procedures for monoclonal antibody production are descnbed in Davis et al B. Polyclonal Antibody Production by Immunization Polyclonal antiserum containing antibodies to heterogeneous epitopes in a PCTA- protem or a portion thereof can be prepared by immunizing suitable non-human animal with this PCTA-1 protem or a portion thereof, which can be unmodified or modified to enhance lmmunogenicity. A suitable non- human animal is preferably a non-human mammal is selected, usually a mouse, rat, rabbit, goat, or horse Alternatively, a crude preparation which has been enriched for the PCTA-1 concentration can be used to generate antibodies. Such proteins, fragments or preparations are introduced into the non- human mammal in the presence of an appropπate adjuvant (e.g. aluminum hydroxide, RIBI, etc.) which is known in the art. In addition the protein, fragment or preparation can be prefreated with an agent which will increase antigenicity, such agents are known in the art and include, for example, methylated bovine serum albumin (mBSA), bovine serum albumin (BSA), Hepatitis B surface antigen, and keyhole limpet hemocyanm (KLH). Serum from the immunized animal is collected, treated and tested according to known procedures. If the serum contains polyclonal antibodies to undesired epitopes, the polyclonal antibodies can be punfied by immunoaffinity chromatography. Effective polyclonal antibody production is affected by many factors related both to the antigen and the host species Also, host animals vary in response to site of inoculations and dose, with both inadequate or excessive doses of antigen resulting in low titer antisera. Small doses (ng level) of antigen administered at multiple mfradermal sites appears to be most reliable. Techniques for producing and processing polyclonal antisera are known in the art, see for example, Mayer and Walker (1987). An effective immunization protocol for rabbits can be found in Vaitukaitis, et al (1971). Booster injections can be given at regular intervals, and antiserum harvested when antibody titer thereof, as determined semi-quantitatively, for example, by double lmmunodiffusion in agar against known concentrations ofthe antigen, begins to fall See, for example, Ouchterlony, O. et al., (1973). Plateau concenfration of antibody is usually in the range of 0.1 to 0.2 mg/ml of serum (about 12 μM). Affinity ofthe antisera for the antigen is determined by prepanng competitive binding curves, as descnbed, for example, by Fisher, (1980). Antibody preparations prepared according to either the monoclonal or the polyclonal protocol are useful m quantitative immunoassays which determine concentrations of antigen-beaπng substances in biological samples; they are also used semi-quantitatively or qualitatively to identify the presence of antigen in a biological sample. The antibodies may also be used in therapeutic compositions for killing cells expressing the protein or reducing the levels ofthe protem in the body. References Abbondanzo SJ et al., 1993, Methods in Enzymology, Academic Press, New York, pp 803- 823 Ajioka R.S. et al., Am. J Hum Genet., 60:1439-1447, 1997 Altschul et al., 1990, J. Mol. Biol. 215(3):403-410 Altschul et al., 1993, Nature Genetics 3:266-272 Altschul et al., 1997, Nuc. Acids Res. 25:3389-3402 Anton M. et al., 1995, J. Virol., 69 : 4600-4606 Araki K et al. (1995) Proc Natl. Acad Sci. USA. 92(l): 160-4. Aszόdi et al., Proteins Structure, Function, and Genetics, Supplement 1 :38-42 (1997) Ausubel et al. (1989)Current Protocols in Molecular Biology, Green Publishing Associates and Wiley Interscience, N.Y. Bauboms W. (1993) Nucleic Acids Res . 21(9):2025-9. Beaucage et al., Tetrahedron Lett 1981, 22: 1859-1862 Bram RJ et al, 1993, Mol. Cell Biol., 13 : 4760-4769 Brown EL, Belaga e R, Ryan MJ, Khorana HG, Methods Enzymol 1979;68:109-151 Brutlag et al. Comp. App. Biosci. 6:237-245, 1990 Bush et al., 1997, J. Chromatogr., 777 : 311-328. Chai H. et al. (1993) Bwtechnol. Appl Biochem.18:259-273. Chee et al. (1996) Science 274:610-614. Chen and Kwok Nucleic Acids Research 25:347-353 1997 Chen et al. (1987) Mol. Cell. Biol. 7:2745-2752. Chen et al. Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 94/20 10756-10761,1997 Cho RJ et al., 1998, Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA, 95(7) : 3752-3757. Chou J.Y., 1989, Mol. Endocnnol., 3: 1511-1514. Clark A.G. (1990) Mol. Biol. Evol. 7:111-122. Coles R, Caswell R, Rubmsztein DC, Hum Mol Genet 1998;7:791-800 Compton J. (1991) Nature. 350(6313):91-92. Davis L.G., M.D. Dibner, and J.F. Battey, Basic Methods in Molecular Biology, ed., Elsevier Press, NY, 1986 Dempster et al, (1977) /. R. Stat. Soc, 39B: 1-38. Dent DS & Latchman DS (1993) The DNA mobility shift assay. In: Transcription Factors- A Practical Approach (Latchman DS, ed.) ppl-26. Oxford: IRL Press Dignam JD, et al, Nucleic Acids Res . 1983 Mar 11; 11(5): 1475-1489. Doucas V, et al, EMBO J. 1991 Aug; 10(8): 2237-2245 Dynan WS, Tjian R, Cell 1983;35:79-87 Edwards et Leatherbarrow, Analytical Biochemistry, 246, 1-6 (1997) Engvall, E., Meth. Enzymol. 70:419 (1980) Excoffier L. and Slatkin M. (1995) Mol. Biol. Evol, 12(5): 921-927. Feldman and Steg, 1996, Medecine/Sciences, synthese, 12:47-55 Felici F., 1991, J. Mol. Biol., Vol. 222:301-310 Fields and Song, 1989, Nature, 340 : 245-246 Fisher, D., Chap. 42 in: Manual of Clinical Immunology, 2d Ed. (Rose and Friedman, Eds.) Amer. Soc. For Microbiol., Washington, D.C. (1980) Flotte et al. (1992) Am. J. Respir. Cell Mol. Biol. 7:349-356. Fodor et al. (1991) Science 251 :767-777. Fraley et al. ( 919) Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA. 76:3348-3352. Fried M, Crothers DM, Nucleic Acids Res 1981;9:6505-6525 Fromont-Racine M. et al., 1997, Nature Genetics, 16(3) : 277-282. Fuller S. A. et al. (1996) Immunology in Current Protocols in Molecular Biology, Ausubel et al.Eds, John Wiley & Sons, Inc., USA. Furth PA. et al. (1994) Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci USA. 91 :9302-9306. Galas DJ, Schmitz A, Nucleic Acids Res 1978;5:3157-3170 Garner MM, Revzin A, Nucleic Acids Res 1981 ;9:3047-3060 Geysen H. Maπo et al. 1984. Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. U.S.A. 81:3998-4002 Ghosh and Bacchawat, 1991, Targeting of liposomes to hepatocytes, IN: Liver Diseases, Targeted diagnosis and therapy using specific rceptors and ligands. Wu et al. Eds., Marcel Dekeker, New York, pp. 87-104. Gonnet et al, 1992, Science 256:1443-1445 Gopal (1985) Mol. Cell. Biol., 5:1188-1190. Gossen M. et al. (1992) Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA. 89:5547-5551. Gossen M. et al. (1995) Science. 268: 1766-1769. Graham et al. (1973) Virology 52:456-457. Green et al., Ann. Rev. Biochem. 55:569-597 (1986) Griffin et al. Science 245:967-971 (1989) Grompe, M. (1993) Nature Genetics. 5:111-117. Grompe, M. et al. (1989) Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. U.S.A. 86:5855-5892. Gu H. et al. (1993) Cell 73:1155-1164. Gu H. et al. (1994) Science 265:103-106. Guatelli J C et al. Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA. 35:273-286. Hacia JG, Brody LC, Chee MS, Fodor SP, Collins FS, Nat Genet 1996;14(4):441-447 Haff L. A. and Smirnov I. P. (1997) Genome Research, 7:378-388. Hames B.D. and Higgins S.J. (1985,) Nucleic Acid Hybridization: A Practical Approach. Hames and Higgms Ed., IRL Press, Oxford. Haηu L, Weber T, Alexandrova L, Lukm M, Ranki M, Jalanko A, Clin Chem 1993 * 39(1 IPt l):2282-2287 Harland et al. (1985) J. Cell. Biol. 101:1094-1095. Harlow, E., and D. Lane. 1988. Antibodies A Laboratory Manual. Cold Spring Harbor Laboratory, pp. 53-242 Harper JW et al., 1993, Cell, 75 : 805-816 Hawley M.E. et al. (1994) Am. J. Phys Anthropol. 18:104. Hemkoff and Hemkoff, 1993, Proteins 17:49-61 Higgms et al., 1996, Methods Enzymol. 266:383-402 Hillier L. and Green P. Methods Appl, 1991, 1: 124-8. Hoess et al. (1986) Nucleic Acids Res . 14:2287-2300. Huang L. et al. (1996) Cancer Res 56(5): 1137-1141. Huyge et al. (1996) Nature Medicine. 2(8):893-898. Izant JG, Weintraub H, Cell 1984 Apr;36(4):1007-15 Julan et al. (1992) J. Gen. Virol. 73:3251-3255. Kanegae Y. et al., Nucl. Acids Res. 23:3816-3821. Karlm and Altschul, 1990, Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 87:2267-2268 Khoury j. et al., Fundamentals of Genetic Epidemiology, Oxford University Press, NY, 1993 Kim U-J. et al. (1996) Genomics 34:213-218. Klein et al. (1987) Nature. 327:70-73. Kohler, G. and Milstem, C, Nature 256:495 (1975) Koller et al. (1992) Annu. Rev. Immunol. 10:705-730. Kozal MJ, Shah N, Shen N, Yang R, Fucmi R, Mengan TC, Richman DD, Morris D, Hubbell E, Chee M, Lander and Schork, Science, 265, 2037-2048, 1994 Landegren U. et al. (1998) Genome Research, 8:769-776. Lange K. (1997) Mathematical and Statistical Methods for Genetic Analysis. Spnnger, New York. Lenhard T. et al. (1996) Gene. 169:187-190. Lmton M.F. et al. (1993) J. Clin. Invest. 92:3029-3037. Livak et al., Nature Genetics, 9:341-342, 1995 Livak KJ, Hamer JW, Hum Mutat 1994;3(4):379-385 Lockhart et al. Nature Biotechnology 14: 1675-1680, 1996 Lucas A.H., 1994, In : Development and Clinical Uses of Haempophilus b Conjugate; Manley JL. et al, Proc Natl Acad Sci USA. 1980 Jul; 77(7): 3855-3859 Mansour S.L. et al (1988) Nα/wre 336.348-352. Marshall R. L. et al. (1994) PCR Methods and Applications 4.80-84. Maxam AM, Gilbert W, Methods Enzymol 1980;65:499-560 McCormick et al. (1994) Genet Anal Tech Appl 11: 158-164 McLaughlin B.A. et al. (1996) Am J Hum Genet. 59-561-569 Mizokami A, Yeh SY, Chang C, Mol Endocrmol 1994;8 77-88 Morton Ν.E , Am J Hum Genet., 7.277-318, 1955 Muller MM, Schreiber E, Schaffner W, Matthias P, Nucleic Acids Res 1989;17:6420 Muzyczka et al. (1992) Curr Topics in Micro and Immunol 158:97-129. Νada S. et al (1993) Cell 73: 1125-1135 Νagy A. et al., 1993, Proc Νatl Acad Sci USA, 90. 8424-8428 Νarang SA, Hsiung HM, Brousseau R, Methods Enzymol 1979,68 90-98 Νeda et al. (1991) J Biol Chem 266: 14143-14146. Newton et al (1989) Nucleic Acids Res 17.2503-2516 Nickerson DA. et al (1990) Proc Natl Acad Sci USA 87.8923-8927. Nicolau C. et al., 1987, Methods Enzymol., 149.157-76 Nicolau et al. ( 982) Biochim Biophys Ada. 721 :185-190 Nihei et al, Genes Chromosomes Cancer 1995;14:112-119 Nyren P, Pettersson B, Uhlen M, Anal Biochem 1993;208(1) 171-175 O'Reilly et al (1992) Baculovirus Expression Vectors A Laboratory Manual W. H Freeman and Co , New York Ohno et al. (1994) Science 265:781-784. Oldenburg K.R. et al , 1992, Proc. Natl Acad Sci , 89 5393-5397 Oπta et al (1989) Proc Natl Acad Sci U S A 86: 2776-2770 Ott J , Analysis of Human Genetic Linkage, John Hopkins University Press, Baltimore, 1991 Ouchterlony, O. et al., Chap. 19 m: Handbook of Expenmental Immunology D Wier (ed) Blackwell (1973) Parmley and Smith, Gene, 1988, 73:305-318 Pastinen et al., Genome Research 1997, 7:606-614 Pearson and Lipman, 1988, Proc Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 85(8)-2444-2448 Pease S. ans William R.S., 1990, Exp. Cell Res., 190 209-211 Perlm et al. (1994) Am J Hum Genet 55:777-787 Peterson et al., 1993, Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA, 90 : 7593-7597 Pietu et al. Genome Research 6:492-503, 1996 Potter et al. (1984) Proc Natl Acad Set USA 81(22) 7161-7165 Ramunsen et al, 1997, Electrophoresis, 18 : 588-598. Reιd L.H. et al (1990) Proc Natl Acad Sci USA 87 4299-4303 Risch, N. and Menkangas, K. (Science, 273:1516-1517, 1996 Robertson E., 1987, Embryo-derived stem cell lines. In: E.J. Robertson Ed. Teratocarcinomas and embrionic stem cells: a practical approach. IRL Press, Oxford, pp. 71. Rossi et al., Pharmacol. Ther. 50:245-254, (1991) Roth J.A. et al. (1996) Nature Medicine. 2(9):985-991. Rou et al. (1989) Proc Natl. Acad. Sci. U.S.A 86:9079-9083. Ruano et al. (1990) Proc Natl Acad. Sci U.S.A 87:6296-6300. Sambrook, J., Fπtsch, E.F., and T. Maniatis. (1989) Molecular Cloning. A Laboratory Manual, led. Cold Spnng Harbor Laboratory, Cold Spnng Harbor, New York. Samson M, et al. (1996) Nature, 382(6593):722-725. Samulski et al. (1989) J Virol. 63:3822-3828. Sanchez-Pescador R. (1988) J Clin Microbiol. 26(10): 1934-1938. Sarkar, G. and Sommer S.S. (1991) Biotechniques . Sauer B. et al. (1988) Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. U.S.A 85:5166-5170. Saunders AM, et al, Neurology 1993;43;1467-1472 Schaid DJ. et al., Genet. Epidemiol.,l3:423-450, 1996 Schedl A. et al., 1993a, Nature, 362: 258-261. Schedl et al., 1993b, Nucleic Acids Res., 21: 4783-4787. Schena et al. Science 270:467-470, 1995 Schena et al., 1996, Proc Natl Acad Sci U S A,.93(20): 10614-10619. Schneider et al.( 1997) Arlequin: A Software For Population Genetics Data Analysis. University of Geneva. Schreiber E, Matthias P, Muller MM, Schaffher W, Nucleic Acids Res 1989 ;17:6419 Schwartz and Dayhoff, eds., 1978, Matnces for Detecting Distance Relationships: Atlas of Protem Sequence and Structure, Washington: National Biomedical Research Foundation Sczakiel G. et al. (1995) Trends Microbiol. 3(6):213-217. Shay J.W. et al., 1991, Biochem. Biophys. Acta, 1072: 1-7. Sheffield, V.C. et al. (1991) Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci U.S.A. 49:699-706. Shizuya et al. (1992) Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. U.S.A 89:8794-8797. Shoemaker DD, et al., Nat Genet 1996;14(4):450-456 Siebenhst U, Gilbert W, Proc Natl Acad Sci USA 1980;77: 122-126 Smith (1957) Ann. Hum. Genet. 21 :254-276. Smith et al. (1983) Mol Cell. Biol. 3:2156-2165. Sosnowski RG, et al., Proc Natl Acad Sci USA 1997;94:1119-1123 Sowdhammi et al., Prote Engineeπng 10:207, 215 (1997) Spielmann S. and Ewens W.J., Am. J. Hum. Genet., 62:450-458, 1998 Spielmann S. et al, Am. J. Hum. Genet., 52:506-516, 1993 Stemberg N.L. (1994) Mamm. Genome. 5:397-404. Strittmatter WJ, et al., Proc Natl Acad Sci USA 1993 ;90:1977-1981 Stryer, L., Biochemistry, 4th edition, 1995 Syvanen AC, Clin Chim Acta 1994;226(2):225-236 Szabo A. et al. Curr Opin Struct Biol 5, 699-705 (1995) Szabo et al., 1995, Curr Opm Struct Biol, 5(5):699-705 Tacson et al. (1996) Nature Medicine. 2(8):888-892. Te Riele et al. (1990) Nature. 348:649-651. Terwilliger J.D. and Ott J, Handbook of Human Genetic Linkage, John Hopkins University Press, London, 1994 Thomas K.R. et al. (1986) Cell. 44:419-428. Thomas K.R. et al. (1987) Cell. 51 :503-512. Thompson et al, 1994, Nucleic Acids Res. 22(2):4673-4680 Tur-Kaspa et al. (1986) Mol. Cell. Biol. 6:716-718. Tyagi et al. (1998) Nature Biotechnology. 16:49-53. Urdea M.S. (1988) Nucleic Acids Research. 11 :4937-4957. Urdea M.S. et al. (199 ) Nucleic Acids Symp. Ser. 24:197-200. Vaitukaitis, J. et al. J. Clin. Endocrinol. Metab. 33:988-991 (1971) Valadon P., et al., 1996, J. Mol. Biol, 261:11-22. Van der Lugt et al. (1991) Gene. 105:263-267. Vlasak R. et al. (1983) Eur. J. Biochem. 135: 123-126. Wabiko et al. (1986) £>N4.5(4):305-314. Walker et al. (1996) Clin. Chem. 42:9-13. Wang et al, 1997, Chromatographia, 44 : 205-208. Weir, B.S. (1996) Genetic data Analysis II: Methods for Discrete population genetic Data, Sinauer Assoc, Inc., Sunderland, MA, U.S.A. Westennk M.A.J, 1995, Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci, 92:4021-4025 White, M.B. et al. (1992) Genomics. 12:301-306. White, M.B. et al. (1997) Genomics. 12:301-306. Wong et al. (1980) Gene. 10:87-94. Wood SA. et al, 1993, Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA, 90: 4582-4585. Wu and Wu (1987) J. Biol. Chem. 262:4429-4432. Wu and Wu (1988) Biochemistry. 27:887-892. Wu et al. (1989) Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. U.S.A. 86:2757. Yagi T. et al. (1990) Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. U.S.A. 87:9918-9922. Zhao et al. Am. J. Hum. Genet., 63:225-240, 1998 Zou Y. R. et al. (1994) Curr. Biol. 4: 1099-1103. SEQUENCE LISTING FREE TEXT The following free text appears in the accompanying Sequence Listing : 5 ' regulatory region 3 'regulatory region Stop Homology genset EST Homology with sequence m ref Diverging nucleotide in ref Of or Deletion insertion Polymoφhic base Potential complement Probe Polymoφhic ammo acid Sequencing oligonucleotide pπmerPU Sequencing oligonucleotide primer RP

Claims: What is claimed: 1. An isolated, punfied, or recombinant polynucleotide comprising a contiguous span of at least 12 nucleotides of SEQ ID No 1 or the complements thereof, wherein said contiguous span comprises at least 1 ofthe following nucleotide positions of SEQ ID No 1: 1-70715, 70795-82207, 5 82297-83612, 83824-85297, 85418-86388, 86446-87495, 87523-88294, 88384-89483, 89650- 92748, 97156-98309, 98476-99329, 99491-100026, 100212-100281, 100396-100538, 100682- 100833, 100995-101920, 102087-102970, 103264-103724, and 103753-106746. 2. An isolated, punfied, or recombinant polynucleotide comprising a contiguous span of at 0 least 12 nucleotides of SEQ ID No 1 or the complements thereof, wherein said contiguous span comprises at least one nucleotide selected from the group consisting of a nucleotide G at positions 70728, 87860, 88297, 94432, and 95340 of SEQ ID No 1 , a nucleotide A at positions 82218, 83644, 83808, 87787, 87806, 94218, and 97144 of SEQ ID No 1 , a nucleotide C at positions 87902, 88215, 88283, 92760, 93726, and 94422 of SEQ ID No 1, and a nucleotide T at positions 93903, and 94170 5 of SEQ ID No 1 3. An isolated, punfied, or recombinant polynucleotide compnsing a contiguous span of at least 12 nucleotides of SEQ ID No 1 or the complements thereof, wherein said contiguous span compπses a nucleotide G at positions 86435, 93592, 93680, 93681, 93682, 93728, 93761, and 95445 0 of SEQ ID No 1; a nucleotide A at positions 86434, 88355, 93240, 93471, and 93747of SEQ ID No 1 ; a nucleotide C at positions 93683, 95126, and 95444 of SEQ ID No 1 ; and a nucleotide T at positions 94154, and 94430 of SEQ ID No 1. 4. An isolated, punfied, or recombinant polynucleotide compnsing a contiguous span of at 5 least 12 nucleotides of SEQ ID No 1 or the complements thereof, wherein said contiguous span comprises nucleotide positions selected from the group consisting of the nucleotide positions of SEQ ID No 1: 92975-92977, 93711-93715, 94151-94153, 94240-94243, 94770-94773, 94804-94808, 95121-95122, 95129-95135, 95148-95153, 95154-95159, 95173-95178, 95367-95374, 95410- 95413, 95418-95420, 95430-95436, 95533-95535, and 95677-95677. 0 5. An isolated, punfied, or recombinant polynucleotide comprising a contiguous span of at least 12 nucleotides of SEQ ID No 2 or the complements thereof, wherein said contiguous span comprises at least 1 ofthe nucleotide positions 1-162 of SEQ ID No 2. 5 6. An isolated, punfied, or recombinant polynucleotide comprising a contiguous span of at least 12 nucleotides of SEQ ID No 2 or the complements thereof, wherein said contiguous span compnses at least one nucleotide selected in the group consisting of a nucleotide A at positions 253, 363, 527, 2471, and 5397 of SEQ ID No 2; a nucleotide C at positions 1013, 1979, and 2675 of SEQ ID No 2; a nucleotide G at positions 176, 749, 2685, 3593 of SEQ ID No 2; and a nucleotide T at positions 2156, and 2423 of SEQ ID No 2. 7. An isolated, punfied, or recombinant polynucleotide comprising a contiguous span of at least 12 nucleotides of SEQ ID No 2 or the complements thereof, wherein said contiguous span comprises at least one nucleotide selected m the group consisting of a nucleotide A at positions 708, 807, 1493, 1724, and 2000, a nucleotide C at positions 1936, 3379, and 3697, a nucleotide G at positions 709, 1845, 1933, 1934, 1935, 1981, 2014, and 3698; and a nucleotide T at positions 2407, and 2683 of SEQ ID No 2. 8. An isolated, punfied, or recombinant polynucleotide comprising a contiguous span of at least 12 nucleotides of SEQ ID No 2 or the complements thereof, wherein said contiguous span comprises nucleotide positions selected from the group consisting of the nucleotide positions of SEQ ID No 2: 1229-1231, 1964-1968, 2404-2406, 2493-2496, 3023-3026, 3057-3061, 3374-3375, 3382- 3388, 3401-3406, 3407-3412, 3426-3431, 3620-3627, 3663-3666, 3671-3673, 3683-3689, 3786- 3788 and 3930-3932. 9. An isolated, punfied, or recombinant polynucleotide comprising a contiguous span of at least 12 nucleotides of SEQ ID No 3 or the complements thereof, wherein said contiguous span compπses at least 1 ofthe following nucleotide positions of SEQ ID No 3 1-162 and 747-872. 10. An isolated, punfied, or recombinant polynucleotide comprising a contiguous span of at least 12 nucleotides of SEQ ID No 3 or the complements thereof, wherein said contiguous span comprises at least one nucleotide selected in the group consisting of a nucleotide A at positions 253, 363, 527, 2597, and 5523 of SEQ ID No 3; a nucleotide C at positions 1139, 2105, and 2801 of SEQ ID No 3; a nucleotide G at positions 176, 875, 2811, 3719 of SEQ ID No 3; and a nucleotide T at positions 2282, and 2549 of SEQ ID No 3. 11. An isolated, punfied, or recombinant polynucleotide comprising a contiguous span of at least 12 nucleotides of SEQ ID No 3 or the complements thereof, wherein said contiguous span comprises at least one nucleotide selected m the group consisting of a nucleotide A at positions 708, 807, 1619, 1850, and 2126, a nucleotide C at positions 2062, 3505, and 3823; a nucleotide G at positions 709, 1971, 2059, 2060, 2061, 2107, 2140, and 3824; and a nucleotide T at positions 2533, and 2809 of SEQ ID No 3 12. An isolated, punfied, or recombinant polynucleotide compnsing a contiguous span of at least 12 nucleotides of SEQ ID No 3 or the complements thereof, wherein said contiguous span compnses nucleotide positions selected from the group consisting of the nucleotide positions of SEQ ID No 3 * 1355-1357, 1892-1894, 2090-2094, 2530-2532, 2619-2622, 3149-3152, 3183-3187, 3500- 5 3501, 3508-3514, 3527-3532, 3533-3538, 3552-3557, 3746-3749, 3789-3792, 3797-3799, 3809- 3815, 3912-3914 and 4056-4058. 13. An isolated, punfied, or recombinant polynucleotide comprising a contiguous span of at least 12 nucleotides of SEQ ID No 4 or the complements thereof, wherein said contiguous span 10 comprises at least 1 ofthe nucleotide positions 1-162 of SEQ ID No 4. 14. An isolated, punfied, or recombinant polynucleotide comprising a contiguous span of at least 12 nucleotides of SEQ ID No 4 or the complements thereof, wherein said contiguous span comprises at least one nucleotide selected in the group consisting of a nucleotide A at positions 253, 15 363, 527 and 2460 of SEQ ID No 4; a nucleotide C at position 1013 of SEQ ID No 4 and a nucleotide G at positions 176, and 749 of SEQ ID No 4 15. An isolated, punfied, or recombinant polynucleotide comprising a contiguous span of at least 12 nucleotides of SEQ ID No 4 or the complements thereof, wherein said contiguous span 20 comprises at least one nucleotide selected in the group consisting of a nucleotide A at positions 708 and 807 and a nucleotide G at position 709 of SEQ ID No 4. 16. An isolated, punfied, or recombinant polynucleotide comprising a contiguous span of at least 12 nucleotides of SEQ ID No 4 or the complements thereof, wherein said contiguous span 25 comprises the pairs of nucleotide positions 1136-1137 of SEQ ID No 4. 17. An isolated, punfied, or recombinant polynucleotide consisting essentially of a contiguous span of 8 to 50 nucleotides of anyone of SEQ ID Nos 1, 2, 3, and 4 or the complement thereof, wherein said span includes a PCTA- 1 -related biallelic marker in said sequence. 30 18. A polynucleotide according to claim 17, wherein said PCX4-/-related biallelic marker is selected from the group consisting of Al to A125, and the complements thereof. 19. A polynucleotide according to claim 17, wherein said PCL4-/-related biallelic marker 35 is selected from the group consisting of Al to A44, A46 to A53, A57, A58, A62 to A76, A81, A82, A86 to A91, A107, Al 18, and A123 to A125, and the complements thereof. 20. A polynucleotide according to claim 14, wherein said PC7^4-7-related biallelic marker is selected from the group consisting of A45, A54, A60, A61, A77 to A80, A83 to A85, A93, A102 to A106, A109, Al 10, Al 14, and A122, and the complements thereof. 21. A polynucleotide according to claim 17, wherein said PCTA- 1 -related biallelic marker is selected from the group consisting of A55, A56, A59, A92, A94 to AlOl, A108, Al 11 to Al 13, Al 15 to Al 17, and Al 19 to A121, and the complements thereof. 22 A polynucleotide according to any one of claims 17 to 21, wherein said contiguous span is 18 to 47 nucleotides in length and said biallelic marker is withm 4 nucleotides ofthe center of said polynucleotide. 23. A polynucleotide according to claim 22, wherein said polynucleotide consists of said contiguous span and said contiguous span is 25 nucleotides m length and said biallelic marker is at the center of said polynucleotide. 24. A polynucleotide according to claim 22, wherein said polynucleotide consists essentially of a sequence selected from the following sequences: PI to PI 25, and the complementary sequences thereto. 25 A polynucleotide according to any one of claims 1 to 21, wherein the 3' end of said contiguous span is present at the 3' end of said polynucleotide. 26 A polynucleotide according to any one of claims 17 to 21 , wherein the 3' end of said contiguous span is located at the 3' end of said polynucleotide and said biallelic marker is present at the 3' end of said polynucleotide. 27. A polynucleotide according to any one of claims 17 to 21, wherein the 3' end of said contiguous span is located at the 3' end of said polynucleotide, and wherein the 3' end of said polynucleotide is located withm 20 nucleotides upsfream of a PC7^4-7-related biallelic marker in said sequence. 28. A polynucleotide according to claim 27, wherein the 3' end of said polynucleotide is located 1 nucleotide upstream of said PCTA- 1 -related biallelic marker in said sequence. 29. A polynucleotide according to claim 28, wherein said polynucleotide consists essentially of a sequence selected from the following sequences: DI to D125, and El to E125. 30. An isolated, punfied, or recombinant polynucleotide consisting essentially of a sequence selected from the following sequences: Bl to B47 and CI to C47 31. An isolated, punfied, or recombinant polynucleotide which encodes a polypeptide comprising a contiguous span of at least 6 ammo acids of SEQ ID No 5, wherein said contiguous span includes: - a serine residue at ammo acid position 170 and/or a lysine residue at amino acid position 203 m SEQ ID No 5; and/or - at least one residue selected m the group consisting of a tyrosine residue at ammo acid position 18, a cysteine residue at ammo acid position 35, a methionine residue at ammo acid position 55 and an arginine residue at amino acid position 183 in SEQ ID No 5. 32. An isolated, punfied, or recombinant polynucleotide which encodes a polypeptide comprising a contiguous span of at least 6 ammo acids of SEQ ID No 6, wherein said contiguous span includes: - a serine residue at ammo acid position 170 and/or a lysine residue at ammo acid position 245 m SEQ ID No 6; and/or - at least one residue selected in the group consisting of a tyrosine residue at ammo acid position 18, a cysteine residue at ammo acid position 35, a methionine residue at ammo acid position 55 and an argmme residue at ammo acid position 225 in SEQ ID No 6; and/or - at least 1 of the ammo acid encoded by the exon 6bιs, more particularly at least 1, 2, 3, 5 or 10 ofthe ammo acid positions 183-224 of the SEQ ID No 6 33. An isolated, punfied, or recombinant polynucleotide which encodes a polypeptide comprising a contiguous span of at least 6 ammo acids of SEQ ID No 7, wherein said contiguous span includes: - a senne residue at ammo acid position 170 and/or a lysine residue at ammo acid position 203 in SEQ ID No 7; and/or - at least one residue selected in the group consisting of a tyrosine residue at ammo acid position 18, a cysteme residue at ammo acid position 35, a methionine residue at ammo acid position 55 and an argmme residue at amino acid position 183 in SEQ ID No 7; and/or - at least 1 ofthe ammo acid encoded by the exons 9bιs and 9ter, more particularly at least 1, 2, 3, 5 or 10 ofthe ammo acid positions 313-368 of the SEQ ID No 7. 34. An isolated, punfied, or recombinant polynucleotide compnsing a contiguous span of at least 12 nucleotides of SEQ ID No 8 or the complements thereof, wherein said contiguous span compnses at least 1 ofthe following nucleotide positions of SEQ ID No 8 * 1-500, 501-1000, 1001- 1500, and 1501-1738. 35. An isolated, punfied, or recombinant polynucleotide which encodes a polypeptide comprising a contiguous span of at least 6 ammo acids of SEQ ID No 9, wherein said contiguous span comprises at least 1 ofthe following ammo acid positions of SEQ ID No 9: 1-50, 51-100, 101- 150, 151-200, 201-250, and 251-316. 36. A polynucleotide for use m a hybridization assay for determining the identity of the nucleotide at a PC71-./ -related biallelic marker or the complement thereof. 37. A polynucleotide for use in a sequencing assay for determining the identity of the nucleotide at a PCL4-7-related biallelic marker or the complement thereof. 38 A polynucleotide for use m an enzyme-based mismatch detection assay for determining the identity of the nucleotide at a PCTA- 1 -related biallelic marker or the complement thereof. 39. A polynucleotide for use m amplifying a segment of nucleotides comprising a PCTA-1 - related biallelic marker or the complement thereof. 40. A polynucleotide according to any one of claims 1 to 39 attached to a solid support. 41. An aπay of polynucleotides comprising at least one polynucleotide according to claim 37 42. An aπay according to claim 41, wherein said array is addressable. 43. A polynucleotide according to any one of claims 1 to 39 further comprising a label. 44. A recombinant vector comprising a polynucleotide according to any one of claims 1 to 16, and 31 to 35 45. A host cell comprising a recombinant vector according to claim 44. 46. A non-human host animal or mammal comprising a recombinant vector according to claim 44. 47. A mammalian host cell comprising a PCTA-1 gene disrupted by homologous recombination with a knock out vector, comprising a polynucleotide according to any one of claims 1 to 16, and 31 to 35. 48. A non-human host mammal comprising a PCTA-1 gene disrupted by homologous recombination with a knock out vector, comprising a polynucleotide according to any one of claims 1 to 16, and 31 to 35. 49. A method of genotyping comprising determining the identity of a nucleotide at a PCTA- -related biallelic marker or the complement thereof m a biological sample. 50. A method according to claim 49, wherein said biological sample is denved from a single subject 51. A method according to claim 50, wherein the identity of the nucleotides at said biallelic marker is determined for both copies of said biallelic marker present in said individual's genome. 52. A method according to claim 49, wherein said biological sample is denved from multiple subjects. 53. A method according to claim 49, further comprising amplifying a portion of said sequence comprising the biallelic marker prior to said determining step. 54. A method according to claim 53, wherein said amplifying is performed by PCR 55. A method according to claim 49, wherein said determining is performed by a hybridization assay. 56. A method according to claim 49, wherein said determining is performed by a sequencing assay. 57. A method according to claim 49, wherein said determining is performed by a microsequencmg assay. 58. A method according to claim 49, wherein said determining is performed by an enzyme- based mismatch detection assay. 59. A method of estimating the frequency of an allele of a PCTA- 1 -related biallelic marker in a population comprising. a) genotypmg individuals from said population for said biallelic marker according to the method of claim 49; and b) determining the proportional representation of said biallelic marker in said population. 60. A method of detecting an association between a genotype and a trait, comprising the steps of: a) determining the frequency of at least one PCTA-1 -related biallelic marker m trait positive population according to the method of claim 59, b) determining the frequency of at least one PCTA- 1 -related biallelic marker in a control population according to the method of claim 59; and c) determining whether a statistically significant association exists between said genotype and said trait. 61. A method of estimating the frequency of a haplotype for a set of biallelic markers m a population, comprising: a) genotyping at least one PCL4-7-related biallelic marker according to claim 50 for each individual m said population; b) genotyping a second biallelic marker by determining the identity of the nucleotides at said second biallelic marker for both copies of said second biallelic marker present m the genome of each individual m said population; and c) applying a haplotype determination method to the identities of the nucleotides determined in steps a) and b) to obtain an estimate of said frequency. 62. A method according to claim 61, wherein said haplotype determination method is selected from the group consisting of asymmetric PCR amplification, double PCR amplification of specific alleles, the Clark algoπthm, or an expectation-maximization algoπthm. 63. A method of detecting an association between a haplotype and a trait, comprising the steps of: a) estimating the frequency of at least one haplotype in a trait positive population according to the method of claim 62; b) estimating the frequency of said haplotype in a control population according to the method of claim 62; and c) determining whether a statistically significant association exists between said haplotype and said trait 64. A method according to claim 60, wherein said genotyping steps a) and b) are performed on a single pooled biological sample denved from each of said populations. 65 A method according to claim 60, wherein said genotypmg steps a) and b) performed separately on biological samples derived from each individual in said populations 66 A method according to either claim 60 or 63, wherein said trait is cancer, prostate cancer, an early onset of prostate cancer, a beneficial response to or side effects related to freatment or a vaccination against prostate cancer, a susceptibility to prostate cancer, the level of aggressiveness of prostate cancer tumors, a modified or forthcoming expression ofthe PCTA-1 gene, a modified or forthcoming production of the PCTA- 1 protein, or the production of a modified PCTA-1 protem. 67. A method according to claim 66 wherein said trait is prostate cancer 68. A method according to either claim 60 or 63, wherein said confrol population is a trait negative population. 69. A method according to either claim 60 or 63, wherein said case confrol population is a random population. 70 An isolated, punfied, or recombinant polypeptide comprising a contiguous span of at least 6 ammo acids of SEQ ID No 5, wherein said contiguous span includes. - a senne residue at ammo acid position 170 and/or a lysine residue at amino acid position 203 in SEQ ID No 5; and/or - at least one residue selected m the group consisting of a tyrosine residue at ammo acid position 18, a cysteine residue at ammo acid position 35, a methionine residue at ammo acid position 55 and an arginine residue at ammo acid position 183 in SEQ ID No 5. 71. An isolated, punfied, or recombinant polypeptide comprising a contiguous span of at least 6 ammo acids of SEQ ID No 6, wherein said contiguous span includes. - a serine residue at ammo acid position 170 and/or a lysme residue at ammo acid position 245 in SEQ ID No 6; and/or - at least one residue selected in the group consisting of a tyrosine residue at ammo acid position 18, a cysteine residue at ammo acid position 35, a methionine residue at ammo acid position 55 and an argmme residue at amino acid position 225 in SEQ ID No 6; and/or - at least 1 ofthe ammo acid encoded by the exon 6bιs, more particularly at least 1, 2, 3, 5 or 10 ofthe ammo acid positions 183-224 of the SEQ ID No 6 72. An isolated, punfied, or recombinant polypeptide comprising a contiguous span of at 5 least 6 ammo acids of SEQ ID No 7, wherein said contiguous span includes: - a serine residue at ammo acid position 170 and/or a lysine residue at ammo acid position - at least one residue selected m the group consisting of a tyrosine residue at ammo acid position 18, a cysteine residue at ammo acid position 35, a methionine residue at ammo acid position 10 55 and an argmme residue at ammo acid position 183 in SEQ ID No 7; and/or - at least 1 ofthe ammo acid encoded by the exons 9bιs and 9ter, more particularly at least 1, 2, 3, 5 or 10 of the amino acid positions 313-368 of the SEQ ID No 7 73 An isolated, punfied, or recombinant polypeptide comprising a contiguous span of at 15 least 6 ammo acids of SEQ ID No 9, wherein said contiguous span comprises at least 1 of the following amino acid positions of SEQ ID No 9: 1-50, 51-100, 101-150, 151-200, 201-250, and 251-316. 74. An isolated or punfied antibody composition are capable of selectively binding to an 20 epitope-contammg fragment of a polypeptide according to claim 70, wherein said epitope comprises - a serine residue at ammo acid position 170 and/or a lysine residue at ammo acid position 203 m SEQ ID No 5; and/or - at least one residue selected in the group consisting of a tyrosine residue at ammo acid position 18, a cysteine residue at ammo acid position 35, a methionine residue at ammo acid position 25 55 and an argmme residue at ammo acid position 183 in SEQ ID No 5 75. An isolated or punfied antibody composition are capable of selectively binding to an epitope -containing fragment of a polypeptide according to claim 71 , wherein said epitope comprises - a senne residue at ammo acid position 170 and/or a lysine residue at ammo acid position 30 245 m SEQ ID No 6; and/or - at least one residue selected in the group consisting of a tyrosine residue at ammo acid position 18, a cysteine residue at amino acid position 35, a methionine residue at ammo acid position 55 and an argmme residue at amino acid position 225 in SEQ ID No 6; and/or - at least 1 ofthe ammo acid encoded by the exon 6bιs, more particularly at least 1, 2, 3, 5 or 35 10 ofthe amino acid positions 183-224 ofthe SEQ ID No 6. 76. An isolated or punfied antibody composition are capable of selectively binding to an epitope-contammg fragment of a polypeptide according to claim 72, wherein said epitope comprises: - a senne residue at ammo acid position 170 and/or a lysine residue at ammo acid position 203 in SEQ ID No 7; and/or - at least one residue selected in the group consisting of a tyrosine residue at ammo acid position 18, a cysteme residue at amino acid position 35, a methionine residue at amino acid position 55 and an argmme residue at amino acid position 183 m SEQ ID No 7; and/or - at least 1 ofthe amino acid encoded by the exons 9bιs and 9ter, more particularly at least 1, 2, 3, 5 or 10 of the amino acid positions 313-368 of the SEQ ID No 7. 77. An isolated or punfied antibody composition are capable of selectively binding to an epitope-containmg fragment of a polypeptide according to claim 73, wherein said epitope compnses at least 1 ofthe following ammo acid positions of SEQ ID No 9: 1-50, 51-100, 101-150, 151-200, 201-250, and 251-316. 78. A method of determining whether an individual is at nsk of developing prostate cancer, comprising: a) genotyping at least one PCTA-1 -related biallelic marker according to the method of claim 51; and b) correlating the result of step a) with a nsk of developing prostate cancer. 79. A method according to any one of claims 49, 59, 60, 61, 63, and 78 wherein said PCTA- 7-related biallelic marker is selected from the group consisting of Al to A125 and the complements thereof 80. A method according to claim 78, wherein said PCTA- 1 -related biallelic marker is selected from the following list of biallelic markers: A2, A30, A41, A55 and A57, and the complements thereof. 81. A diagnostic kit compnsing a polynucleotide according to any one of claims 17 to 30, 40 and 43. 82. A computer readable medium having stored thereon a sequence selected from the group consisting of a nucleic acid code comprising one ofthe following: a) a contiguous span of at least 12, 15, 18, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 50, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100, 150, 200, 500, or 1000 nucleotides of SEQ ID No 1, wherein said contiguous span comprises at least 1, 2, 3, 5, or 10 ofthe following nucleotide positions of SEQ ID No 1 : 1-70715, 70795-82207, 82297- 83612, 83824-85297, 85418-86388, 86446-87495, 87523-88294, 88384-89483, 89650-92748, 97156-98309, 98476-99329, 99491-100026, 100212-100281, 100396-100538, 100682-100833, 100995-101920, 102087-102970, 103264-103724, and 103753-106746; b) a contiguous span of at least 12, 15, 18, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 50, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100, 150, 5 200, 500, or 1000 nucleotides of SEQ ID No 1 or the complements thereof, wherein said contiguous span compπses at least one nucleotide selected from the group consisting of a nucleotide G at positions 70728, 87860, 88297, 94432, and 95340 of SEQ ID No 1; a nucleotide A at positions 82218, 83644, 83808, 87787, 87806, 94218, and 97144 of SEQ ID No 1; a nucleotide C at positions 87902, 88215, 88283, 92760, 93726, and 94422 of SEQ ID No 1; and a nucleotide T at positions 10 93903, and 94170 of SEQ ID No l; c) a contiguous span of at least 12, 15, 18, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 50, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100, 150, 200, 500, or 1000 nucleotides of SEQ ID No 1 or the complements thereof, wherein said contiguous span comprises at least one nucleotide selected from the group consisting of a nucleotide G at positions 86435, 93592, 93680, 93681, 93682, 93728, 93761, and 95445 of SEQ ID No 1; a 15 nucleotide A at positions 86434, 88355, 93240, 93471, and 93747of SEQ ID No 1; a nucleotide C at positions 93683, 95126, and 95444 of SEQ ID No 1; and a nucleotide T at positions 94154, and 94430 of SEQ ID No l, d) a contiguous span of at least 12, 15, 18, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 50, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100, 150, 200, 500, or 1000 nucleotides of SEQ ID No 1 or the complements thereof, wherein said contiguous 20 span comprises nucleotide positions selected from the group consisting of the nucleotide positions of SEQ ID No 1 : 92975-92977, 93711-93715, 94151-94153, 94240-94243, 94770-94773, 94804- 94808, 95121-95122, 95129-95135, 95148-95153, 95154-95159, 95173-95178, 95367-95374, 95410-95413, 95418-95420, 95430-95436, 95533-95535, and 95677-95677, e) a contiguous span of at least 12, 15, 18, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 50, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100, 150, 25 200, 500, or 1000 nucleotides of SEQ ID No 2 or the complements thereof, wherein said contiguous span comprises at least 1, 2, 3, 5, or 10 ofthe nucleotide positions 1-162 of SEQ ID No 2; f) a contiguous span of at least 12, 15, 18, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 50, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100, 150, 200, 500, or 1000 nucleotides of SEQ ID No 2 or the complements thereof, wherein said contiguous span compnses at least one nucleotide selected in the group consisting of a nucleotide A at positions 30 253, 363, 527, 2471, and 5397 of SEQ ID No 2; a nucleotide C at positions 1013, 1979, and 2675 of SEQ ID No 2; a nucleotide G at positions 176, 749, 2685, 3593 of SEQ ID No 2; and a nucleotide T at positions 2156, and 2423 of SEQ ID No 2; g) a contiguous span of at least 12, 15, 18, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 50, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100, 150, 200, 500, or 1000 nucleotides of SEQ ID No 2 or the complements thereof, wherein said contiguous 35 span comprises at least one nucleotide selected in the group consisting of a nucleotide A at positions 708, 807, 1493, 1724, and 2000; a nucleotide C at positions 1936, 3379, and 3697; a nucleotide G at positions 709, 1845, 1933, 1934, 1935, 1981, 2014, and 3698; and a nucleotide T at positions 2407, and 2683 of SEQ ID No 2; h) a contiguous span of at least 12, 15, 18, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 50, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100, 150, 200, 500, or 1000 nucleotides of SEQ ID No 2 or the complements thereof, wherein said contiguous 5 span comprises nucleotide positions selected from the group consisting ofthe nucleotide positions of SEQ ID No 2: 1229-1231, 1964-1968, 2404-2406, 2493-2496, 3023-3026, 3057-3061, 3374-3375, 3382-3388, 3401-3406, 3407-3412, 3426-3431, 3620-3627, 3663-3666, 3671-3673, 3683-3689, 3786-3788 and 3930-3932; I) a contiguous span of at least 12, 15, 18, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 50, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100, 150, 10 200, 500, or 1000 nucleotides of SEQ ID No 3 or the complements thereof, wherein said contiguous span comprises at least 1, 2, 3, 5, or 10 ofthe following nucleotide positions of SEQ ID No 3: 1-162 and 747-872, j) a contiguous span of at least 12, 15, 18, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 50, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100, 150, 200, 500, or 1000 nucleotides of SEQ ID No 3 or the complements thereof, wherein said contiguous 15 span comprises at least one nucleotide selected in the group consisting of a nucleotide A at positions 253, 363, 527, 2597, and 5523 of SEQ ID No 3; a nucleotide C at positions 1139, 2105, and 2801 of SEQ ID No 3; a nucleotide G at positions 176, 875, 2811, 3719 of SEQ ID No 3; and a nucleotide T at positions 2282, and 2549 of SEQ ID No 3; k) a contiguous span of at least 12, 15, 18, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 50, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100, 150, 20 200, 500, or 1000 nucleotides of SEQ ID No 3 or the complements thereof, wherein said contiguous span compπses at least one nucleotide selected in the group consisting of a nucleotide A at positions 708, 807, 1619, 1850, and 2126; a nucleotide C at positions 2062, 3505, and 3823; a nucleotide G at positions 709, 1971, 2059, 2060, 2061, 2107, 2140, and 3824; and a nucleotide T at positions 2533, and 2809 of SEQ ID No 3; 25 1) a contiguous span of at least 12, 15, 18, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 50, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100, 150, 200, 500, or 1000 nucleotides of SEQ ID No 3 or the complements thereof, wherein said contiguous span comprises nucleotide positions selected from the group consisting of the nucleotide positions of SEQ ID No 3: 1355-1357, 1892-1894, 2090-2094, 2530-2532, 2619-2622, 3149-3152, 3183-3187, 3500-3501, 3508-3514, 3527-3532, 3533-3538, 3552-3557, 3746-3749, 3789-3792, 3797-3799, 30 3809-3815, 3912-3914 and 4056-4058; m) a contiguous span of at least 12, 15, 18, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 50, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100, 150, 200, 500, or 1000 nucleotides of SEQ ID No 4 or the complements thereof, wherein said contiguous span compπses at least 1, 2, 3, 5, or 10 of the nucleotide positions 1-162 of SEQ ID No 4; n) a contiguous span of at least 12, 15, 18, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 50, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100, 150, 35 200, 500, or 1000 nucleotides of SEQ ID No 4 or the complements thereof, wherein said contiguous span comprises at least one nucleotide selected in the group consisting of a nucleotide A at positions 253, 363, 527 and 2460 of SEQ ID No 4; a nucleotide C at position 1013 of SEQ ID No 4 and a nucleotide G at positions 176, and 749 of SEQ ID No 4; o) a contiguous span of at least 12, 15, 18, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 50, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100, 150, 200, 500, or 1000 nucleotides of SEQ ID No 4 or the complements thereof, wherein said contiguous span compπses at least one nucleotide selected in the group consisting of a nucleotide A at positions 708 and 807 and a nucleotide G at position 709 of SEQ ID No 4; p) a contiguous span of at least 12, 15, 18, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 50, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100, 150, 200, 500, or 1000 nucleotides of SEQ ID No 4 or the complements thereof, wherein said contiguous span comprises the pairs of nucleotide positions 1136-1137 of SEQ ID No 4; q) a contiguous span of at least 12, 15, 18, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 50, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100, 150, 200, 500, or 1000 nucleotides of SEQ ID No 8 or the complements thereof, wherein said contiguous span comprises at least 1, 2, 3, 5, or 10 ofthe following nucleotide positions of SEQ ID No 8 1-500, 501-1000, 1001-1500, and 1501-1738; and, r) a nucleotide sequence complementary to any one ofthe preceding nucleotide sequences 83. A computer readable medium having stored thereon a sequence consisting of a polypeptide code comprising: a) a contiguous span of at least 6 ammo acids of SEQ ID No 5, wherein said contiguous span includes. I) a serine residue at ammo acid position 170 and/or a lysine residue at amino acid position 203 in SEQ ID No 5, and/or n) at least one residue selected in the group consisting of a tyrosine residue at ammo acid position 18, a cysteine residue at amino acid position 35, a methionine residue at ammo acid position 55 and an argmme residue at ammo acid position 183 m SEQ ID No 5; b) a contiguous span of at least 6 amino acids of SEQ ID No 6, wherein said contiguous span includes: I) a serine residue at ammo acid position 170 and or a lysine residue at ammo acid position 245 in SEQ ID No 6; and/or u) at least one residue selected in the group consisting of a tyrosine residue at ammo acid position 18, a cysteine residue at amino acid position 35, a methionine residue at ammo acid position 55 and an argmme residue at ammo acid position 225 in SEQ ID No 6; and/or in) at least 1 of the ammo acid positions 183-224 ofthe SEQ ID No 6; c) a contiguous span of at least 6 ammo acids of SEQ ED No 7, wherein said contiguous span includes. I) a serine residue at ammo acid position 170 and/or a lysine residue at ammo acid position 203 in SEQ ID No 7; and/or n) at least one residue selected in the group consisting of a tyrosine residue at ammo acid position 18, a cysteine residue at ammo acid position 35, a methionine residue at amino acid position 55 and an argmme residue at ammo acid position 183 m SEQ ID No 7; and/or in) at least 1 ofthe ammo acid positions 313-368 of the SEQ ID No 7; and, 5 d) a contiguous span of at least 6 ammo acids of SEQ ID No 9. 84. A computer system comprising a processor and a data storage device wherein said data storage device a computer readable medium according to with claim 82 or 83. 10 85. A computer system according to claim 84, further comprising a sequence comparer and a data storage device having reference sequences stored thereon 86. A computer system of Claim 85 wherein said sequence comparer comprises a computer program which indicates polymoφhisms. 15 87. A computer system of Claim 84 further comprising an identifier which identifies features in said sequence. 88. A method for comparing a first sequence to a reference sequence, compnsing the steps 20 of: reading said first sequence and said reference sequence through use of a computer program which compares sequences; and determining differences between said first sequence and said reference sequence with said computer program, 25 wherein said first sequence is selected from the group consisting of a nucleic acid code comprising one ofthe following: a) a contiguous span of at least 12, 15, 18, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 50, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100, 150, 200, 500, or 1000 nucleotides of SEQ ID No 1, wherein said contiguous span compπses at least 1, 2, 3, 5, or 10 ofthe following nucleotide positions of SEQ ID No 1 : 1-70715, 70795-82207, 82297- 30 83612, 83824-85297, 85418-86388, 86446-87495, 87523-88294, 88384-89483, 89650-92748, 97156-98309, 98476-99329, 99491-100026, 100212-100281, 100396-100538, 100682-100833, 100995-101920, 102087-102970, 103264-103724, and 103753-106746; b) a contiguous span of at least 12, 15, 18, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 50, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100, 150, 200, 500, or 1000 nucleotides of SEQ ID No 1 or the complements thereof, wherein said contiguous 35 span comprises at least one nucleotide selected from the group consisting of a nucleotide G at positions 70728, 87860, 88297, 94432, and 95340 of SEQ ID No 1 ; a nucleotide A at positions 82218, 83644, 83808, 87787, 87806, 94218, and 97144 of SEQ ID No 1 ; a nucleotide C at positions 87902, 88215, 88283, 92760, 93726, and 94422 of SEQ ID No 1; and a nucleotide T at positions 93903, and 94170 of SEQ ID No l; c) a contiguous span of at least 12, 15, 18, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 50, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100, 150, 200, 500, or 1000 nucleotides of SEQ ID No 1 or the complements thereof, wherein said contiguous 5 span comprises at least one nucleotide selected from the group consisting of a nucleotide G at positions 86435, 93592, 93680, 93681, 93682, 93728, 93761, and 95445 of SEQ ID No 1; a nucleotide A at positions 86434, 88355, 93240, 93471, and 93747of SEQ ID No 1; a nucleotide C at positions 93683, 95126, and 95444 of SEQ ID No 1; and a nucleotide T at positions 94154, and 94430 of SEQ ID No 1, 10 d) a contiguous span of at least 12, 15, 18, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 50, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100, 150, 200, 500, or 1000 nucleotides of SEQ ID No 1 or the complements thereof, wherein said contiguous span comprises nucleotide positions selected from the group consisting ofthe nucleotide positions of SEQ ID No 1. 92975-92977, 93711-93715, 94151-94153, 94240-94243, 94770-94773, 94804- 94808, 95121-95122, 95129-95135, 95148-95153, 95154-95159, 95173-95178, 95367-95374, 15 95410-95413, 95418-95420, 95430-95436, 95533-95535, and 95677-95677; e) a contiguous span of at least 12, 15, 18, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 50, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100, 150, 200, 500, or 1000 nucleotides of SEQ ID No 2 or the complements thereof, wherein said contiguous span compπses at least 1, 2, 3, 5, or 10 ofthe nucleotide positions 1-162 of SEQ ID No 2, f) a contiguous span of at least 12, 15, 18, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 50, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100, 150, 20 200, 500, or 1000 nucleotides of SEQ ID No 2 or the complements thereof, wherein said contiguous span comprises at least one nucleotide selected in the group consisting of a nucleotide A at positions 253, 363, 527, 2471, and 5397 of SEQ ID No 2; a nucleotide C at positions 1013, 1979, and 2675 of SEQ ID No 2; a nucleotide G at positions 176, 749, 2685, 3593 of SEQ ID No 2; and a nucleotide T at positions 2156, and 2423 of SEQ ID No 2, 25 g) a contiguous span of at least 12, 15, 18, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 50, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100, 150, 200, 500, or 1000 nucleotides of SEQ ID No 2 or the complements thereof, wherein said contiguous span comprises at least one nucleotide selected m the group consisting of a nucleotide A at positions 708, 807, 1493, 1724, and 2000; a nucleotide C at positions 1936, 3379, and 3697; a nucleotide G at positions 709, 1845, 1933, 1934, 1935, 1981, 2014, and 3698; and a nucleotide T at positions 30 2407, and 2683 of SEQ ID No 2; h) a contiguous span of at least 12, 15, 18, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 50, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100, 150, 200, 500, or 1000 nucleotides of SEQ ID No 2 or the complements thereof, wherein said contiguous span comprises nucleotide positions selected from the group consisting ofthe nucleotide positions of SEQ ID No 2: 1229-1231, 1964-1968, 2404-2406, 2493-2496, 3023-3026, 3057-3061, 3374-3375, 35 3382-3388, 3401-3406, 3407-3412, 3426-3431, 3620-3627, 3663-3666, 3671-3673, 3683-3689, 3786-3788 and 3930-3932; 1) a contiguous span of at least 12, 15, 18, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 50, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100, 150, 200, 500, or 1000 nucleotides of SEQ ID No 3 or the complements thereof, wherein said contiguous span comprises at least 1, 2, 3, 5, or 10 ofthe following nucleotide positions of SEQ ID No 3: 1-162 and 747-872; j) a contiguous span of at least 12, 15, 18, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 50, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100, 150, 200, 500, or 1000 nucleotides of SEQ ID No 3 or the complements thereof, wherein said contiguous span comprises at least one nucleotide selected m the group consisting of a nucleotide A at positions 253, 363, 527, 2597, and 5523 of SEQ ID No 3; a nucleotide C at positions 1139, 2105, and 2801 of SEQ ID No 3; a nucleotide G at positions 176, 875, 2811, 3719 of SEQ ID No 3; and a nucleotide T at positions 2282, and 2549 of SEQ ID No 3; k) a contiguous span of at least 12, 15, 18, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 50, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100, 150, 200, 500, or 1000 nucleotides of SEQ ID No 3 or the complements thereof, wherein said contiguous span compπses at least one nucleotide selected in the group consisting of a nucleotide A at positions 708, 807, 1619, 1850, and 2126, a nucleotide C at positions 2062, 3505, and 3823; a nucleotide G at positions 709, 1971, 2059, 2060, 2061, 2107, 2140, and 3824, and a nucleotide T at positions 2533, and 2809 of SEQ ID No 3; 1) a contiguous span of at least 12, 15, 18, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 50, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100, 150, 200, 500, or 1000 nucleotides of SEQ ID No 3 or the complements thereof, wherein said contiguous span compπses nucleotide positions selected from the group consisting of the nucleotide positions of SEQ ID No 3: 1355-1357, 1892-1894, 2090-2094, 2530-2532, 2619-2622, 3149-3152, 3183-3187, 3500-3501, 3508-3514, 3527-3532, 3533-3538, 3552-3557, 3746-3749, 3789-3792, 3797-3799, 3809-3815, 3912-3914 and 4056-4058; m) a contiguous span of at least 12, 15, 18, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 50, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100, 150, 200, 500, or 1000 nucleotides of SEQ ID No 4 or the complements thereof, wherein said contiguous span compπses at least 1, 2, 3, 5, or 10 ofthe nucleotide positions 1-162 of SEQ ED No 4, n) a contiguous span of at least 12, 15, 18, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 50, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100, 150, 200, 500, or 1000 nucleotides of SEQ ED No 4 or the complements thereof, wherein said contiguous span compnses at least one nucleotide selected in the group consisting of a nucleotide A at positions 253, 363, 527 and 2460 of SEQ ED No 4; a nucleotide C at position 1013 of SEQ ID No 4 and a nucleotide G at positions 176, and 749 of SEQ ID No 4; o) a contiguous span of at least 12, 15, 18, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 50, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100, 150, 200, 500, or 1000 nucleotides of SEQ ED No 4 or the complements thereof, wherein said contiguous span comprises at least one nucleotide selected m the group consisting of a nucleotide A at positions 708 and 807 and a nucleotide G at position 709 of SEQ ED No 4, p) a contiguous span of at least 12, 15, 18, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 50, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100, 150, 200, 500, or 1000 nucleotides of SEQ ED No 4 or the complements thereof, wherein said contiguous span comprises the pairs of nucleotide positions 1136-1137 of SEQ ED No 4; q) a contiguous span of at least 12, 15, 18, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 50, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100, 150, 200, 500, or 1000 nucleotides of SEQ ED No 8 or the complements thereof, wherein said contiguous span compnses at least 1, 2, 3, 5, or 10 ofthe following nucleotide positions of SEQ ID No 8: 1-500, 501-1000, 1001-1500, and 1501-1738; and, r) a nucleotide sequence complementary to any one ofthe preceding nucleotide sequences; and, a polypeptide code comprising * a) a contiguous span of at least 6 ammo acids of SEQ ED No 5, wherein said contiguous span includes. l) a senne residue at ammo acid position 170 and or a lysine residue at amino acid position 203 m SEQ ED No 5; and/or u) at least one residue selected in the group consisting of a tyrosine residue at ammo acid position 18, a cysteine residue at amino acid position 35, a methionine residue at ammo acid position 55 and an arginine residue at ammo acid position 183 in SEQ ED No 5, b) a contiguous span of at least 6 ammo acids of SEQ ED No 6, wherein said contiguous span includes: I) a serine residue at ammo acid position 170 and/or a lysine residue at ammo acid position 245 in SEQ ED No 6; and/or u) at least one residue selected in the group consisting of a tyrosine residue at ammo acid position 18, a cysteine residue at ammo acid position 35, a methionine residue at amino acid position 55 and an argmme residue at ammo acid position 225 in SEQ ED No 6; and/or in) at least 1 ofthe ammo acid positions 183-224 of the SEQ ED No 6, c) a contiguous span of at least 6 ammo acids of SEQ ED No 7, wherein said contiguous span includes * I) a serine residue at ammo acid position 170 and/or a lysine residue at amino acid position 203 in SEQ ED No 7; and/or n) at least one residue selected in the group consisting of a tyrosine residue at ammo acid position 18, a cysteine residue at ammo acid position 35, a methionine residue at amino acid position 55 and an argmme residue at ammo acid position 183 in SEQ ED No 7; and/or in) at least 1 ofthe ammo acid positions 313-368 ofthe SEQ ED No 7; and, d) a contiguous span of at least 6 amino acids of SEQ ED No 9.

Inventors: BLUMENFELD MARTA, BOUGUELERET LYDIE, CHUMAKOV ILYA, BLUMENFELD, MARTA, BOUGUELERET, LYDIE, CHUMAKOV, ILYA
Applicants: BLUMENFELD MARTA, BOUGUELERET LYDIE, CHUMAKOV ILYA, GENSET SA, BLUMENFELD, MARTA, BOUGUELERET, LYDIE, CHUMAKOV, ILYA, GENSET
Application year: 1999
Main classification: C12N15
IPC codes: A01K67, C07K7, C07K14, C07K16, C12M1, C12N1, C12N5, C12N15, C12Q1, G06F19, G11B23